2. 狮子吼品复注巴利 2. Sīhanādavaggo
264 段
《小狮子吼经》的注释巴利
1. Cūḷasīhanādasuttavaṇṇanā
139 139. 所谓“事生起”,是指名为经教叙述事件之义的起源;因为它是它的义,所以被称为“事生起”,这就是它的含义。“因利养恭敬之缘”:是指以利养恭敬为因由,也就是由于世尊和僧团中生起了利养恭敬,或者是为了让自己产生利养恭敬的缘故。“外道的悲叹”:是指外道们发出“难道只有沙门乔达摩才是沙门吗?”之类迷乱言论的因由。说了“生起了大利养恭敬”之后,为了显示“一切善见”的含义及其生起的原因,而开示“四种量者”等。四种量就是四种衡量标准,具备这四种标准的人就叫“四种量者”。“世间共住”是指世间众生以聚集、会合的方式共同居住,意思就是有情之身。用它来衡量殊胜等差别,所以叫“量”。以色身、身体为衡量标准的,就是“色量者”;正因为如此而对色生起净信的,就是“色净信者”。其余词句也应依此方式理解。“声”是指流传的赞叹之声。“粗”是指资具方面的粗劣。“法”是指戒等功德法。巴利
139. Suttadesanāvatthusaṅkhātassa atthassa uppatti aṭṭhuppatti, sā tassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattikoti vuttovāyamattho. Lābhasakkārapaccayāti lābhasakkāranimittaṃ, bhagavato saṅghassa ca uppannalābhasakkārahetu, attano vā lābhasakkāruppādanahetu. Titthiyaparideviteti titthiyānaṃ ‘‘kiṃ bho samaṇoyeva gotamo samaṇo’’tiādinā vippalapanimittaṃ. ‘‘Mahālābhasakkāro uppajjī’’ti vatvā samantapāsādikatthaṃ tassa uppattikāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘catuppamāṇiko hī’’tiādimāha. Cattāri pamāṇāni catuppamāṇāni, catuppamāṇāni etassa atthīti catuppamāṇiko. Lokoyeva saṅgamma samāgamma vasanaṭṭhena lokasannivāso, sattakāyoti attho. Pamināti uḷāratādivisesaṃ etenāti pamāṇaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.65) rūpaṃ rūpakāyo pamāṇaṃ etassāti rūpappamāṇo. Tato eva rūpe pasannoti rūpappasanno. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo . Ghosoti pavattathutighoso (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.65). Lūkhanti paccayalūkhatā. Dhammoti sīlādayo guṇadhammā adhippetā.
对于那些人来说,身高是指高度,而且应当看它在各个时候是合乎标准的。体围是指不瘦不胖、恰到好处的围度。形态是指身体各肢节的端正匀称。圆满是指身体所有部分完整无缺。其中取量为标准,就是依那个色身、那份色相成就所具有的标准性。生起净信,就是生起决意。巴利
Tesaṃ puggalānaṃ. Ārohanti uccataṃ. Sā ca kho tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle pamāṇayuttā daṭṭhabbā. Pariṇāhanti nātikisanātithūlatāvasena mitapariṇāhaṃ. Saṇṭhānanti tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ susaṇṭhitataṃ. Pāripūrinti sabbesaṃ sarīrāvayavānaṃ paripuṇṇataṃ avekallataṃ. Tattha pamāṇaṃ gahetvāti tasmiṃ rūpe rūpasampattiyaṃ pamāṇabhāvaṃ upādāya. Pasādaṃ janetīti adhimokkhaṃ uppādeti.
“对他人的称赞”是指用“某人是这样、又是那样”这样的话来称扬对方的声誉与功德。“对他人的当面赞美”是指当面赞扬对方,引发对对方的称叹。“对他人的背后称誉”是指背着对方宣扬他的功德。“辗转传来的称赞”是指通过一代代辗转相传,把他人名声赞誉的声音带过来。“在此处”是指在那种称扬赞叹的声音当中。巴利
Paravaṇṇanāyāti ‘‘amuko ediso ca ediso cā’’ti yasaguṇavacanena. Parathomanāyāti sammukhāva parassa silāghuppādanena abhitthavanena. Parapasaṃsanāyāti parammukhā parassa guṇasaṃkittanena. Paravaṇṇahārikāyāti paramparavaṇṇahārikāya paramparāya parassa kittisaddūpasaṃhārena. Tatthāti tasmiṃ thutighose.
衣服粗劣,是指衣服粗厚、破旧、补丁很多等粗糙的状况。钵粗劣,是指钵有很多接缝、破损等粗糙的状况。或者种种难行,是指通过修头陀支等而进行的种种艰难修行。巴利
Cīvaralūkhanti thūlajiṇṇabahutunnakatādiṃ cīvarassa lūkhabhāvaṃ. Pattalūkhanti anekaganthikāhatādiṃ pattassa lūkhabhāvaṃ. Vividhaṃ vā dukkarakārikanti dhutaṅgasevanādivasena pavattaṃ nānāvidhaṃ dukkaracariyaṃ.
或者,是见到了戒——也就是因为戒行圆满,而以智慧之眼见到清净的身业和语业;或者,是见到了定——也就是由证得禅那等而成就的定;或者,是见到了慧——也就是被称为观与神通的慧。巴利
Sīlaṃ vā passitvāti sīlapāripūrivasena visuddhaṃ kāyavacīsucaritaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā passitvā. Jhānādiadhigamasiddhaṃ samādhiṃ vā. Vipassanābhiññāsaṅkhātaṃ paññaṃ vā.
这里说的是“见到世尊的身体”这一关联。即使只是以容貌身形来衡量的人,也只会对正自觉者生起净信,因为世尊的色身成就实在太圆满:它由无量时劫累积的福德威力所成就,完全无可挑剔,一切形相、一切支分都圆满具足,因此周身都令人欢喜信服。它那种可爱明亮,在清净无云的天上、满月之夜,能胜过圆满月轮而更加照耀;它那种光明灿烂,在秋季能胜过那光芒倍增、光网炽盛的日轮;它兼具柔和与炽盛的光辉,超越日月二者,压倒那持续存在、能在一刹那间照亮一万个世界的大梵天王光明聚集,然后照耀、炽燃、放出光明。巴利
Bhagavato sarīraṃ disvāti sambandho. Rūpappamāṇopi sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati aparimitakālasamupacitapuññānubhāvanipphannāya sabbaso anavajjāya sabbākāraparipuṇṇāvayavāya rūpakāyasampattiyā samantapāsādikattā, yassā rucirabhāvo visuddhe vigatavalāhake deve puṇṇamāsiyaṃ paripuṇṇakalābhāgamaṇḍalaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ abhibhavitvā atirocati, pabhassarabhāvo saradasamayaṃ saṃvaddhitadiguṇatejakiraṇajālasamujjalaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ abhibhavati, sommakiraṇarasasamujjalabhāvehi tadubhayehi abhibhuyya vattamānaṃ ekasmiṃ khaṇe dasasahassilokadhātuṃ vijjotanasamatthaṃ mahābrahmuno pabhāsamudayaṃ abhivihacca bhāsate tapate virocati ca.
虽然施舍身体的一部分等本身就属于布施巴拉密,但为了显示施舍的殊胜性质和极其难行的性质,才特别举出施舍身体的一部分等。在这当中,又从施舍身体的一部分里单独举出施舍眼睛;同样,虽然都属于施舍的性质,除了施舍王国之外,又单独举出施舍妻子儿女。以“等”字所包含的方式,应当理解为:“等”字涵盖了前际之行、前修行等因的成就,以及“他是世尊……”所说的果德成就,还有“他开示法……”所说的利益众生之行。唯独对正自觉者生起净信,因为如上所说的功德不与其他人共通,而且稀有、奇妙。对于其余的情形也是同样的道理。巴利
Satipi aṅgapariccāgādīnaṃ dānapāramibhāve pariccāgavisesabhāvadassanatthañceva sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca aṅgapariccāgādiggahaṇaṃ, tatthāpi ca aṅgapariccāgato visuṃ nayanapariccāgaggahaṇaṃ, pariccāgabhāvasāmaññepi rajjapariccāgato puttadārapariccāgaggahaṇañca kataṃ. Ādinā nayenāti ādi-saddena pubbayogapubbacariyādihetusampattiyā, ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.157, 255) vuttāya phalasampattiyā, ‘‘so dhammaṃ desetī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.255) vuttāya sattupakārakiriyāya ca saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati yathāvuttaguṇānaṃ anaññasādhāraṇabhāvato acchariyabbhutabhāvato ca. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
说了“见到粗劣的衣”之后,为了说明它,又说了“如果世尊……”等话。以麻粪扫衣:就是用包裹死尸后丢弃、抖掉一葫芦量的蛆虫后取来的麻粪扫衣。沉重:就是重,难:就是难行之意。三种舞女:按妻、年轻女子、中年妇女来分,或按少年、青年、老年来分,共有三种舞女。豆汁:就是绿豆汤或圆豆汁。把“他将活命”里的“名为”一词拿来连接。因为和“名为”一词结合,就类似未来时的用法,意思就是“活命”。无息气的:就是没有呼吸,出入息已经停止。巴利
‘‘Cīvaralūkhaṃ disvā’’ti vatvā taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sace bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sāṇapaṃsukūlacīvarenāti matakaḷevaraṃ paliveṭhetvā chaḍḍitena tumbamatte kimī papphoṭetvā gahitena sāṇapaṃsukūlacīvarena. Bhāriyanti garukaṃ, dukkaranti attho. Vadhuyuvatīmajjhimitthivasena, bālayobbanapurāṇavasena vā tividhanāṭakatā. Hareṇuyūsaṃ maṇḍalakalāyaraso. ‘‘Yāpessati nāmā’’ti nāma-saddaṃ ānetvā sambandho. Nāma-saddayogena hi anāgatakālassa viya payogo, yāpeti icceva attho. Appāṇakanti nirassāsaṃ nirodhitassāsapassāsaṃ.
“定的功德”这一说法,是通过举出禅那等来阐明共通意义上的含义。通过摧折慢心与刚强,使其达到不需侍奉的状态,这也属于调伏,所以说“调伏巴提咖之子等”。“等”字涵盖了调伏萨恰咖、旷野夜叉、巴卡梵天等事例。“巴韦鲁”是指一个叫巴韦鲁的地方。“具足音声”是指具备八支音声。借此展示梵音、迦陵频伽鸟语等,依照特相理趣之理,就像显示其余诸相的圆满一样——因为这些与其余诸相不相分离——同时也彰显了诸佛说法的庄严。巴利
Samādhiguṇanti sādhāraṇato vuttamatthaṃ vivarati jhānādiggahaṇena. Mānadabbanimmadanena nibbisevanabhāvāpādanampi damanamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pāthikaputtadamanādīnī’’ti. Ādi-saddena saccakāḷavakabakadamanādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Bāverunti evaṃnāmakaṃ visayaṃ. Sarasampannoti aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena sarena samannāgato. Tena brahmassaratākaravīkabhāṇitādassanena lakkhaṇahāranayena avasesalakkhaṇapāripūriṃ viya tadavinābhāvato buddhānaṃ desanāvilāsañca vibhāveti.
光芒被夺:因为佛陀的威德,他们的光热消失了。像黑半月那样:因为众生的愚痴黑暗被压伏了,所以就像黑半月的夜晚一样。太阳:意思是太阳升起后照耀。巴利
Hatappabhāti buddhānubhāvena vigatatejā. Kāḷapakkhūpameti sattānaṃ byāmohandhakārābhibhavena kāḷapakkharattūpame. Sūriyeti sūriye udayitvā obhāsenteti adhippāyo.
在三角形街道那里,就是“在叉路口”。在道路交汇处,就是“在四衢道”。“悲叹”是指以哀号哭诉的方式胡乱叫嚷。因为由于过度忧愁而发出的无用言语,就是悲叹。“当世间正在产生时,他们便已产生”:他们以此显示自己邪见的古老性。巴利
Siṅghāṭaketi tikoṇaracchāyaṃ. Catukketi sandhiyaṃ. Paridevantīti anutthunanavasena vippalapanti. Sokādhikakato hi vacīpalāpo paridevo. Loke uppajjamāneyeva uppannāti attano diṭṭhivādassa purātanabhāvaṃ dīpenti.
“其余文句也是如此”:这是指“这里,第二位沙门”等其余诸句。正如在“确实远离诸欲”这一句中作出的限定,在“远离不善法”这一句中也同样作出了限定,因为这里要表达的就是这种决定性的含义;此处也是如此。因此说“第二位等也……”。由于证得沙门果,从直接的意义上说就是沙门的状态,所以针对这些人,这里宣说了四种沙门。为了用经文来证明这个意思,便说了“因此世尊说……”等话。按照修行道次第和说法次第,一来者等被称为第二等,而入流者位居第一是不说自明的,所以没有受到质疑。这里指的是住果位的沙门,因为取的是“已止息恶”的沙门含义。那么,为什么这里不像《大般涅槃经》那样,把处于道位的修行者和为证果而修行的人也一并列入呢?这是因为所化众生的意乐不同。在那部经中,为了显示“为证圣道,此教法之外连内观都没有,何况道与果”,世尊说:“于教法理趣中证得少分者,此教法之外也没有沙门。”而在这里,取的是各自达到究竟的沙门状态,所以只取了住果位的沙门,因为“从道位到果位,住果者才是更殊胜的应供者”。这个意思在两部经中正是通过说法的差异而体现出来的。巴利
Sesapadesupīti ‘‘idha dutiyo samaṇo’’tiādīsu sesavāresupi (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.241-242) yathā hi ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti (pārā. 11; dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123) ettha kato niyamo ‘‘vivicca akusalehī’’ti (pārā. 11; dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123) etthāpi katoyeva hoti sāvadhāraṇasseva atthassa icchitabbattā, evamidhāpīti. Tenāha ‘‘dutiyādayopī’’tiādi. Sāmaññaphalādhigamavasena nippariyāyato samaṇabhāvoti tesaṃ vasenettha cattāro samaṇā desitāti tamatthaṃ suttantarena samatthetuṃ ‘‘tenevāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭipattikkamena desanākkamena ca sakadāgāmiādīnaṃ dutiyāditā vuttāti sotāpannassa paṭhamatā avuttasiddhāti na coditā. Phalaṭṭhakasamaṇāva adhippetā samitapāpasamaṇaggahaṇato. Kasmā panettha mahāparinibbāne viya maggaṭṭhā tadatthāya paṭipannā ca na gahitāti? Veneyyajjhāsayato. Tattha hi maggādhigamatthāya vipassanāpi ito bahiddhā natthi, kuto maggaphalānīti dassentena bhagavatā ‘‘ñāyassa dhammassa padesavattī, ito bahiddhā samaṇopi natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha pana niṭṭhānappattameva taṃtaṃsamaṇabhāvaṃ gaṇhantena phalaṭṭhakasamaṇāva gahitā ‘‘maggaṭṭhato phalaṭṭho savisesaṃ dakkhiṇeyyo’’ti. Svāyamattho dvīsu suttesu desanābhedeneva viññāyatīti.
“空”就是远离。“虚”就是没有实质,因为其中缺少真正修行者的实质。被称为“论议”,是因为他们依这些来宣说,是见行者们阐明种种不同见解的体系,所以说“四种常住论”等等。其中应当说明的内容,后面会接着讲到。“他们”就是指前面所说的那些沙门。“在这里”是指说到“外道论议”时,指外道的宗义之中。巴利
Rittāti vivittā. Tucchāti nissārā paṭipannakasārābhāvato. Pavadanti etehīti pavādā, diṭṭhigatikānaṃ nānādiṭṭhidīpakā samayāti āha ‘‘cattāro sassatavādā’’tiādi. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āgamissati. Teti yathāvuttasamaṇā. Etthāti ‘‘parappavādā’’ti vutte bāhirakasamaye.
他们说“在其中”,因为这里是依处格意义的主格词。“正道”指的是与观智一起的圣道。正是通过这个圣道,涅槃被了知、被到达、被彻证。正因为它是使人证得涅槃的因,它本身也被称为“法”,所以说“正道的法”。巴利
Yanti yasmiṃ. Bhummatthe hi idaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Ñāyo vuccati saha vipassanāya ariyamaggo. Tena hi nibbānaṃ ñāyati gammati paṭivijjhatīti. So eva nibbānasampāpakahetutāya dhammoti āha ‘‘ñāyassa dhammassā’’ti.
那些外道教说之所以成为非良田或良田,是因为圣道的有无,以及极清净的戒和极清净的止观是否具足。而这两者又以教法是恶说还是善说为根本原因,这恶说或善说又取决于它是非正自觉者还是正自觉者所宣说的。这是为了说明:由于导师有巴拉基格类的缺失这个原因,他的教法就无法导向出离。巴利
Tesaṃ parappavādasāsanānaṃ akhettatā khettatā ca ariyamaggassa abhāvabhāvā suparisuddhassa sīlassa suparisuddhāya samathavipassanāya abhāvato sāvato ca. Tadubhayañca durakkhātasvākkhātabhāvahetukaṃ, so ca asammāsambuddhasammāsambuddhapaveditatāyāti parājikāya satthu vipattihetutāya sāsanassa aniyyānabhāvoti dasseti.
现在,为了从譬喻和巴利经文两方面来证明前面所说的义理,先引出“因此世尊”等巴利经文,然后以譬喻的方式开演其中的经义,而说“因为”等语。其中,因为某些狮子——特别是殊胜的狮子——前两只脚也能起到手的作用,所以说“妙手足”。狮子的毛,称为鬐毛。所谓“所行境为象族”,就是本性的象族,也称为“黑耳”。“Ghoṭaka”指劣马。在须弥山侧,有一片方圆五十由旬、被木棉树覆盖的湖,名为木棉湖,周围有大木棉林;针对这片林子,所以说“在木棉林”。在外道居住的地方,这些沙门中连一个也不会生起,但在这里并没有这种分别,而是完全彻底地不会生起;为了表明这一点,所以说“一个沙门也没有”。“为圣道所严饰”:意思是为圣道的生起而作准备;当佛教徒正确修行时,圣道便会显现。这就是其含义。巴利
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ pariyāyato ca pāḷiyā ca samatthetuṃ ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādinā pāḷiṃ dassetvā upamāpadesena tattha suttaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘yasmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yasmā ekaccānaṃ visesato sīhānaṃ purimaṃ pādadvayaṃ hatthakiccampi karoti, tasmā āha ‘‘surattahatthapādo’’ti. Sīhassa kesā nāma kesarāyatanā khandhalomā. Gocariyahatthikulaṃ nāma pakatihatthikulaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘kālāvaka’’ntipi vuccati. Ghoṭako nāma assakhaḷuṅko. Sineruparibhaṇḍe simbalirukkhehi sañchādito paññāsayojano daho simbalidaho, taṃ parivāretvā mahantaṃ simbalivanaṃ, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘simbalidahavane’’ti. Aññatitthāvāsabhūmiyaṃ imesu samaṇesu ekacco na uppajjati, īdiso panettha vikappo natthi, sabbena sabbaṃ na uppajjantevāti dassento ‘‘ekasamaṇopī’’ti āha. Ariyamaggaparikkhateti ariyamagguppattiyā abhisaṅkhate, yadā sāsanikānaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā ariyamaggo dibbati, tadāti attho.
“正”就是善好。所谓善好的吼叫,是带着因由、经过妥善宣说而发出的,所以经文说“以因”。而这个因必须是正确不颠倒的,所以经文说“以理”,意思就是依正理。这样具足了之后,它就能成办所期望的目的,为了显示这一点,经文说“以理由”。如果畜生狮子的吼叫,因为胜过一切畜生、部分人和非人的叫声,而被称为最胜吼,那如来的狮子吼就更不必说了,所以说“狮子吼就是最胜吼”。如果畜生狮子吼被称为最胜,是因为它无所畏惧、没有敌手,那么如来狮子吼在这方面更是超胜,所以说“无畏吼、无敌对吼”。现在为了用理由说明它为什么是最胜吼,经文说了“对于这些……”等话,以此来证明前面所说的“正”。其中,“存在”一词显示狮子吼具有最上的意义,因为真实就是最上的意义。正是由于具备这种真实性,才是无畏的吼叫;为了说明这一点,经文说“这些沙门……名为……”。因为说虚妄不实之语的人,从任何地方都可能产生恐惧或疑虑;为了显示“就在这里”这一限定的准确无误,经文说“对于我们……名为无敌对吼”。因为如果某事物在别处也存在,就不应该用“只在这里”来限定它。巴利
Sammāti suṭṭhu. Suṭṭhu nadanaṃ nāma hetuyuttaṃ suṭṭhu katvā kathananti āha ‘‘hetunā’’ti. So ca hetu aviparīto eva icchitabboti āha ‘‘nayenā’’ti, ñāyenāti attho. Evaṃbhūto ca so yathādhippetatthaṃ karoti sādhetīti dassento āha ‘‘kāraṇenā’’ti. Yadi tiracchānasīhassa nādo sabbatiracchānaekaccamanussāmanussanādato seṭṭhattā seṭṭhanādo, kimaṅgaṃ pana tathāgatasīhanādoti āha ‘‘sīhanādanti seṭṭhanāda’’nti. Yadi tiracchānasīhanādassa seṭṭhanādatā nibbhayatāya appaṭisattutāya icchitā, tathāgatasīhanādasseva ayamattho sātisayoti āha ‘‘abhītanādaṃ appaṭināda’’nti. Idānissa seṭṭhanādabhāvaṃ kāraṇena paṭipādento ‘‘imesañhī’’tiādimāha. Tena ‘‘sammā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ samattheti. Tattha atthitāyāti iminā sīhanādassa uttamatthataṃ dasseti. Bhūtaṭṭho hi uttamaṭṭho. Tāya eva bhūtaṭṭhatāya abhītanādatāti dassento ‘‘ime samaṇā…pe… nāma hotī’’ti āha. Abhūtañhi vadato kutoci bhayaṃ vā āsaṅkā vā siyāti ‘‘idhevā’’ti niyamassa aviparītataṃ dassento ‘‘amhākampi…pe… appaṭinādo nāma hotī’’ti āha. Yañhi aññatthāpi atthi, taṃ idhevāti avadhāretuṃ na yuttanti.
140 Kho 是表示决定的虚词。由此说明“确实存在”。Yaṃ 是主格,用作工具格,所以注释说“以什么因由”。所谓“津渡”,指的是六十二种邪见,因为离开了这些邪见,就不存在任何邪见的挣扎。持邪见的人,在那里、就在那里,一次又一次地浮上来又沉下去,这样游渡,这就是被称为“到彼岸”的“渡”,所以说“渡、浮上来”。能产生者,就是布拉纳等人。从津渡生起的,就是外道;或者像前面说的,具有被称为邪见津渡的人,就是外道,外道就是外道。在这里得到安息,或者以此作为依靠,就是归宿。巴利
140.Khoti avadhāraṇe. Tena vijjati evāti dasseti. Yanti karaṇatthe paccattanti āha ‘‘yena kāraṇenā’’ti. Titthaṃ nāma dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo tabbinimuttassa kassaci diṭṭhivipphanditassa abhāvato. Pāragamanasaṅkhātaṃ taraṇaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.62) tattha tattheva aparāparaṃ ummujjananimujjanavasena pilavananti āha ‘‘taranti uppalavantī’’ti. Uppādetāti pūraṇādiko. Titthe jātāti titthiyā, yathāvuttaṃ vā diṭṭhigatasaṅkhātaṃ titthaṃ etesaṃ atthīti titthikā, titthikā eva titthiyā. Assasanti ettha, etenāti vā assāso, avassayo.
在解释“已说明的义理”时,说到“yaṃ-taṃ”(那个)这个词:世尊以“bhagavatā”(由世尊)等词被以同格的方式表述出来,而世尊正是以已正觉的状态,作为导师被了知、被证得、被广为彰显。为了连同已正觉的状态以及达到它的修行途径,以义理的方式显示这一点,所以他说“yo so…pe… abhisambuddho”(那位……已正觉者)。虽然“ñāṇadassana”(智见)等词在这里都是智慧的异名,但为了显示它们各自以不同的殊胜作用在各自领域中运作,便结合不共的殊胜、三明、神通与无障碍智、一切知智与肉眼、通达智与教说智来配合说明,因此说了“tesaṃ tesaṃ”(那些各自的)等话。其中,以志向与随眠智了知众生的志向与随眠,这是“知”;以一切知智和无障碍智照见一切所知法,这是“见”。所谓“pubbenivāsādīhi”(以宿住等),是指以宿住智和漏尽智。世尊的色身,是由不共于他人的福德威力所生,自从获得无上智以来就一直在运作,它超越了诸天神与天威,所以说“sabbasattānaṃ…pe… passatā”(照见一切众生……)。所谓“paṭivedhapaññāya”(以通达智),是指以道智。因为以道智,一切所知法中的迷乱已被彻底消除,所以后来生起的了知,也被说成就像是那种了知一样。巴利
Pakatatthaniddeso yaṃ-taṃ-saddoti tassa ‘‘bhagavatā’’tiādīhi padehi samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttassa yena abhisambuddhabhāvena bhagavā pakato satthubhāvena adhigato supākaṭo ca, taṃ abhisambuddhabhāvaṃ saddhiṃ āgamanapaṭipadāya atthabhāvena dassento ‘‘yo so…pe… abhisambuddho’’ti āha. Satipi ñāṇadassanasaddānaṃ idha paññāvevacanabhāve tena tena visesena nesaṃ savisaye visesappavattidassanatthaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. parivāra 3.1) asādhāraṇavisesavasena vijjāttayavasena vijjābhiññānāvaraṇavasena sabbaññutaññāṇamaṃsacakkhuvasena paṭivedhadesanāñāṇavasena ca te yojetvā dassento ‘‘tesaṃ tesa’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āsayānusayaṃ jānatā āsayānusayañāṇena, sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ passatā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇehi. Pubbenivāsādīhīti pubbenivāsaāsavakkhayañāṇehi. Anaññasādhāraṇapuññānubhāvanibbatto anuttarañāṇādhigamaladdhapurāvattako ca bhagavato rūpakāyo atikkammeva devānaṃ devānubhāvaṃ vattatīti āha ‘‘sabbasattānaṃ…pe… passatā’’ti. Paṭivedhapaññāyāti maggapaññāya. Tāya hi sabbaso ñeyyadhammesu sammohassa vidhamitattā pacchā pavattajānanaṃ tassa jānanaṃ viya vuccati.
“敌”是指烦恼之敌,或者五种魔,或者教法的敌对者,或者外道;对他们的“杀”是指以神通变化制伏他们、让他们哑口无言,或者对他们置之不理。这里可以《调御马师经》(增支部4.111)作为例子。同样地,以了知处非处等而称为“知”;以照见众生随业受生而称为“见”;以诸漏连同习气彻底灭尽而称为“阿拉汉”;以对应当了知、应当证得等种种法,从应当了知等角度如实无倒地通达,而称为“正自觉者”。或者也可以说:因为在三时中智慧无有障碍而称为“知”;因为身业等随智慧而行、凡事都经过审慎考虑而做而称为“见”;因为远离了喧闹等、成就了断除而称为“阿拉汉”;因为成就了使欲等不退失的因——无碍辩才和一切知性——而称为“正自觉者”。应当这样结合十力、十八不共佛法来理解。“那些”指四种法。“在自己”指在我们身上。要这样理解:不是看到在王、大臣等人那里有依靠,也不是看到身体力量有依靠。巴利
Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ, pañcavidhamārānaṃ vā sāsanapaccatthikānaṃ vā aññatitthiyānaṃ, tesaṃ hananaṃ pāṭihāriyehi abhibhavanaṃ appaṭibhānatākaraṇaṃ ajjhupekkhanaṃ vā. Kesivinayasuttañcettha (a. ni. 4.111) nidassanaṃ. Tathā ca ṭhānāṭṭhānādīni vā jānatā, yathākammupage satte passatā, savāsanānamāsavānaṃ khīṇattā arahatā, abhiññeyyādibhede dhamme abhiññeyyādito aviparītāvabodhena sammāsambuddhena. Atha vā tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇatāya jānatā, kāyakammādīnaṃ ñāṇānuparivattanena nisammakāritāya passatā, ravādīnampi (sārattha. ṭī. parivāra 3.1) abhāvasādhikāya pahānasampadāya arahatā, chandādīnaṃ ahānihetubhūtāya akkhayapaṭibhānasādhikāya sabbaññutāya sammāsambuddhena. Evaṃ dasabalaaṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhammavasenapi yojanā veditabbā. Yeti caturo dhamme. Attanīti amhesu. Na rājarājamahāmattādīsu upatthambhaṃ sampassamānā, na kāyabalaṃ sampassamānāti yojanā.
已生净信说的是不坏净信。因为下文会说“已宣说入流者的四支”。无学者虽然以无学同等学处而与无学者同法,但因为他们已圆满梵行,所以不能说他们“共行同法”,因此这里没有收入无学这一项。“所有这些”:指前面所说的比丘等、入流者等,以及凡夫和圣者,所有这些人都因为各自修学而具有相同的法性,所以称为“同法者”。现在,为了依所生起的圣法来显示同法者,又说了“复次”等话。“于见道时”:指以遍知、现观等方式通达谛理时,关于“九道支、八觉支”等没有争论。“以一法而行”:指以相同的法而行。因为已通达谛理的人之间,不会有“我善见法、你恶见法”之类的争论。他们正是以见和戒的共同具足而和合,是最上之人。“以此”:指“同法者”等这句话。其中,通过“可爱、可意”这一表述,以戒行圆满之语,将部分所摄的僧伽善行道圆满显示出来。因为那些戒行圆满、见极清净的人,正是智者所喜爱、所悦意的。“至此”:指通过“友,我等确实有……”等展开的言说,以宣说对三宝的净信,在诸经中演说。巴利
Uppannapasādoti aveccappasādaṃ vadati. Vakkhati hi ‘‘cattāri sotāpannassa aṅgāni kathitānī’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.140). Kāmaṃ asekkhāpi asekkhāya samasikkhatāya sahadhammikā eva, ciṇṇabrahmacariyatāya pana sahadhammaṃ carantīti na vattabbāti asekkhavāro na gahito. Sabbepeteti ete yathāvuttā bhikkhuādayo sotāpannādayo ca puthujjanā ariyā cāti sabbepi ete taṃtaṃsikkhāhi samānadhammattā sahadhammattā ‘‘sahadhammikā’’ti vuccanti. Idāni nibbattitaariyadhammavaseneva sahadhammike dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Maggadassanamhīti pariññābhisamayādivasena saccapaṭivedhena ‘‘nava maggaṅgāni, aṭṭha bojjhaṅgānī’’tiādinā vivādo natthi. Ekadhammacāritāyāti samānadhammacāritāya. Na hi paṭividdhasaccānaṃ ‘‘mayā dhammo sudiṭṭho, tayā duddiṭṭho’’tiādinā vivādo atthi. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṅghātā hi te uttamapurisā. Imināti ‘‘sahadhammikā kho panā’’tiādivacanena. Tattha piyamanāpaggahaṇena sīlesu paripūrakāritāpadesena ekadesena gahitaṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā dasseti. Ye hi sampannasīlā suvisuddhadassanā, te viññūnaṃ piyā manāpāti. Ettāvatāti ‘‘atthi kho no āvuso’’tiādinayappavattena ratanattayapasādajotanena akkhātā tesu tesu suttapadesesu.
141 “对导师的净信”:用“净信”这个词,就涵盖了“世尊”等能让人生起净信的法。由此显示佛陀是善觉醒者;同样,“对法的净信”显示法是善说的,另一句则显示僧团是善行的。应当知道:这颗心在其他地方是找不到的;唯有依这颗心,才能确认“外道中没有沙门”这一意义,而这一意义是正确成立的。这里应当这样连贯理解:因为正自觉者是我们的导师,所以,朋友,我们确实对导师有净信;又因为他是正自觉者,他所说的法是善说的,所以对法有净信;正因为如此,就有了戒行的圆满,所以有同法者……乃至出家众等等。就这样,在这里,由对导师的净信而有对法的净信,由此而有僧团的善行。这个道理,哪怕一点点,在外道的说法里也完全没有,只有在这里才有沙门……乃至与其他沙门不同。巴利
141.Satthari pasādoti pasādaggahaṇena ‘‘bhagavatā’’tiādinā vā pasādanīyā dhammā gahitā. Tena buddhasubuddhataṃ dasseti, tathā ‘‘dhammepasādo’’ti iminā dhammasudhammataṃ, itarena saṅghasuppaṭipannataṃ. Yena cittena aññattha anupalabbhamānena sāsaneyeva samaṇo ito bahiddhā natthīti ayamattho, sammadeva, patiṭṭhāpitoti veditabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yasmā sammāsambuddho amhākaṃ satthā, tasmā atthi kho no, āvuso, satthari pasādo, sammāsambuddhattā cassa svākhāto dhammoti atthi dhamme pasādo, tato eva ca atthi sīlesu paripūrakāritāti sahadhammikā…pe… pabbajitā cāti evamettha satthari pasādena dhamme pasādo, tena saṅghasuppaṭipattīti ayañca nayo lesenapi parappavādesu natthīti idheva samaṇo…pe… samaṇehi aññehīti.
对于已通达诸谛、已断除随顺的人来说,依止于家的爱恋根本不可能存在,所以这里说“如今”。如果是这样,那么“诸比丘,戒师应当对同梵行者生起如子之爱”等说法又怎么解释呢?这并不是在说依止于家的爱恋,而是因为与此相似,所以借“爱”这个词来表达慈爱与柔情。因为世尊确实不会让比丘们去沾染杂染。对于这类爱,应当这样理解:在布拉纳等外道师那里,它虽然能带来净信与功德,但并不是真正的净信,而应看作类似净信的贪欲活动。“长老”指玛哈桑卡拉奇达长老,是他将这部义注载入书册。导师是独一无二的,因为他具有他人所不共的功德;否则,如果只是平常,就根本无法圆满导师的特征。“分别开来”是指从其他人那里区分出来,成为自己独有的。那些宣称“我们的导师”的人,对其他人的导师来说,他就不是导师——这在意义上自然就成立了。同样,那些承认他只具有地方性导师身份的人,即使想获得具足圆满特征的导师身份,也会因为寻求与之相违的导师状态而失败。“于教法分类”指在殊胜梵天功德、修多罗、祇夜等分类的时候。这里说到“山羊戒……乃至狗戒等”,主要是就外道中普遍有这类受持誓戒的情况而说的;用“等”字,则包括了禁制、劝制、四律仪防护等。“增上勤励”:称为增上勤励,意思是额外的努力、用力,是指借此而进行的更进一步加行,也就是殊胜的应做修行。所以说“增上功用”。巴利
Paṭividdhasaccānaṃ pahīnānurodhānaṃ gehassitapemassa asambhavo evāti ‘‘idānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘upajjhāyena, bhikkhave, saddhivihārikamhi puttapemaṃ upaṭṭhapetabbaṃ’’tiādivacanaṃ (mahāva. 65) kathanti? Nayidaṃ gehassitapemaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṃsadisattā pana pemamukhena vutto mettāsneho. Na hi bhagavā bhikkhū saṃkilese niyojeti. Evarūpaṃ pemaṃ sandhāyāti pasādāvahaguṇāvahato pūraṇādīsu bhatti pasādo na hoti, pasādapatirūpakā pana lobhapavattīti daṭṭhabbā. Theroti mahāsaṅgharakkhitatthero. Yena aṭṭhakathā potthakaṃ āropitā. Ekova satthā anaññasādhāraṇaguṇattā, aññathā anacchariyattā satthulakkhaṇameva na paripūreyya. Visuṃ katvāti aññehi vivecetvā attano āveṇikaṃ katvā. ‘‘Amhākaṃ satthā’’ti byāvadantānaṃ aññesaṃ satthā na hotīti atthato āpannameva hoti, tathā ca padesavattiniṃ tassa satthutaṃ paṭijānantā paripuṇṇalakkhaṇasatthutaṃ icchantānampi tato viruddhā satthubhāvapariyesanena parājitā honti. Pariyattidhammeti adhikabrahmaguṇasuttageyyādippabhedasamaye. Tattha ajasīla…pe… kukkurasīlādīsūti idaṃ yebhuyyena aññatitthiyānaṃ tādisaṃ vatasamādānasabbhāvato vuttaṃ, ādi-saddena yamaniyamacātuyāmasaṃvarādīnaṃ saṅgahoti. Adhippayāsoti adhikaṃ payasati payujjati etenāti adhippayāso, savisesaṃ adhikattabbakiriyā (a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.117). Tenāha ‘‘adhikappayogo’’ti.
这是对导师和法的净信达到终点,也就是这种净信的最终归宿。所谓终点,就是解脱。因为对于主张适时论的人来说,他们在各个时期对相应教导者生起的净信,其意义就只在于证得解脱。而见行者则按照各自所获得的见解,各自设想出一个终点,所以说“没有不施设终点的人”。所谓“婆罗门”,是指主张婆罗门思想的人。他们当中,有些人说与梵天神同处一界是终点,有些人说靠近梵天神是终点,有些人说与梵天神结合是终点。其中,持同界说和靠近说的人属于两种说法,其余的人属于非两种说法。他们所有这些人在意义上都只是把往生梵天界当作终点来认知。因为他们对那里生起恒常的执著,就像跋伽梵天神那样。因此说“梵天界是终点”。所谓“梵天界”,指初禅地。所谓“大苦行者”,指吠卡那萨等苦行者。就像大梵天王在初禅地的光音天中没有比他更高的存在,所以用“光音天”这个广泛的说法。所谓“游行者”,指桑恰亚等游行者。因为对他们来说,内在和心都不存在,所以是“无边的意”。因为邪命外道认为一切都不存在,所以是无边;因为超越苦乐等,所以是无意。通过这一点,显示了心被这八种世间法所染污。巴利
Tassapasādassa pariyosānabhūtāti tassa satthari dhamme ca pasādassa niṭṭhānabhūtā. Niṭṭhāti mokkho. Samayavādīnañhi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye tadupadesake ca pasādo yāvadeva mokkhādhigamanaṭṭho. Diṭṭhigatikā tathā tathā attano laddhivasena niṭṭhaṃ parikappenti yevāti āha ‘‘niṭṭhaṃ apaññapento nāma natthī’’ti. Brāhmaṇānanti brāhmaṇavādīnaṃ. Tesaṃ ekacce brahmunā salokatā niṭṭhāti vadanti, ekacce tassa samīpatā, ekacce tena saṃyogo niṭṭhāti vadanti. Tattha ye salokatāvādino samīpatāvādino ca, te dvedhāvādino, itare advedhāvādino. Sabbepi te atthato brahmalokupapattiyaṃyeva niṭṭhāsaññino. Tattha hi nesaṃ niccābhiniveso yathā taṃ bakassa brahmuno. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘brahmaloko niṭṭhā’’ti. Brahmalokoti paṭhamajjhānabhūmi. Mahātāpasānanti vekhanasāditāpasānaṃ. Mahābrahmā viya paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ ābhassaresu eko sabbaseṭṭho natthīti ‘‘ābhassarā’’ti puthuvacanaṃ. Paribbājakānanti sañcayādiparibbājakānaṃ. Anto ca mano ca etassa natthīti anantamānaso. Ājīvakānañhi sabbadābhāvato ananto, sukhadukkhādisamatikkamanato amānaso. Iminā aṭṭhahi lokadhammehi upakkiliṭṭhacittataṃ dasseti.
关于戏论,该说的内容前面已经讲过。这里所指的就是渴爱和邪见,因为这段讨论的目的是去除我所执和我执。就像在前面五个地方只提到贪这一种烦恼,在这两个地方则提到三种烦恼:嗔、痴、见。因为在说“有嗔者”的地方,已经包含了嗔这个不善根;在说“有违逆者”的地方,指的是违逆;在说“有痴者”的地方,包含了痴这个不善根;在说“无慧者”的地方,指的是垢秽或缺乏正知;在说“有取者”的地方,是以“没有布施”这类方式来说明执取;在说“乐戏论者”的地方,则是从戏论生起的角度来说的。巴利
Papañce yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Taṇhādiṭṭhiyova adhippetā mamaṅkāraahaṅkāravigamassa adhippetattā. Yathā pañcasu ṭhānesu ekova kileso lobho āgato, evaṃ dvīsu ṭhānesu tayo kilesā āgatā ‘‘doso moho diṭṭhī’’ti. ‘‘Sadosassā’’ti hi vuttaṭṭhāne paṭighaṃ akusalamūlaṃ gahitaṃ, ‘‘paṭiviruddhassā’’ti virodho, ‘‘samohassā’’ti moho akusalamūlaṃ, ‘‘aviddasuno’’ti malyaṃ, asampajaññaṃ vā, ‘‘saupādānassā’’ti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena gahaṇaṃ, ‘‘papañcārāmassā’’ti papañcuppattivasena.
从行相来说,是指从生起的行相来说。由于用不同的词来说明贪的各种差别,所以最初说“有贪”时,是针对粗显的贪境而说,因此说“依五种欲乐贪”。“依执取”是指依强有力的执取。因为“随顺者和违逆者”在经文中是作为一个复合词出现的,所以把它们合在一起解释。但在这里,“随顺者”的意思应该理解为依净相而有;因为违逆并不是基于净相。“依显示戏论生起”是指:因为烦恼、业、果互为辗转生起的条件,使轮回成为戏论,这就是“戏论”;这里则是依显示它作为生起之因来说明。因为渴爱是导致“有”生起的特殊条件。“依显示渴爱为缘而有取”是指依显示作为渴爱之缘的取,也就是按照渴爱成为取之缘的那个状态来显示。因为这是用果来彰显因的特殊性。问:为什么要像“这样加以分解”那样,把贪分散开来解说呢?这是为了从欲贪、有渴爱等不同角度来说明贪。“依渴爱的作用”是指依渴爱的渴求作用、依执取为净相的方式。因为对于所缘,把它当作“净”而生起的贪,就被称为“净”。巴利
Ākāratoti pavattiākārato. Padantarena rāgavisesassa vuccamānattāādito vuttaṃ sarāgavacanaṃ oḷārikaṃ rāgavisayanti āha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇikarāgavasenā’’ti. Gahaṇavasenāti daḷhaggahaṇavasena. ‘‘Anuruddhapaṭiviruddhassā’’ti ekapadavasena pāḷiyaṃ āgatattā ekajjhaṃ paduddhāro kato. Tattha pana ‘‘anuruddhassā’’ti subhavasenāti evamattho vattabbo. Na hi paṭivirujjhanaṃ subhavasena hoti. Papañcuppattidassanavasenāti kilesakammavipākānaṃ aparāparuppattipaccayatāya saṃsārassa papañcanaṃ papañco, tassa uppattihetubhāvadassanavasena. Taṇhā hi bhavuppattiyā visesapaccayo. Taṇhāpaccayā upādānadassanavasenāti taṇhāpaccayassa upādānassa dassanavasena, yadavatthā taṇhā upādānassa paccayo, tadavatthādassanavasena. Phalena hi hetuvisesakittanametanti. Evaṃ viddhaṃsethāti kāmarāgabhavataṇhādivasena lobhaṃ kasmā evaṃ vippakiretha. Taṇhākaraṇavasenāti taṇhāyanakaraṇavasena subhākāraggahaṇavasena. Subhanti hi ārammaṇe pavatto rāgo ‘‘subha’’nti vutto.
142 依此而说,所以叫“说”,也就是见之说。因为正是持见者依于见,才安立出“我与世间是常”或“我与世间是无常”这类主张。所以世尊说:“比丘们,有这两种见。”由于不存在脱离渴爱的见,而且正是依于渴爱,人才会执著于自己的恒常性,因此这里说“依渴爱与见”。allīnā 是依附的意思。upagatā 是因为不肯舍弃而仿佛与之合为一体那样地趋近。ajjhositā 是被那种见吞没,仿佛被它彻底定住,深陷其中。所以说“anupaviṭṭhā”(已进入)。就像在家人对欲乐的执著是争论的根源,出家人对见的执著也是如此,因此说“他们与断灭见相对立”。因为正是由于见的对立,才有执见者之间的对立。巴利
142. Vadanti etenāti vādo, diṭṭhivādo. Diṭṭhivasena hi ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, asassato attā ca loko cā’’ti ca diṭṭhigatikā paññapenti. Tenāha ‘‘dvemā, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiyo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.142). Taṇhārahitāya diṭṭhiyā abhāvato taṇhāvaseneva ca attano sassatabhāvābhinivesoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhādiṭṭhivasenā’’ti. Allīnāti nissitā. Upagatāti avissajjanavasena ekibhāvamiva gatā. Ajjhositāti tāya diṭṭhiyā gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpitā viya tadantogadhā. Tenāha ‘‘anupaviṭṭhā’’ti. Yathā gahaṭṭhānaṃ kāmajjhosānaṃ vivādamūlaṃ, evaṃ pabbajitānaṃ diṭṭhajjhosānanti āha ‘‘vibhavadiṭṭhiyā te paṭiviruddhā’’ti. Diṭṭhivirodhena hi diṭṭhigatikavirodho.
“刹那生起”就是生的那一刹那,所以论师说“诸见的生起”。这里通过“诸见的生起”这一说法,既说明了诸见是缘所生的,也同样说明了诸见的所依处也是缘所生的,因此应当知道这两者都是无常、苦、无我的。为了显示《无碍解道》理趣中所说的“缘生八处”,论师说了“诸蕴”等话。其中,诸蕴也是见的立足处,因为经中说“将色视为我”等,是以所缘的方式成为见的立足处。无明也是见的立足处,因为它以亲依止缘等方式成为缘。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,无闻凡夫不见诸圣者,不精通圣法……”等。触也是见的立足处。正如经中说:“那也是以触为缘”,以及“触了又触而感受”。想也是见的立足处。经中确实说过:“以想为因,才有戏论的种种安立”,以及“认知地就是地”等。寻也是见的立足处。经中也说过:“在诸见中反复推寻构想之后,说‘这是真实、那是虚妄’这一对法”,以及“是推寻者、是审察者”。不如理作意也是见的立足处。正如世尊所说:“对于那个不如理作意的人,六种见中的某一种见就会生起,他会生起‘我有我’是真实、是确实的见”等。依此而生起,所以叫“生起因”,生起因的状态就是生起因的意义,因此这样说。“刹那灭”就是刹那灭尽。“缘灭”是指无明等的彻底灭尽。而那彻底灭尽是由什么带来的呢?为了说明这一点,论师说“入流道”。因为四圣道各自相应地对那些行所摄的法来说是彻底灭尽之因,而刹那灭则是没有因的。巴利
Khaṇikasamudayo uppādakkhaṇoti āha ‘‘diṭṭhīnaṃ nibbattī’’ti. Diṭṭhinibbattiggahaṇeneva cettha yathā diṭṭhīnaṃ paṭiccasamuppannatā vibhāvitā, evaṃ diṭṭhivatthunopīti ubhayesampi aniccatā dukkhatā anattatā ca vibhāvitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yāni paṭisambhidānayena (paṭi. ma. 1.122) ‘‘paccayasamudayo aṭṭha ṭhānānī’’ti vuttāni, tāni dassento ‘‘khandhāpī’’tiādimāha. Tattha khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇaṭṭhena ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādivacanato (saṃ. ni. 3.81; 4.345). Avijjāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādivasena paccayabhāvato. Yathāha – ‘‘assutavā, bhikkhave, puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.2, 461; saṃ. ni. 3.1, 7). Phassopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathā cāha ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā (dī. ni. 1.118-130), phussa phussa paṭisaṃvediyantī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.144) ca . Saññāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhāti (su. ni. 880), pathaviṃ pathavito saññatvā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.2) ca ādi. Vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘takkañca diṭṭhīsu pakappayitvā, saccaṃ musāti dvayadhammamāhū’’ti (su. ni. 892; mahāni. 121) ‘‘takkī hoti vīmaṃsī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.34) ca ādi. Ayonisomanasikāropi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathāha bhagavā ‘‘tasseva ayoniso manasikaroto channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjati, atthi me attāti assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.19). Samuṭṭhāti etenāti samuṭṭhānaṃ, tassa bhāvo samuṭṭhānaṭṭho, tena. Khaṇikatthaṅgamo khaṇikanirodho. Paccayatthaṅgamo avijjādīnaṃ accantanirodho. So pana yena hoti, taṃ dassento ‘‘sotāpattimaggo’’ti āha. Cattāro hi ariyamaggā yathārahaṃ tassa tassa saṅkhāragatassa accantanirodhahetu, khaṇikanirodho pana ahetuko.
利益就是增长。不过,它又分为现世利益和来世利益两种。其中,来世利益因为带着恶趣等杂染,实际上属于过患这一边;为了指出另一种,也就是现世利益,所以说了“为了……”等话。为了说明过患也存在于现世利益之中,又说了“以执取见解为根源的灾祸”等话。那个“过患”就是指过失。“过患”一词中的“等”字,涵盖了裸体、无座、险难行等情形。如果按“由此而得出离”的字面来说“出离”,那么只有见道才是诸见的出离;但因为见道是作为诸见消失的同义词来理解的,所以从一切有为法中出离的涅槃,也被说成是从诸见中出离,因此说“诸见的出离名为涅槃”。关于“以此……”等语句,应当按前面“修习”一节所说的方式来理解。巴利
Ānisaṃsanti udayaṃ. So pana diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikavasena duvidho. Tattha samparāyiko duggatiparikilesatāyaādīnavapakkhiko evāti itaraṃ dassento ‘‘yaṃ sandhāyā’’tiādimāha. Ādīnavampi diṭṭhadhammikameva dassento ‘‘diṭṭhiggahaṇamūlakaṃ upaddava’’ntiādimāha. Sotiādīnavo. Ādīnanti ādi-saddena naggiyānasanasaṅkaṭivatādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Nissarati etenāti nissaraṇanti vuccamāne dassanamaggo eva diṭṭhīnaṃ nissaraṇaṃ siyā, tassa pana atthaṅgamapariyāyena gahitattā sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭaṃ nibbānaṃ diṭṭhīhipi nissaṭanti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhīnaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma nibbāna’’nti. Iminātiādīsu vattabbaṃ anuyogavatte vuttanayameva.
143 开示断除诸见:通过开示对一切取的遍知,来显示彻底断除诸见的方法。也就是前面已经说过的——巴利
143.Diṭṭhicchedanaṃ dassentoti sabbupādānapariññādassanena sabbaso diṭṭhīnaṃ samucchedavidhiṃ dassento. Vuttāyevāti –
“ 四取当依义分别,
以法之略说与广说,复依次第而辨明。”巴利
‘‘Upādānāni cattāri, tāni atthavibhāgato; Dhammasaṅkhepavitthārā, kamato ca vibhāvaye’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.645) –
说完偈颂之后,接着就按义理分析等方式来解说。确实,外道并没有这样的智慧:“这些取只有这四种,不会比这更多。”只不过有些人说“诸欲应当断除”,有些人说“没有他世,这是邪见”,另一些人说“靠戒禁就能清净,这是邪见”,但对于“有我见”是邪见这一点,他们完全不知道。即使对他们所知道的那一点点,也不知道要彻底断除,却仍然坚持认为“对于一切应当遍知的东西,我们已经施设了遍知”。为了显示处在这样一种状态中的他们所行持的方式,导师说:“比丘们,有……”等等。其中,“有”就是存在。这是显示那些执持邪见的人确实存在、并未断绝。“某些”就是一部分。“沙门婆罗门”:因出家而成为沙门,仅凭出身而称为婆罗门。“一切”:指对所有的取彻底超越、断除。“不能正确地施设”:即使他们有所施设,也不能正确地施设遍知。现在为了详细显示这个义理,又说了“哪些……”等。其中,有禾提咖、库提咖、巴呼达咖、汉萨、巴拉玛汉萨、卡加咖、持三杖者、修禁语者、西瓦、巴鲁巴咖、五夜行者、索玛卡啦咖、修哑行等、修犊行等、修狗行等、持水瓶者、修蝙蝠行等、穿一衣者、以水清净者、苦行身体者、戒清净者、禅清净者、四种常见论者等,共九十六种,因为被渴爱之网所咬,或者因为障碍圣法,所以是邪行外道。受用对象为欲,即从事务对象之受用而说的欲。以盗贼的方式受用,即依照世间以“接手”等名称而受用。三因,即“没有布施”等所展开的、属于见之差别的不离轮回之因。巴利
Gāthaṃ uddisitvā atthavibhāgādivasena vuttāyeva. Kāmaṃ ito bāhirakānaṃ ‘‘imāni upādānāni ettakāni cattāri, na ito bhiyyo’’ti īdisaṃ ñāṇaṃ natthi, kevalaṃ pana keci ‘‘kāmā pahātabbā’’ti vadanti, keci ‘‘natthi paro lokoti ca, micchā’’ti vadanti, apare ‘‘sīlabbatena suddhīti ca, micchā’’ti vadanti, attadiṭṭhiyā pana micchābhāvaṃ sabbaso na jānanti eva. Yattakaṃ pana jānanti, tassapi accantappahānaṃ na jānanti, tathāpi sabbassa pariññeyyassa pariññeyyaṃ paññapemaicceva tiṭṭhanti. Evaṃbhūtānaṃ pana nesaṃ tattha yādisī paṭipatti, taṃ dassento satthā ‘‘santi, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha santīti saṃvijjanti. Tena tesaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vijjamānatāya avicchedataṃ dasseti. Eketi ekacce. Samaṇabrāhmaṇāti pabbajjupagamanena samaṇā, jātimattena ca brāhmaṇā. Sabbesanti anavasesānaṃ upādānānaṃ samatikkamaṃ pahānaṃ. Sammā na paññapentīti yesaṃ paññapenti, tesampi sammā pariññaṃ na paññapenti. Idāni taṃ atthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kecī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha hotika-kuṭīcaka-bahūdaka-haṃsa-paramahaṃsa-kājaka-tidaṇḍa-monavata-seva-pārupaka-pañcamarattika- somakāraka-mugabbata-carabāka-tāpasa-niganthā-jīvaka-isi-pārāyanika-pañcātapika-kāpila- kāṇāda-saṃsāramocaka-aggibhattika-magavatika-govatika-kukkuravatika-kāmaṇḍaluka- vaggulivatika-ekasāṭaka-odakasuddhika-sarīrasantāpaka-sīlasuddhika-jhānasuddhika-catubbidha- sassatavādādayo channavuti taṇhāpāsena ḍaṃsanato, ariyadhammassa vā vibādhanato pāsaṇḍā. Vatthupaṭisevanaṃ kāmanti byāpārassa vatthuno paṭisevanasaṅkhātaṃ kāmaṃ. Theyyena sevantīti paṭihatthaādisamaññāya lokassa vacanavasena sevanti. Tīṇi kāraṇānīti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattāni diṭṭhivisesabhūtāni vaṭṭakāraṇāni.
“义谈”是指谈说义理,也就是能说明双方想要表达的义理的交谈。因为两个人之间的言谈就叫作“谈”。因此他说“大地据说……”等等。巴利
Atthasallāpikāti atthassa sallāpikā, dvinnaṃ adhippetatthasallāpavibhāvinīti adhippāyo. Dvinnañhi vacanaṃ sallāpo. Tenāha ‘‘pathavī kirā’’tiādi.
外道对自己导师、法和同法者所生起的那种净信,被称为“信之截断”,是为了显示它由于不属于(正当)领域,因而并非真正的净信。以这种方式生起的言论,就叫作“信之截断论”。“像这样的”:指如上所说那样,不能导向烦恼的止息。“法”:指像法一样的东西。“律”:指像律一样的东西。因为那些外道站在欺骗的立场上欺诳世人,说“我在说法”,像“这七种身是非作、非所作……”(《长部》1.174)等等,随便说些什么,就说这是法;他们又说“我们施设律”,于是施设了牛戒、狐蝠戒等,教导弟子这类学处,然后说这是“法与律”。这里所说的“法与律”就是指这个。因此说:“这两者都显示这是不能导出的教说。”被悭吝的污垢所压倒,去阻碍那想造哪怕一点点福德的人、给他制造障碍的人,在现世就会被智者呵责,来世则预期堕入恶趣;更何况是去打击那能使人彻底出离整个轮回之苦的胜者之轮(佛陀的教法)的外道师以及随他教说的人呢?为了显示这个道理,他说:“在不能导出的教说中,确实……”等等。为了显示那样的净信在未来世并不随顺正道,只是随其自身而转,他又说:“即使过了一段时间,最终也必定毁灭。”意思是:它不像不坏净信那样是究竟的。巴利
Yo titthiyānaṃ attano satthari dhamme sahadhammikesu ca pasādo vutto, tassa anāyatanagatattā appasādakabhāvadassanaṃ pasādapacchedo. Tathāpavatto vādo pasādapacchedavādo vutto. Evarūpeti īdise vuttanayena kilesānaṃ anupasamasaṃvattanike. Dhammeti dhammapatirūpake. Vinayeti vinayapatirūpake. Titthiyā hi kohaññe ṭhatvā lokaṃ vañcentā dhammaṃ kathemāti ‘‘sattime kāyā akaṭā akaṭavidhā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.174) yaṃ kiñci kathetvā tathā ‘‘vinayaṃ paññapemā’’ti gosīlavaggulivatādīni paññapetvā tādisaṃ sāvake sikkhāpetvā ‘‘dhammavinayo’’ti kathenti, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammavinaye’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘ubhayenapi aniyyānikaṃ sāsanaṃ dassetī’’ti. Parittampi nāma puññaṃ kātukāmaṃ maccheramalābhibhūtatāya nivārentassa antarāyaṃ tassa karoto diṭṭheva dhamme viññūhi garahitabbatā samparāye ca duggati pāṭikaṅkhā, kimaṅgaṃ pana sakalavaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇāvahe jinacakke pahāradāyino titthakarassa tadovādakarassa cāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘aniyyānikasāsanamhi hī’’tiādimāha. Yathā so pasādo samparāye na sammaggato attano pavattivasenāti dassento ‘‘kañci kālaṃ gantvāpi pacchā vinassati yevā’’ti āha, aveccappasādo viya accantiko na hotīti attho.
按照那样的修行方式去做,会把人引向畜生道。因为果报必定和业行相似。所谓“一切原因的差别”,就是指前面说的那些外道师及其弟子们,以邪行为本质的各种不同原因,会带来恶趣的痛苦。然而那种净信并不能导向解脱,因为它属于邪的那一边,就像对喝了酒的狐狸生起的净信一样。把酒过滤后扔掉的就是酒渣。婆罗门就是贪财的人,他心里盘算着“我要骗他”,所以才那样说。“一百铜钱”就是一百个咖哈巴那钱。巴利
Sampajjamānā yathāvidhipaṭipattiyā tiracchānayoniṃ āvahati. Kammasarikkhakena hi vipākeneva bhavitabbaṃ. Sabbampi kāraṇabhedanti sabbampi yathāvuttaṃ titthakarānaṃ sāvakānaṃ apāyadukkhāvahaṃ micchāpaṭipattisaṅkhātaṃ kāraṇavisesaṃ. So panesa pasādo na niyyāti micchattapakkhikattā surāpītasiṅgāle pasādo viya. Suraṃ parissāvetvā chaḍḍitakasaṭaṃ surājallikaṃ. Brāhmaṇā nāma dhanaluddhāti adhippāyenāha ‘‘imaṃ vañcessāmī’’ti. Kaṃsasatāti kahāpaṇasatā.
144 “彼”指的就是这种信。一切贪爱都可以叫“欲取”,所以经文说“以阿拉汉道对欲取作断遍知”。“像这样的”,是指这样的、能完全止息一切烦恼的教法。“法”,是从“持”的意义上说的,因为依着所教导的方式去修行的人,不会堕入恶趣。“律”,是从彻底调伏的意义上说的。在这里,这教法能导向出离轮回之苦。巴利
144.Tassāti pasādassa. Sabbopi lobho kāmupādānanteva vuccatīti āha ‘‘arahattamaggena kāmupādānassa pahānapariñña’’nti. Evarūpeti īdise sabbaso kilesānaṃ upasamasaṃvattanike. Yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamānānaṃ apāyesu apatanavasena dhāraṇaṭṭhena dhamme. Sabbaso vinayanaṭṭhena vinaye. Tattha bhavadukkhanissaraṇāya saṃvattane.
他礼敬着站立,因为曾在两个不可数劫中圆满独觉佛的巴拉密,又因为当时对佛陀的教法有所熏习,以及对世尊怀有净信之心。猫头鹰等偈颂是树神所说的。傍晚起来,是指傍晚时分从白天的住处起身。此人不会去往恶趣,意思是他不会堕入恶趣。手鼓演奏者就是击手鼓的人。大鼓演奏者等故事,也应当从引人发笑的部分开始,再详细展开。巴利
Namassamāno aṭṭhāsi dve asaṅkhyeyyāni paccekabodhipāramīnaṃ pūraṇena tattha buddhasāsane paricayena ca bhagavati pasannacittatāya ca. ‘‘Ulūkā’’tyādigāthā rukkhadevatāya bhāsitā. Kāluṭṭhitanti sāyanhakāle divāvihārato uṭṭhitaṃ. Duggateso na gacchatīti duggatiṃ eso na gamissati. Morajiko murajavādako. Mahābherivādakavatthuādīnipi sitapātukaraṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā vitthāretabbāni.
“究竟义”指的是出世间法。那又该怎么说呢?这是针对那些甚至在法上、在究竟义上执取“相”而听闻的人说的。“沙弥的故事”说的是:有个沙弥在出家当天就被蛇咬死,死后投生到了天界。巴利
Paramattheti lokuttaradhamme. Kiṃ pana vattabbanti dhammepi paramatthe nimittaṃ gahetvā suṇantānaṃ. Sāmaṇeravatthūti pabbajitadivaseyeva sappena daṭṭho hutvā kālaṃ katvā devalokaṃ upapannasāmaṇeravatthu.
乳饭:就是和牛奶混合在一起的饭。Timbarusaka:就是黑乌木果。有一种蔓生植物长得像黄瓜,叫做 timbarusa,它的果实就叫 timbarusaka,也有人这么说。Kakkārika:就是小黄瓜,也有人叫它大黄瓜。蔓果:就是小黄瓜藤上的果实。手煎锅:就是慢火煎锅。Ambakañjika:就是酸粥,也叫 khaḷayāgu。捣臼饼:就是带油的芝麻饼。Vidhupana:就是方扇。棕榈扇:就是用棕榈叶做的圆扇。孔雀手扇:就是用孔雀羽毛做的驱蚊扇。巴利
Khīrodananti khīrena saddhiṃ sammissaṃ odanaṃ. Timbarusakanti tindukaphalaṃ. Tipusasadisā ekā vallijāti timbarusaṃ, tassa phalaṃ timbarusakanti ca vadanti. Kakkārikanti khuddakaelāḷukaṃ. Mahātipusanti ca vadanti. Vallipakkanti khuddakatipusavalliyā phalaṃ. Hatthapatāpakanti mandāmukhi. Ambakañjikanti ambilakañjikaṃ. Khaḷayāguntipi vadanti. Doṇinimmajjaninti satelaṃ tilapiññākaṃ. Vidhupananti caturassabījaniṃ . Tālavaṇṭanti tālapattehi katamaṇḍalabījaniṃ. Morahatthanti morapiñchehi kataṃ makasabījaniṃ.
按照已经说过的思路来理解:因为这里导师也是把前面说过的全部原因分类合在一起展示,才说出“那是什么原因”等话;所以在那些不能导向解脱的教法中,应当回忆前面说过的方式,结合起来理解。巴利
Vuttanayānusārenevāti yasmā idhāpi yathāvuttaṃ sabbampi kāraṇabhedaṃ ekato katvā dassento satthā ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’ntiādimāha, tasmā tattha aniyyānikasāsane vuttanayassa anussaraṇavasena yojetvā veditabbaṃ.
145 “遍知”是指断遍知。为了显示它们的缘:诸取的遍知就叫断遍知。所要表达的是它们的彻底灭尽,而那是通过缘的灭尽才发生的,所以要从根本原因开始显示它们的缘。“此”:是指现在所说的,在这里“这些呢”等文句中,“以什么为因”这类复合词的含义。“一切处”:就是在“渴爱集”等一切地方。通过这个“一切”的统摄,也应该理解为包含了“以触为因”等其他文句。那些外道连诸取的集起都不知道,更不用说灭尽了。而如来则如实了知那些以及它们诸缘之缘的集起与灭尽。因此,为了把所发的狮子吼推到顶点——“就在这里,比丘们,有沙门……其他外道的说法都是空洞的”(《中部》1.139),世尊以“比丘们,有这四种取”等方式(《中部》1.145),通过缘起的门径导入教导,先显示流转,再以“然而,从……以后”等显示还灭,最终以阿拉汉道把握了教说的顶点。为了表明这层含义,才说“然而,因为世尊……”。这一点很容易理解。巴利
145.Pariññanti pahānapariññaṃ. Tesaṃ paccayaṃ dassetunti upādānānaṃ pariññā nāma pahānapariññā. Tesaṃ accantanirodho adhippeto, so ca paccayanirodhena hotīti tesaṃ paccayaṃ mūlakāraṇato pabhuti dassetuṃ. Ayanti idāni vuccamāno ettha ‘‘ime cā’’tiādipāṭhe ‘‘kiṃ nidānā’’tiādisamāsapadānaṃ attho. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘taṇhāsamudayā’’tiādīsu sabbesu padesu. Iminā eva ca sabbaggahaṇena ‘‘phassanidānā’’tiādīnampi padānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Ime aññatitthiyā upādānānampi samudayaṃ na jānanti, kuto nirodhaṃ, tathāgato pana tesaṃ tappaccayapaccayānampi samudayañca atthaṅgamañca yāthāvato jānāti, tasmā – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139) yathāraddhasīhanādaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassento ‘‘ime ca, bhikkhave, cattāro upādānā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.145) nayena desanaṃ paṭiccasamuppādamukhena otārento vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā ‘‘yato ca kho’’tiādinā vivaṭṭaṃ dassento arahattena desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhi, tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yasmā pana bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.
《大狮子吼经》的注释巴利
2. Mahāsīhanādasuttavaṇṇanā
毗舍离城注释巴利
Vesālīnagaravaṇṇanā
146 “一再”就是一次又一次。“因为变得宽广”:因为每隔一牛呼的距离就宽阔起来。“在那里”:指在那宽广的状态中。“刚丢弃”:指刚刚排出。“因波浪等危险”:指因波浪、鳄鱼、漩涡、污秽等危险。即使被水流冲来,他的体温也没有消失;而这样的体温,只有具备识者才可能有,于是他想:“也许是个胎儿。”以上“像这样”等语,便是对此事的思惟原因。因为有大福德,所以没有恶臭;因为尚有余温,所以没有腐烂。凭借孩子们的福德之力,从他的拇指流出了乳汁,他也获得了乳饭。在最后一生中,菩萨入胎时,菩萨之母的腹部皮肤极其清净透明,犹如没有皮肤一般,那两个孩子也是如此,所以说“他们成了无皮者”。“他们”:指那两个孩子。“父母”:指养育他们的父母。众人为他们灌顶,立为国王,这是因为成就王位的业已经成熟,也因为他们本就出生在未分裂的王族之中。也有人说,王子受福德威力所感发的诸天神摄持。巴利
146.Aparāparanti punappunaṃ. Visālībhūtatāyāti gāvutantaraṃ gāvutantaraṃ puthubhūtatāya. Tatrāti tassaṃ visālībhūtatāyaṃ. Chaḍḍitamatteti vissaṭṭhamatte. Ūmibhayādīhīti ūmikumbhīlaāvaṭṭasaṃsukābhayehi. Udakappavāhenāgatassapi ca usmā na vigacchati, usmā ca nāma īdisassa saviññāṇakatāya bhaveyyāti ‘‘siyā gabbho’’ti cintesi. Tathā hītiādi tattha kāraṇacintā. Puññavantatāya duggandhaṃ nāhosi, sausumatāya pūtikabhāvo. Dārakānaṃ puññūpanissayato aṅguṭṭhakato cassa khīraṃ nibbatti, khīrabhattañca labhi. Carimakabhave bodhisatte kucchigate bodhisattamātu viya udaracchaviyā acchavippasannatāya nicchavi viyāti katvā āha ‘‘nicchavī ahesu’’nti. Tesanti dvinnaṃ dārakānaṃ. Mātāpitaroti posakamātāpitaro. Abhisiñcitvā rājānaṃ akaṃsu rajjasampattiyā dāyakassa kammassa katattā, asambhinne eva rājakule uppannattā ca. Kumārassa puññānubhāvasañcoditā devatādhiggahitāti keci.
在城西边,离城大约一牛呼的地方,有一座像吉瓦咖芒果园那样带围墙的精舍。“不久离去”在这里不是指去了别的地方,而是指从教法上退离。为了显示这一点,注释里说“还俗”等话。因此经文说“从此法、律中”。“在集会”指在人群中,意思是处在众人当中。而进入人群之中就说成“在众中”。“人间法”指不靠修习作意、仅凭人们自然就会生起的法;或者指能带来人身的法,也就是并不殊胜的微小善行。这种法即使在没有佛陀出世时也存在,这也是针对“以劣等梵行,生于刹帝利中”而说的。“佛陀是我们的”这样对佛陀生起我执的人,称为佛我执者。在其余两句中也是同样的道理。巴利
Purassa apareti purassa aparadisāya gāvutamatte ṭhāne jīvakambavanaṃ viya sapākāramandirake. Acirapakkantoti ettha na desantarapakkamanaṃ adhippetaṃ, atha kho sāsanato apakkamananti dassento ‘‘vibbhamitvā’’tiādimāha. Tenevāha ‘‘imasmā dhammavinayā’’ti. Parisatīti parisāyaṃ, janasamūheti attho. Janasamūhagato pana ‘‘parisamajjhe’’ti vutto. Bhāvanāmanasikārena vinā pakatiyāva manussehi nibbattetabbo dhammoti manussadhammo, manussattabhāvāvaho vā dhammo manussadhammo, anuḷāraṃ parittakusalaṃ. Yaṃ asatipi buddhuppāde vattati, yañca sandhāyāha ‘‘hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjatī’’ti. ‘‘Amhākaṃ buddho’’ti buddhe mamattakārino buddhamāmakā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
关于超人法等的注释巴利
Uttarimanussadhammādivaṇṇanā
能够成为圣者、具备圣者的状态,所以叫“圣者”。像眼识了知并看见色处那样,他了知并看见,这就是“智见”,也就是天眼通。对于适合观照的诸法,他也同样了知并看见无常、苦、无我这三相,这就是“智见”,也就是观。对于涅槃,或者四圣谛,由于无迷惑地通达,他了知并看见,这就是“智见”,也就是圣道。至于果,则应当只依涅槃来配合说明。省察智是以现前了知由道所证得的利益这一含义,而称为“智见”;一切知智由于无障碍、具备周遍之眼,也称为“智见”。这里指的是出世间道,因为如果否定了它,一切佛功德就都不可能存在。因此说:“因为他否定了世尊的那个道。”巴利
Alaṃ ariyāya ariyabhāvāyāti alamariyo, rūpāyatanaṃ jānāti cakkhuviññāṇaṃ viya passati cāti ñāṇadassanaṃ, dibbacakkhu. Sammasanupage ca pana dhamme lakkhaṇattayañca tathā jānāti passati cāti ñāṇadassanaṃ, vipassanā. Nibbānaṃ, cattāri vā saccāni asammohapaṭivedhato jānāti passati cāti ñāṇadassanaṃ, maggo. Phalaṃ pana nibbānavaseneva yojetabbaṃ. Paccavekkhaṇā maggādhigatassa atthassa paccakkhato jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇadassanaṃ, sabbaññutā anāvaraṇatāya samantacakkhutāya ca ñāṇadassanaṃ. Lokuttaramaggo adhippeto, tasmiñhi paṭisiddhe sabbesampi buddhaguṇānaṃ asambhavoti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tañhi so bhagavato paṭisedhetī’’ti.
所谓微细的法差别,并不是靠老师传授才能得到的禅那、观智等等。所谓被推敲所打击,是指用“将会这样、将会那样”的推想,对种种应当展示的意义,仅仅以寻思去反复推敲、翻转。因此说“推敲之后”等等。允许世间智慧,意思是佛陀为坐在近处的听众说随顺他们根机的法。因此说“沙门乔达摩”等等。显现,就是辩才,也就是“我要这样说”这样生起的想说话的心;从这种辩才而了知,就是依辩才的了知;由于不依靠传承、自己自然现起,所以是自生辩才。因此说“借此他否定了对诸法的现量体验”。善触,就是没有间隙。如果没有触到,语音就不能轻快地发出。齿覆,就是双唇。舌,因为僵硬时语音不能轻快地发出,所以说“柔软的舌”。声,因为像杜鹃鸟鸣一样美妙,所以声音甜蜜。Ela 就是过失,吞下过失就是有失语,无过失就不会恼怒。以上所说这一切,只是为了说明取悦他人的原因。巴利
Sukhumaṃ dhammantaraṃ nāma jhānavipassanādikaṃ ācariyānuggahena gahitaṃ nāma natthi. Takkapariyāhatanti ‘‘iti bhavissati, evaṃ bhavissatī’’ti taṃtaṃdassetabbamatthatakkanena vitakkanamattena parito āhataṃ parivattitaṃ katvā. Tenāha ‘‘takketvā’’tiādi. Lokiyapaññaṃ anujānāti upanisinnaparisāya anukūladhammakathanatoti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘samaṇo gotamo’’tiādi. Paṭibhātīti paṭibhānaṃ, ‘‘iti vakkhāmī’’ti evaṃpavattaṃ kathanacittaṃ, tato paṭibhānato jānanaṃ paṭibhānaṃ, āgamābhāvato sayameva upaṭṭhitattā sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘imināssa dhammesu paccakkhabhāvaṃ paṭibāhatī’’ti. Suphusitanti nibbivaraṃ. Aphusitatte hi sukhena vacīghoso na niccharati. Dantāvaraṇanti oṭṭhadvayaṃ. Jivhāpi thaddhatāya sukhena vacīghoso na niccharatīti āha ‘‘mudukā jivhā’’ti. Karavīkarutamañjutāya madhuro saro. Elaṃ vuccati doso, elaṃ gaḷatīti elagaḷā, na elagaḷā anelagaḷā, niddosā, na rujjhatīti attho. Sabbametaṃ rañjanasseva kāraṇaṃ dassento vadati.
所谓“五种法”,是就作为甚深智慧行境的蕴等法,在受持、听闻、记忆、反复修习和如理作意这些方面而说的。对于如此行道者的正确灭苦,这里“正确”一词要同时修饰两处,也就是“正确行道者的正确灭苦”。因为只有正确修行法的人,才能真正灭尽苦。而按照上面所说的方式行道的人,他的“导出”从意义上说就是法的导出,所以说“那法……导出、前往”。巴利
Pañca dhammāti gambhīrañāṇacariyabhūtānaṃ khandhādīnaṃ uggahaṇa-savana-dhāraṇa-paricaya-yonisomanasikāre sandhāyāha. Takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti ettha sammā-saddo ubhayatthāpi yojetabbo ‘‘sammā takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’’ti. Yo hi sammā dhammaṃ paṭipajjati, tasseva sammā dukkhakkhayo hoti. Yo pana vuttanayena takkaro, tassa niyyānaṃ atthato dhammasseva niyyānanti āha ‘‘so dhammo…pe… niyyāti gacchatī’’ti.
147 “忿怒者”:指有忿怒习性的人。不过,因为苏那卡达由于忿怒而变得凶残、说话粗恶,所以经文才说“‘忿怒者’就是凶暴、粗恶的人”。在那种生命状态里,没有能引生道与果的近依止,也就是说,在那种生命状态里,没有能令道果生起的近依止。佛陀们称这种人为“愚人”,就像苏丁那、喇伦达义等人那样。即使有近依止,但在那一刹那没有道或果现前,佛陀们也称之为“愚人”,就像特尼亚长老、优波塞那长老等人那样。至于近依止已经完全断除的人,那就更不必说了。正如经中说“愚人玛卡离,我观犹如被人抛掷一般”,苏那卡达也是如此。因此注释接着说“然而对此……”等。“他的”:这里是用属格形式。“因忿怒”:即由于忿怒的缘故。巴利
147.Kodhanoti kujjhanasīlo. Yasmā pana sunakkhatto kodhavasena kurūro pharusavacano ca, tasmā āha ‘‘kodhanoti caṇḍo pharuso cā’’ti. Tasmiṃ attabhāve maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthīti tasmiṃ attabhāve uppajjanārahānaṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthi. Taṃ buddhā ‘‘moghapuriso’’ti vadanti yathā taṃ sudinnalāḷudāyiādike. Upanissaye satipi tasmiṃ khaṇe magge vā phale vā asati ‘‘moghapuriso’’ti vadanti yathā taṃ dhaniyūpasenattherādike. Samucchinnopanissaye pana vattabbameva natthi. Yathā ‘‘makkhali moghapuriso manussakhippaṃ maññe’’ti (a. ni. 1.311) tathā sunakkhattopīti āha ‘‘imassa panā’’tiādi. Assāti etena. Kattari hidaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Kodhenāti kodhahetunā.
“对世尊”这个说法,是呼应“忿怒”一词而用的与格。“以前”是指他还是比丘的时候。“想听声音”:据说他用天眼看见三十三天里天神的色身时,只看到嘴唇在动,却听不到声音,所以就想听她们的声音。因此经文才说“想听声音……问”。而他在过去世曾经一掌打在一位持戒比丘的耳壳上,把他打聋了,所以即使他修了准备工作,也根本不可能证得天耳。就是针对这件事,才说“知道没有近依止,就没有为他讲准备工作”。“思惟”:是指他被自己错误的寻思带着,不如理地胡思乱想。巴利
Bhagavatoti sampadānavacanaṃ kuddhapadāpekkhāya. Pubbeti bhikkhukāle. Saddaṃ sotukāmoti so kira dibbacakkhunā tāvatiṃsabhavane devatānaṃ rūpaṃ passanto oṭṭhacalanaṃ passati, na pana saddaṃ suṇāti, tasmā tāsaṃ saddaṃ sotukāmo ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saddaṃ sotukāmo…pe… pucchī’’ti. So ca atīte ekaṃ sīlavantaṃ bhikkhuṃ kaṇṇasakkhaliyaṃ paharitvā badhiramakāsi, tasmā parikammaṃ karontopi abhabbova dibbasotādhigamāya. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘upanissayo natthīti ñatvā parikammaṃ na kathesī’’ti. Cintesīti attano micchāparivitakkitena ayoniso ummujjanto cintesi.
因为对导出性的通达,所以从“无差别转用”的角度说,教法本身就是“能导出解脱的”。或者说,圣道是应当被证悟的导出之道,而教法中具有这个意义,所以教法被称为“能导出解脱的”。这里显示的是:这种意义确实存在于教法自身之中,是通过实际作用成就来显示的,因为它在各处都被清楚地表明,而不是仅仅靠宣称。正如:随着犯戒情况的不同而制定各种学处,按照法来教导,随顺所化众生的意乐作不颠倒的说法,对天人所提出的问题,以应机的方式作答,由于世尊在一切处所行智慧无有障碍,所以一切知智对智者来说是清楚的;同样,在各处,如在行双神变等处,神变智等也是清楚的。因此说“我亦……”等。随知,是指随顺着所领受的约定而跟随、前往、了知,所以称为“随知”。因此说“随觉,是意思”。这里所说的随顺约定,也正是依照“随着犯戒情况的不同而制定各种学处”等所说的方式。应当这样理解其连接。正如以一切知智作了连接,同样,也应当以“我也有这样的、称为神变智的上人法”等语,在各处理解其连接。巴利
Niyyānikattāvabodhanato abhedopacārena ‘‘desanādhammo niyyāniko’’ti vutto. Niyyāno vā ariyamaggo bodhetabbo etassa atthīti niyyāniko desanādhammo. Attani atthitaṃ dasseti kiccasiddhidassanena tattha tattha pākaṭīkatattā, na paṭiññāmattena. Tathā hi yathāparādhaṃ taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapaññattiyā yathādhammaṃ veneyyajjhāsayānurūpañca aviparītadhammadesanāya devamanussehi yathābhisaṅkhatapañhānaṃ tadajjhāsayānukūlaṃ ṭhānaso vissajjanena ca bhagavato sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacārabhāvena sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ viññūnaṃ pākaṭaṃ, tathā tattha tattha yamakapāṭihāriyakaraṇādīsu iddhividhañāṇādīnīti. Tenāha ‘‘mayhañcā’’tiādi. Anveti yathāgahitasaṅketassa anugamanavasena eti jānātīti anvayo. Tenāha ‘‘anubujjhatīti attho’’ti. Saṅketānugamanañcettha ‘‘yathāparādhaṃ taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapaññattiyā’’tiādinā vuttanayameva. Evaṃ yojanā veditabbāti yathā sabbaññutaññāṇena yojanā katā, evaṃ ‘‘evarūpampi nāma mayhaṃ iddhividhañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ uttarimanussadhamma’’ntiādinā tattha tattha yojanā veditabbā.
十力智的注释巴利
Dasabalañāṇavaṇṇanā
148 148. 虽然从开头来看,因为教导是依三神通的方式而说,在说完他心通之后,按理接着应当讲上面那三种神通;但从义理上说,三明其实就是前面所说的三神通,所以这里才说“应当说三明”。那么,为什么在这里又说“说了这些之后,上面的十力智就不圆满”呢?难道这些智不像其余的神通那样,依据对各自所缘境的了知义,应当归入神通;同时依据不可动摇义和支持义,应当归入力智之中,就像正念等也可以归入根、力、觉支、道支一样吗?不能这样理解。因为在那些地方,说法是为了显示诸法在种种作用上的差别;而在这里,说法是为了彰显导师功德的殊胜,所以不能那样说,因为从义理上看并无不同。而且某些凡夫可能会生起这样的念头:“世尊把前面说过的功德又重提一遍,是不是为了显示功德更高一筹呢?”因此说得好:“上面的十力智就不圆满了。”巴利
148. Yadipi ādito abhiññāttayavasena desanāya āgatattā cetopariyañāṇānantaraṃ upari tisso abhiññā vattabbā siyunti vattabbaṃ siyā, atthato pana vijjāttayaṃ yathāvuttaabhiññāttayamevāti katvā ‘‘tisso vijjā vattabbā siyu’’nti vuttaṃ. Kasmā panettha ‘‘tāsu vuttāsu upari dasabalañāṇaṃ na paripūratī’’ti vuttaṃ, nanu imāni ñāṇāni sesābhiññā viya attano visayassa abhijānanaṭṭhaṃ upādāya abhiññāsu vattabbāni, akampiyaṭṭhaṃ pana upatthambhanaṭṭhañca upādāya balañāṇesu yathā sammāsatiādayo indriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgesūti? Nayidamevaṃ. Tattha hi dhammānaṃ dhammakiccavisesavibhāvanaparāya desanāya vuttaṃ, idha pana satthu guṇavisesavibhāvanaparāya desanāya tathā vattuṃ na sakkā atthato anaññattā, ekaccānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ evaṃ cittaṃ uppajjeyya ‘‘kimidaṃ bhagavā heṭṭhā vuttaguṇe punapi gaṇhanto guṇādhikadassanaṃ karotī’’ti. Tasmā suvuttametaṃ ‘‘upari dasabalañāṇaṃ na paripūratī’’ti.
为什么说“与其他人不共”呢?这些智难道不是也会在某些声闻弟子身上生起吗?确实会生起,但是像佛陀的处非处智等那样的智,是绝不会在其他人身上任何时候生起的,所以说“与其他人不共”。因此说“是如来之力”。正是着眼于上面所说的这一特征,因为在其他人身上不具有,所以“不共功德”这个名称就惯用于知意乐随眠智等这一类智上。当然,智力的智资粮是特殊的缘,但福德资粮也是这些力的缘;或者说,因为智资粮本身也属于福德资粮,所以说“由福德积聚的成就而获得”。巴利
Aññehi asādhāraṇānīti kasmā vuttaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 3.10.21), nanu cetāni sāvakānampi ekaccānaṃ uppajjantīti? Kāmaṃ uppajjanti, yādisāni pana buddhānaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇādīni, na tādisāni tadaññesaṃ kadācipi uppajjantīti aññehi asādhāraṇānīti. Tenāha ‘‘tathāgatasseva balānī’’ti. Imameva hi yathāvuttalesaṃ apekkhitvā tadabhāvato āsayānusayañāṇādīsu eva asādhāraṇaguṇasamaññā niruḷhā. Kāmaṃ ñāṇabalānaṃ ñāṇasambhāro visesapaccayo, puññasambhāropi pana nesaṃ paccayo eva , ñāṇasambhārassapi vā puññasambhārabhāvato ‘‘puññussayasampattiyā āgatānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
自然象种,是指山行、水行、林行等种种不同行境、不同时分的象群,所有这些从力量上来说,都称为自然象种。十人之力,是指十个中等体力之人的力量。把一尊如来的身力拿来与它们关联起来说。至于说“一尊”,是因为在下文注释中已经出现,所以顺着说法的次第而这样说。那罗延那聚合力:这里“那罗”指光线,众多各种各样的光线由此产生,所以叫“那罗延那”,也就是金刚。因此“那罗延那聚合力”的意思就是金刚聚合力。然而,智力是巴利经典中本来就有的,不像身力那样要靠注释书才确立——这是要表达的意思。《分别论根本复注》中说:“在《相应部》里讲的是七十三智、七十七智。”可是在那里,因缘品中出现的是七十七智和四十四智,而七十三智则见于《无碍解道》中的闻所成智等,并不在《相应部》里。其他种种智——包括在《智事分别》中按一种等方式所说的,以及在别处用“关于前际的智”等说法,还有在《梵网经》等经中“如来知道这些见处,如此被执取”等说法中所讲的——全都包含在内。因为如实通达,自己成为不可动摇的人,又使具备此智的圣者在可引导者中成为最具力量者,所以说“以不可动摇之义和支撑之义”。巴利
Pakatihatthikulanti (saṃ. ni. 2.22) giricaranadīcaravanacarādippabhedā gocariyakālāvakanāmā sabbāpi balena pākatikā hatthijāti. Dasannaṃ purisānanti thāmamajjhimānaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ. Ekassa tathāgatassa kāyabalanti ānetvā sambandho. Ekassāti ca tathā heṭṭhākathāyaṃ āgatattā desanāsotena vuttaṃ. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalanti ettha nārā vuccanti rasmiyo, tā bahū nānāvidhā ito uppajjantīti nārāyanaṃ, vajiraṃ, tasmā nārāyanasaṅghātabalanti vajirasaṅghātabalanti attho. Ñāṇabalaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ āgatameva, na kāyabalaṃ viya aṭṭhakathāruḷhamevāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Saṃyuttake āgatāni tesattati ñāṇāni sattasattati ñāṇānī’’ti vuttaṃ (vibha. mūlaṭī. 760), tattha pana nidānavagge sattasattati āgatāni catucattārīsañca, tesattati pana paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.73 mātikā) sutamayādīni āgatāni dissanti, na saṃyuttake. Aññānipīti etena ñāṇavatthuvibhaṅge ekakādivasena vuttāni, aññattha ca ‘‘pubbante ñāṇa’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 1076) brahmajālādīsu (dī. ni. 1.36) ca ‘‘tayidaṃ tathāgato pajānāti, imāni diṭṭhiṭṭhānāni evaṃ gahitānī’’tiādinā vuttāni anekāni ñāṇappabhedāni saṅgaṇhāti. Yāthāvapaṭivedhato sayañca akampiyaṃ puggalañca taṃsamaṅgiṃ neyyesu adhibalaṃ karotīti āha ‘‘akampiyaṭṭhena upatthambhanaṭṭhena cā’’ti.
“牛王”是指牛王之位,也就是最殊胜的地位。因为诸佛以了知一切智而现前趋赴,或者八类大众前来亲近,所以称为“牛王”,也就是过去诸佛。这里说的“此”,指的正是诸佛之位,也就是一切智。“虽站立而不说”,意思是即使不开口,也像站着宣示一样。“前往”就是认可。巴利
Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ, (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.8) seṭṭhaṃ ṭhānaṃ. Sabbaññutapaṭijānanavasena abhimukhaṃ gacchanti, aṭṭha vā parisā upasaṅkamantīti āsabhā, pubbabuddhā. Idaṃ panāti buddhānaṃ ṭhānaṃ sabbaññutameva vadati. Tiṭṭhamānovāti avadantopi (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.22) tiṭṭhamānova paṭijānāti nāmāti attho. Upagacchatīti anujānāti.
在八众中,是指经中所说的八种大众:“舍利弗,我确实记得,我曾去过数百个刹帝利众……乃至……舍利弗,我实在看不出有任何迹象,会使我生起恐惧或胆怯。”(《中部》1.151)作无畏吼,是指依靠后面将要说明的智与十力的结合,而发出无畏之吼。这是依据《蕴品》中的《狮子吼经》(《相应部》3.78)来说的。巴利
Aṭṭhasu parisāsūti ‘‘abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, sāriputta, anekasataṃ khattiyaparisaṃ…pe… tatra vata maṃ bhayaṃ vā sārajjaṃ vā okkamissatīti nimittametaṃ, sāriputta, na samanupassāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.151) vuttāsu aṭṭhasu parisāsu. Abhītanādaṃnadatīti parato dassitañāṇayogena dasabalohanti abhītanādaṃ nadati. Sīhanādasuttena khandhavagge (saṃ. ni. 3.78) āgatena.
依“天人之中有四轮转动”(《增支部》4.31)这句经文剩下的部分,说明了善士亲近等果报成就的现起,或者说明了依止最初的善士亲近等,而后后善士亲近等的成就才得以现起。其中“等”字,应当知道也含摄了“轮”字。“电轮”就是形状像轮子的闪电。在“胸轮等”中,通过“等”字应当知道“轮”字也可以用来指敕令的集合等。因为在“我们要破僧,破轮”等语句中,敕令被称为“轮”;而在“天轮、阿修罗轮”等语句中,“轮”指的是集合。由于通达已经达到究竟,阿拉汉道智就是通达,所以说“所谓在果的刹那生起”。由它所得的说法智,其作用只是通过令他人觉悟而完成,所以说“在孔丹尼亚证入流时……所谓在果的刹那转起”。从此以后,直到般涅槃,说法智的转起,应当知道就是那已转起的法轮的安住,就像转轮王已转动的轮宝的安住一样。巴利
‘‘Devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ vattatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.31) suttasesena sappurisūpassayādīnaṃ phalasampattipavatti, purimasappurisūpassayādiṃ upanissāya pacchimasappurisūpassayādīnaṃ sampattipavatti vā vuttāti ādi-saddena tattha ca cakka-saddassa gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vicakkasaṇṭhānā asani eva asanivicakkaṃ. Uracakkādīsūti ādi-saddena āṇāsamūhādīsupi cakka-saddassa pavatti veditabbā. ‘‘Saṅghabhedaṃ karissāma cakkabheda’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 409; cūḷava. 343) hi āṇā ‘‘cakka’’nti vuttā, ‘‘devacakkaṃ asuracakka’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.8) samūhoti. Paṭivedhaniṭṭhattā arahattamaggañāṇaṃ paṭivedhoti ‘‘phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena paṭiladdhassapi desanāñāṇassa kiccanipphatti parassa bujjhanamattena hotīti ‘‘aññātakoṇḍaññassa sotāpatti…pe… phalakkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ pana yāva parinibbānā desanāñāṇappavatti tasseva pavattitassa dhammacakkassa ṭhānanti veditabbaṃ pavattitacakkassa cakkavattino cakkaratanassa ṭhānaṃ viya.
这里说的“住立”,难道是指像人站在地上那样吗?不是的,所以解释说:是因为依它而运作。这里的“住”,指的是获得自体并持续存在,而不是指流转停止、不再趣向,因此说“既生起,又持续运作”。为了指出这十力智在哪里被详细阐述,便说“在对阿毗达摩中”等等。其余各处也应依照同样的方式来理解。巴利
‘‘Tiṭṭhatī’’ti vuttaṃ, kiṃ bhūmiyaṃ puriso viya? Noti āha ‘‘tadāyattavuttitāyā’’ti. Ṭhānanti cettha attalābho dharamānatā ca, na gatinivattīti āha ‘‘uppajjati ceva pavattati cā’’ti . Yattha panetaṃ dasabalañāṇaṃ vitthāritaṃ, taṃ dassento ‘‘abhidhamme panā’’tiādimāha. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
“所秉持”就是指所秉持的行为。而这些所秉持的行为,是秉持之后才造作出来的,所以说“秉持后所造作的”。或者,业本身就是业的秉持——这样说是在表明“秉持”这个词并没有产生新的含义,就像“解脱去”一词中的“去”字那样。“趣”指地狱等投生去处。“依”指有身。“时”指业成熟、能够受报的时节。“加行”指作为引生果报之缘的现行造作。巴利
Samādiyantīti samādānāni, tāni pana samādiyitvā katāni hontīti āha ‘‘samādiyitvā katāna’’nti. Kammameva vā kammasamādānanti etena samādānasaddassa apubbatthābhāvaṃ dasseti muttagatasadde gatasaddassa viya. Gatīti nirayādigatiyo. Upadhīti attabhāvo. Kāloti kammassa vipaccanārahakālo. Payogoti vipākuppattiyā paccayabhūtā kiriyā.
“趣向涅槃”就是指趣向涅槃。因为经中将会这样说:“舍利弗,我了知涅槃,也了知通往涅槃的道和通往涅槃的修行。”(中部1.153)
即使许多人一起杀害同一个众生时,虽然所有人的思都以那一个众生的命根为对象,但他们所造的业却各有不同。其中有人是怀着恭敬、主动发心去做的;有人是被别人逼着说“你也来做吧”才去做的;有人则是表现得好像志同道合,不加阻拦地随大流。这些人当中,有人因为这种业投生到地狱,有人投生到畜生道,有人投生到饿鬼道。
如来在他们造业的那一刹那就知道:“以这样的造作方式,这个人将投生地狱,这个人将投生畜生道,这个人将投生饿鬼道。”对于正在投生地狱的,他也知道:“这个人将投生在大地狱,这个人将投生在小地狱。”对于正在投生畜生道的,他也知道:“这个人将成为无足类,这个人将成为两足类,这个人将成为四足类,这个人将成为多足类。”对于正在投生饿鬼道的,他也知道:“这个人将成为被焦渴所逼的饿鬼,这个人将成为常受饥渴的饿鬼,这个人将成为靠别人施食而活的饿鬼。”对于这些业,他也知道:“这个业将牵引结生,这个业在其他业已经带来结生之后,将成为后续成熟的业。”巴利
Agatigāmininti nibbānagāminiṃ. Vakkhati hi ‘‘nibbānañcāhaṃ, sāriputta, pajānāmi nibbānagāmiñca maggaṃ nibbānagāminiñca paṭipada’’nti (ma. ni. 1.153). Bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ ghātentesu kāmaṃ sabbesaṃ cetanā tassevekassa jīvitindriyārammaṇā, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ nānākāraṃ. Tesu (vibha. aṭṭha. 811) hi eko ādarena chandajāto karoti, eko ‘‘ehi tvampi karohī’’ti parehi nippīḷito karoti, eko samānacchando viya hutvā appaṭibāhamāno vicarati. Tesu eko teneva kammena niraye nibbattati, eko tiracchānayoniyaṃ, eko pettivisaye. Taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇe eva – ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa niraye nibbattissati, esa tiracchānayoniyaṃ, esa pettivisaye’’ti jānāti. Niraye nibbattamānampi – ‘‘esa mahāniraye nibbattissati, esa ussadaniraye’’ti jānāti. Tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbattamānampi – ‘‘esa apādako bhavissati, esa dvipādako, esa catuppado, esa bahuppado’’ti jānāti. Pettivisaye nibbattamānampi – ‘‘esa nijjhāmataṇhiko bhavissati, esa khuppipāsiko, esa paradattūpajīvī’’ti jānāti. Tesu ca kammesu – ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ paṭisandhimākaḍḍhissati, idaṃ aññena dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkaṃ bhavissatī’’ti jānāti.
同样,当整个村子的人一起布施钵食时,虽然所有人的思都以钵食为对象,但他们所造的业却各不相同。其中,有人是怀着恭敬心去做的,其余情况与前面所说的一样。因此,他们当中有些人投生到天界,有些人投生到人界。如来在他们造业的当下就已了知:因为是以这种方式造作的,这个人将投生到人界,那个人将投生到天界;在那里,这个人将出生在刹帝利家,那个人将出生在婆罗门家,这个人将出生在吠舍家,那个人将出生在首陀罗家;这个人将投生到他化自在天,那个人将投生到化乐天,这个人将投生到兜率天,那个人将投生到夜摩天,这个人将投生到三十三天,那个人将投生到四大王天,这个人将投生到地居天。对于各处的种种差别——或卑下或尊贵、或肤色金黄或相貌丑陋、或眷属稀少或眷属众多等等——如来在造业的当下就完全了知。巴利
Tathā sakalagāmavāsikesu ekato piṇḍapātaṃ dadamānesu kāmaṃ sabbesampi cetanā piṇḍapātārammaṇāva, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ nānākāraṃ. Tesu hi eko ādarena karotīti sesaṃ purimasadisaṃ, tasmā tesu keci devaloke nibbattanti, keci manussaloke, taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva jānāti – ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa manussaloke nibbattissati, esa devaloke, tatthāpi esa khattiyakule, esa brāhmaṇakule, esa vessakule, esa suddakule, esa paranimmitavasavattīsu, esa nimmānaratīsu, esa tusitesu, esa yāmesu, esa tāvatiṃsesu, esa cātumahārājikesu, esa bhummadevesū’’tiādinā tattha tattha hīnapaṇītasuvaṇṇadubbaṇṇaappaparivāramahāparivāratādibhedaṃ taṃ taṃ visesaṃ āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva jānāti.
同样,当人们刚开始修观时,佛陀就知道:以这种方式,这个人无法觉察任何法,这个人只会界定四大,这个人只会停留在把握色法上,这个人只会停留在把握非色法上,这个人只会停留在把握名色上,这个人只会停留在把握缘上,这个人只会停留在以无常等相为所缘的观上,这个人只会证得初果,这个人只会证得第二果,这个人只会证得第三果,这个人将会证得阿拉汉果。当人们正在修遍相预备行时,佛陀也知道:这个人只会做到预备行,这个人将会生起取相,这个人只会达到安止定,这个人将会以禅那为足处,修观而证得阿拉汉果。因此佛陀说“此人的思”等等。巴利
Tathā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapentesuyeva – ‘‘iminā nīhārena esa kiñci sallakkhetuṃ na sakkhissati, esa mahābhūtamattameva vavatthapessati, esa rūpapariggaheyeva ṭhassati, esa arūpapariggaheyeva, esa nāmarūpapariggaheyeva , esa paccayapariggahe eva, esa lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāya eva, esa paṭhamaphaleyeva, esa dutiyaphale eva, esa tatiyaphale eva, esa arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatī’’ti jānāti. Kasiṇaparikammaṃ karontesupi – ‘‘imassa parikammamattameva bhavissati, esa nimittaṃ uppādessati, esa appanaṃ eva pāpuṇissati, esa jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti jānāti. Tenāha ‘‘imassa cetanā’’tiādi.
欲界就是:从欲的角度、从应当被欲求的角度、以及与欲相应来说,欲这个界就是欲界。用“等”这个字,是为了把嗔界、色界等也包括进来。“以相状各别”的意思是本性不同。“蕴、处、界世间”是说:他了知种种界、各式各样的界——蕴世间、处世间、界世间,都如实了知。这就是句子的连接方式。
“这个叫色蕴……乃至……这个叫识蕴。在这些当中,色蕴有一种分类,色蕴有十一种分类。受蕴有一种分类,受蕴有多种分类。想蕴有一种分类,想蕴有多种分类。行蕴有一种分类,行蕴有多种分类。识蕴有一种分类,识蕴有多种分类。”像这样,这是对蕴世间的了知。
“这个叫眼处……乃至……这个叫法处。其中,十种处属于欲界范围,两种处通于四地。”像这样,这是对处世间的了知。
“这个叫眼界……乃至……这个叫意识界。其中,十六种界属于欲界范围,两种界通于四地。”像这样,这是对界世间的了知。
他了知蕴世间、处世间、界世间有多种本性、各式各样的本性。不只是对有执受的诸行世间如此,对无执受的诸行世间也一样了知:“因为某某界增盛,所以这棵树的树干是白色的,那棵是黑色的;这棵是光滑的,那棵是有刺的;这棵树皮厚,那棵树皮薄;这棵的叶子在颜色、形状等方面是这样的,那棵的花是蓝色、黄色、红色、白色,香或臭;这棵的果实小、大、长、短、圆、形状好、形状差、软、硬、香、臭、甜、苦、辣、酸、涩;这棵的刺尖、钝、直、弯、铜色、黑色、白色。”像这样了知。
这种力量只有一切知佛陀等才有,其他人没有。巴利
Kāmanato, kāmetabbato, kāmapaṭisaṃyuttato ca kāmo dhātu kāmadhātu. Ādi-saddena byāpādadhātu-rūpadhātu-ādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Vilakkhaṇatāyāti visadisasabhāvatāya. Khandhāyatanadhātulokanti anekadhātuṃ nānādhātuṃ khandhalokaṃ āyatanalokaṃ dhātulokaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti yojanā. ‘‘Ayaṃ rūpakkhandho nāma…pe… ayaṃ viññāṇakkhandho nāma. Tesupi ekavidhena rūpakkhandho, ekādasavidhena rūpakkhandho (vibha. 33). Ekavidhena vedanākkhandho, bahuvidhena vedanākkhandho (vibha. 34-61). Ekavidhena saññākkhandho, bahuvidhena saññākkhandho (vibha. 62-91). Ekavidhena saṅkhārakkhandho, bahuvidhena saṅkhārakkhandho (vibha. 92-120). Ekavidhena viññāṇakkhandho, bahuvidhena viññāṇakkhandho’’ti (vibha. 121-149) evaṃ tāva khandhalokassa, ‘‘idaṃ cakkhāyatanaṃ nāma…pe… idaṃ dhammāyatanaṃ nāma. Tattha dasāyatanā kāmāvacarā, dve cātubhūmakā’’tiādinā (vibha. 156-171) āyatanalokassa, ‘‘ayaṃ cakkhudhātu nāma…pe… ayaṃ manoviññāṇadhātu nāma, tattha soḷasa dhātuyo kāmāvacarā, dve cātubhūmakā’’tiādinā (vibha. 172-188) dhātulokassa anekasabhāvaṃ nānāsabhāvañca pajānāti. Na kevalaṃ upādinnakasaṅkhāralokasseva, atha kho anupādinnakasaṅkhāralokassapi – ‘‘imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannattā imassa rukkhassa khandho seto, imassa kāḷo, imassa maṭṭho, imassa sakaṇṭako, imassa bahalattaco, imassa tanuttaco, imassa pattaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena evarūpaṃ, imassa pupphaṃ nīlaṃ pītaṃ lohitaṃ odātaṃ sugandhaṃ duggandhaṃ, imassa phalaṃ khuddakaṃ mahantaṃ dīghaṃ rassaṃ vaṭṭaṃ susaṇṭhānaṃ dussaṇṭhānaṃ mudukaṃ pharusaṃ sugandhaṃ duggandhaṃ madhuraṃ tittakaṃ kaṭukaṃ ambilaṃ kasāvaṃ, imassa kaṇṭako tikhiṇo kuṇṭho ujuko kuṭilo tambo kāḷo odāto hotī’’tiādinā pajānāti. Sabbaññubuddhādīnaṃ eva hi etaṃ balaṃ, na aññesaṃ.
种种意乐,是指内心倾向各不相同。所谓意乐,就是内心的倾向、内心的本性。不过,这种意乐虽然按低劣与殊胜的共通性在经文中只分为两类,但按低劣、殊胜等差别来说其实有无量种,所以论师说“由低劣等各种意乐而有种种意乐性”。在在处处,众生有什么样的意乐,就会亲近、交往、侍奉同样意乐的人,因为界类相同。就像粪便等有它自己的界类本性,只跟粪便等类相应、合得来;同样,内心倾向低劣的人,只跟破戒者等类相应、合得来,而戒行圆满等人,也只跟戒行圆满等类相应、合得来。众生这种种意乐性,世尊如实了知。巴利
Nānādhimuttikatanti nānāajjhāsayataṃ. Adhimutti nāma ajjhāsayadhātu ajjhāsayasabhāvo. So pana hīnapaṇītatāsāmaññena pāḷiyaṃ dvidhāva vuttopi hīnapaṇītādibhedena anekavidhoti āha ‘‘hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāva’’nti. Tattha tattha ye ye sattā yaṃyaṃadhimuttikā, te te taṃtadadhimuttike eva sevanti bhajanti payirupāsanti dhātusabhāgato. Yathā gūthādīnaṃ dhātusabhāvo eso, yaṃ gūthādīhi eva saṃsandanti samenti, evaṃ (puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayassevesa sabhāvo, yaṃ) (vibha. mūlaṭī. 813) hīnajjhāsayā dussīlādīhi eva saṃsandanti samenti, sampannasīlādayo ca sampannasīlādīheva. Taṃ nesaṃ nānādhimuttikataṃ bhagavā yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti.
“增长与衰退”,是指因为条件的不同,从能力上说,就是变得更超胜或更低劣。在《根上下智解说》里说“知藏、知随眠”,为什么这里要说明知藏等呢?因为通过知藏等,可以说明:众生是依靠怎样的根利根钝,而成为善藏、恶藏等的,从而让人了解这些。这样说来,也就成立了两点:根上下智与藏智、随眠智各自具有独特不共的性质;根上下智与种种意乐智各自具有不同的力量。其中,“藏”是指众生所居住的地方,也就是他们的住处,即恶见或如实智。“随眠”是尚未断除、力量强盛的烦恼。然而,世尊在知道众生的藏时,即使那些众生的恶见、观智和道智没有活动的刹那,也能知道。正如所说:巴利
Vuddhiñca hāniñcāti paccayavisesena sāmatthiyato adhikataṃ anadhikatañca. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaniddese (vibha. 814; paṭi. ma. 1.113) ‘‘āsayaṃ jānāti anusayaṃ jānātī’’ti āsayādijānanaṃ kasmā niddiṭṭhanti? Āsayajānanādinā yehi indriyehi paroparehi sattā kalyāṇapāpāsayādikā honti, tesaṃ jānanassa vibhāvanato. Evañca katvā indriyaparopariyattaāsayānusayañāṇānaṃ visuṃ asādhāraṇatā, indriyaparopariyattanānādhimuttikatāñāṇānaṃ visuṃ balatā ca siddhā hoti. Tattha āsayanti yattha sattā nivasanti, taṃ tesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ vā yathābhūtañāṇaṃ vā āsayo.Anusayo appahīnabhāvena thāmagato kileso. Taṃ pana bhagavā sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānanto tesaṃ tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ, vipassanāmaggañāṇānañca appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ –
世尊了知:正在亲近欲的人,这个人的重心在欲上,他的底子是欲,他的心倾向于欲。他也了知:正在亲近出离的人,这个人的重心在出离上,他的底子是出离,他的心倾向于出离。对于正在亲近出离的人,他也是这样了知。对于正在亲近嗔的人,他了知:这个人的重心在嗔上,他的底子是嗔,他的心倾向于嗔。对于正在亲近无嗔的人,他了知:这个人的重心在无嗔上,他的底子是无嗔,他的心倾向于无嗔。对于正在亲近昏沉睡眠的人,他了知:这个人的重心在昏沉睡眠上,他的底子是昏沉睡眠,他的心倾向于昏沉睡眠。对于正在亲近光明想的人,他了知:这个人的重心在光明想上,他的底子是光明想,他的心倾向于光明想。巴利
‘‘Kāmaṃ sevantaṃyeva bhagavā jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo kāmagaruko kāmāsayo kāmādhimutto’ti. Kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo nekkhammagaruko nekkhammāsayo nekkhammādhimutto’ti. Nekkhammaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti. Byāpādaṃ, abyāpādaṃ, thinamiddhaṃ, ālokasaññaṃ sevantaṃyeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo thinamiddhagaruko thinamiddhāsayo thinamiddhādhimutto’ti’’ (paṭi. ma. 1.113).
“初禅等四种禅那”,是指色界初禅等四种禅那,因为它们能烧毁对立面,又能专注于所缘。这是按四禅的分类方式说的。“八解脱”中,前七种之所以叫解脱,是因为在依次入定和出定的每一个刹那,都能从对立诸法中解脱出来,也能对所缘生起胜解;第八种则因为完全从想与受中解脱出来,所以叫离解脱。在四禅分类法和五禅分类法中,初禅定叫有寻有伺;五禅分类法中的第二禅定叫无寻唯伺;两种分类法中,上面三种禅定的定都叫无寻无伺。就等至来说,依次前八种定因为有一心境的状态,所以也叫定,也叫等至;灭尽等至因为没有这种状态,所以不叫定。
“退分法”,是指从还不熟练的初禅等出定后,想和作意涌向欲界等境界。“胜分法”,是指从已经熟练的初禅等出定后,想和作意涌向第二禅等境界。这样,想和作意涌向欲界或第二禅等境界的状态,就被指出是退分法和胜分法;而这些禅那具有那样的性质,就用“法”这个字来表达。
“因此”这个词,是以原因的方式回指前面已经说过的内容。“清净”,是指熟练的状态。那种熟练之所以叫“出定”,是因为它是从初禅等出定后证得第二禅等的条件。那些说“从灭尽定出定而进入果等至,这在巴利三藏中没有依据”的人,应该用这段巴利文来驳斥:“从灭尽定出定的人,无所有处、非想非非想处等,以无间缘为条件,生起果等至。”应该知道:一个已经获得等至的人,却认为自己“没有得到”;明明就是禅修所缘,却认为“不是禅修所缘”;他把成就本身误认为过失。巴利
Paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānanti rūpāvacarānaṃ paṭhamādīnaṃ paccanīkajhāpanaṭṭhena ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhena ca jhānānaṃ. Catukkanayena hetaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānanti ettha paṭipāṭiyā satta appitappitakkhaṇe paccanīkadhammehi vimuccanato ārammaṇe ca adhimuccanato vimokkhā nāma, aṭṭhamo pana sabbaso saññāvedayitehi vimuttattā apagamavimokkho nāma. Catukkanayapañcakanayesu paṭhamajhānasamādhi savitakkasavicāro nāma, pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānasamādhi avitakkavicāramatto, nayadvayepi upari tīsu jhānesu samādhi avitakkaavicāro, samāpattīsu paṭipāṭiyā aṭṭhannaṃ samādhītipi nāmaṃ, samāpattītipi cittekaggatāsabbhāvato, nirodhasamāpattiyā tadabhāvato na samādhīti nāmaṃ. Hānabhāgiyadhammanti appaguṇehi paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhitassa saññāmanasikārānaṃ kāmādianupakkhandanaṃ. Visesabhāgiyadhammanti paguṇehi paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhitassa saññāmanasikārānaṃ dutiyajjhānādipakkhandanaṃ. Iti saññāmanasikārānaṃ kāmādidutiyajjhānādipakkhandanāni hānabhāgiyavisesabhāgiyadhammāti dassitāni, tehi pana jhānānaṃ taṃsabhāvatā dhamma-saddena vuttā. Tasmāti vuttamevatthaṃ hetubhāvena paccāmasati. Vodānanti paguṇatāsaṅkhātaṃ vodānaṃ. Tañhi paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyajjhānādiadhigamassa paccayattā ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Ye (a. ni. ṭī. 3.10.21) pana ‘‘nirodhato phalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhānanti pāḷi natthī’’ti vadanti, te ‘‘nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ phalasamāpattiyā anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti imāya pāḷiyā (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417) paṭisedhetabbā. Yo samāpattilābhī samāno eva ‘‘na labhāmaha’’nti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ samānaṃ eva ‘‘na kammaṭṭhāna’’nti saññī hoti, so sampattiṃyeva samānaṃ ‘‘vipattī’’ti paccetīti veditabbo.
149 “结论”是总结。“不应那样看”,意思是不能像外道所说的那样去看。“只了知各自的作用”,是说它了知各自不同的作用,比如了知处与非处等,能作各自应作之事,意思是只通达各自的领域。“那也”,是说那些也是十力智所应了知的。“只了知业的差别与异熟的差别”,是说只了知业与异熟的不同,即把与思及与思相应的法,也就是从地狱到涅槃之道这些范围内的业取来,所以说“只了知业的划分”。在“界种种以及界种种的因”中,“界种种的因”这一部分应看作省略说法。因为那种智也了知这两者,正如注释中以“由于某某界增盛”等方式所解释的那样。“只了知谛的划分”,是指仅以遍知、现观等方式来划分诸谛。不能入定,是说不能像第八力、第九力那样入定,也不能像与它们相似的如意通智那样显现神通变化。这是为了遮除把它看作与其他力相似。或者说,不能像禅那等智那样入定和变化。虽然说到“观察禅那等的智是第七力”时,曾提到它具有有寻有伺的性质,但仍应知道,那是把与禅那等俱行的智包含在内而这样说的,因为离开禅那等就没有观察。或者,为了显示一切知智不能像禅那等的作用那样完成一切力的作用,所以说“不能成为禅那而入定,不能成为神通而变化”,但不应理解为任何力具有禅那或神通的本质。这样,以作用差别显示了十力智与一切知智的区别之后,现在为了也以寻、伺、地等差别来显示其区别,而说“再者”等。“次第”是指从最初开始依次排列。巴利
149.Appananti nigamanaṃ. Na tathā daṭṭhabbanti yathā paravādinā vuttaṃ, tathā na daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sakasakakiccameva jānātīti ṭhānāṭṭhānajānanādiṃ sakaṃ sakaṃyeva kiccaṃ kātuṃ jānāti, yathāsakameva visayaṃ paṭivijjhatīti attho. Tampīti tehi dasabalañāṇehi jānitabbampi. Kammantaravipākantaramevāti kammantarassavipākantarameva jānāti, cetanācetanāsampayuttadhamme nirayādinibbānagāminipaṭipadābhūte kammanti gahetvā āha ‘‘kammaparicchedamevā’’ti. Dhātunānattañca dhātunānattakāraṇañca dhātunānattakāraṇanti ekadesasarūpekaseso daṭṭhabbo. Tañhi ñāṇaṃ tadubhayampi jānāti, ‘‘imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannattā’’tiādinā (vibha. aṭṭha. 812) tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Saccaparicchedamevāti pariññābhisamayādivasena saccānaṃ paricchindanameva. Appetuṃ na sakkoti aṭṭhamanavamabalāni viya taṃsadisaṃ iddhividhañāṇaṃ viya vikubbituṃ. Etenassa balasadisatañca nivāreti. Jhānādiñāṇaṃ viya vā appetuṃ vikubbituñca. Yadipi hi ‘‘jhānādipaccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṃ sattamabala’’nti tassa savitakkasavicāratā vuttā, tathāpi ‘‘jhānādīhi vinā paccavekkhaṇā natthī’’ti jhānādisahagataṃ ñāṇaṃ tadantogadhaṃ katvā evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jhānādikiccaṃ viya na sabbaṃ balakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkotī’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana kassaci balassa jhānaiddhibhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ kiccavisesavasenapi dasabalañāṇasabbaññutaññāṇānaṃ visesaṃ dassetvā idāni vitakkattikabhūmantaravasenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭipāṭiyātiādito paṭṭhāya paṭipāṭiyā.
做完逐词注释之后应当了知,这是上下文之间的关联。烦恼障就是决定性的邪见。烦恼障不存在,是证得漏尽的处;烦恼障存在,是非处。而对于不能证得漏尽来说,这两者则依次成为非处和处。为了说明其中的理由,所以说“世间……见故”。其中,安住于世间正见,是证得漏尽的处,因为它是烦恼障不存在的因。世间正见存在时,烦恼障就不存在;世间正见不存在时,烦恼障就存在。由此,不安住于世间正见,就是它的非处性,这已经说过了。对于他们这些应度的众生,因见到界的差别,是指因见到欲界等界在生起上的分类差别。了知界差别至何程度,则了知性行差别亦至该程度。或者说,因见到界的差别,是指因见到法界的差别,因为一切性行都包含在法界之中。即使不刻意努力,就像散提大官等人那样。借由天眼智的威神力而得,这句话中,诸声闻为了了知他人当下现起的心,会先以天眼观察对方心所依处的血液颜色,作为预备修习,而且这只是针对初学者而言。因此,借由天眼智的威神力,他心智得以证得。然而对于诸佛来说,虽然他们在证得漏尽智之前就已经证得了天眼智,但即便如此,他们也不做那样的预备修习,因为三明是通过(自然)成就而成就的。在其他三种神通中,他心智也是借由天眼智的证得而证得的,因此也可以说(他心智)是依天眼智而得的,应当如此理解。巴利
Anupadavaṇṇanaṃ katvā veditabbānīti sambandho. Kilesāvaraṇaṃ niyatamicchādiṭṭhi, kilesāvaraṇassa abhāvo āsavakkhayādhigamassa ṭhānaṃ, tabbhāvo aṭṭhānaṃ, anadhigamassa pana tadubhayaṃ yathākkamaṃ aṭṭhānañca ṭhānañcāti tattha kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘lokiya…pe… dassanato cā’’ti āha. Tattha lokiyasammādiṭṭhiyā ṭhiti āsavakkhayādhigamassa ṭhānaṃ kilesāvaraṇābhāvassa kāraṇattā. Sā hi tasmiṃ sati na hoti, asati ca hoti. Etena tassā aṭṭhitiyā tassa aṭṭhānatā vuttā eva. Nesaṃ veneyyasattānaṃ. Dhātuvemattadassanatoti kāmadhātuādīnaṃ pavattibhedadassanato. Yadaggena dhātuvemattaṃ jānāti, tadaggena cariyāvisesampi jānāti. Dhātuvemattadassanatoti vā dhammadhātuvemattadassanato. Sabbāpi hi cariyā dhammadhātupariyāpannā evāti. Payogaṃ anādiyitvāpi santatimahāmattādīnaṃ (dha. pa. 142) viya. Dibbacakkhuñāṇānubhāvato pattabbenāti ettha dibbacakkhunā parassa hadayavatthusannissayalohitavaṇṇadassanamukhena tadā pavattamānacittajānanatthaṃ parikammakaraṇaṃ nāma sāvakānaṃ, tañca kho ādikammikānaṃ, yato dibbacakkhuānubhāvato cetopariyañāṇassa pattabbatā siyā, buddhānaṃ pana yadipi āsavakkhayañāṇādhigamato pageva dibbacakkhuñāṇādhigamo, tathāpi tathā parikammakaraṇaṃ natthi vijjāttayasiddhiyā sijjhanato. Sesābhiññāttaye cetopariyañāṇaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇādhigamena pattanti ca vattabbataṃ labhatīti tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
再者,当心里生起“我以后不再说这样的话”时,这就叫作舍断那句话。不过,那句话的意思要通过说出口才变得清楚,所以就说“正在说的时候”。“我将不执取邪见”,这是对执取邪见的遮止。不让邪见生起,本身就是舍断,所以说“正在舍断的时候”。那个诽谤圣者的人,已经被决定安置在地狱里了,他投生地狱不会有任何障碍;这就是决定性的道理,也是这里要表达的意思。巴利
Puna evarūpiṃ vācaṃ na vakkhāmīti cittaṃ uppādento taṃ vācaṃ pajahati nāma. Vācāya pana so attho pākaṭo hotīti ‘‘vadanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhiṃ na gaṇhissāmīti diṭṭhiggāhapaṭikkhepo. Diṭṭhiyā anuppādanaṃ pajahanamevāti āha ‘‘pajahanto’’ti. So ariyūpavādī niraye ṭhapitoyeva, nāssa nirayūpapattiyā koci vibandho ekaṃsiko ayamatthoti adhippāyo.
“决定”是指确定无疑的状态。因为离开戒、定、慧这三种学处,以及为了这些而修的观,就不可能成就究竟智,所以先说了“应当知道世间与出世间的戒、定、慧”,接着又指出更切近的戒等,说“也可以只从出世间的角度来遮止”。因此,应当知道这里指的是最上道所包含的戒等。因为证得最上道的人,在现世中就已经确定无疑地成就了;其他人则不一定。“具足”就是成就,意思是圆满。所以“如是具足”就是说具有这样决不错谬的圆满成果。因此又说“这个理由”等等。这里的“理由”指道理。从中可以提取出这样一个道理:诽谤圣者而堕入地狱的人,因为他的执取根本不存在,就像邪见者一样。而且,这里通过“不舍弃那种话”等语句说明:如果不舍弃那种执取,诽谤圣者就会成为障碍,带来无益;如果舍弃了,通过发露过失、请求原谅,就不会成为障碍,反而带来利益,就像出罪和如法悔过一样。巴利
Assāti ekaṃsikabhāvassa. Sikkhāhi sīlasamādhipaññāhi, tadatthāya vipassanāya ca vinā aññārādhanassa asambhavato ‘‘lokiyalokuttarā sīlasamādhipaññā veditabbā’’ti vatvā puna āsannatare sīlādike dassento ‘‘lokuttaravaseneva vinivattetumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti āha, tasmā aggamaggapariyāpannā sīlādayo veditabbā. Aggamaggaṭṭhassa hi diṭṭheva dhamme ekaṃsikā aññārādhanā, itaresaṃ anekaṃsikāti. Sampajjanaṃ sampadā, nipphattīti attho, tasmā evaṃsampadanti evaṃavirajjhanakanipphattikanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘imampi kāraṇa’’ntiādi. Tattha kāraṇanti yutti. Tatrāyaṃ yuttiniddhāraṇā ‘‘nirayūpago ariyūpavādī tadādāyassa avijjamānato seyyathāpi micchādiṭṭhī’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘taṃ vācaṃ appahāyā’’tiādivacanena tadādāyassa appahānena ca ariyūpavādo antarāyiko anatthāvaho ca, pahānena pana accayaṃ desetvā khamāpanena anantarāyiko atthāvaho ca yathā taṃ vuṭṭhitā desitā ca āpattīti dasseti.
四无畏智的注释巴利
Catuvesārajjañāṇavaṇṇanā
150 由于愚痴与恐惧而寻求皈依,这种执著就是“有怖畏者”;愚痴与恐惧就是怖畏。已离有怖畏者的人,就是“无碍者”;他的这种状态,就是“无碍性”。而这无碍性,是依止于智成就、断成就、说法殊胜成就和安稳成就而生起的四种省察智。因此说“于四处”等。“于所示诸法中”,就是于所说诸法中。那仅仅只是言说而已,并不是现见,因为那样性质的法并不存在。或者,是依据他人转述世尊所说“这些法是我所未正觉的”等,而称为“于所示诸法中”。在“法无碍解”等中,“法”这个词是“因”的同义词,所以说“与法俱者”就是“与因俱者”。而“因”应当理解为令再生的因,不是造作者,也不是令到达者。“无量”就是不可见。因为例示是依随顺与遮遣而成为量,所以称为“量”。“相”就是招致呵责的因。其中,呵责者作呵责,这是因;依此而对其作呵责,这也是因。因此说“补特伽罗也”等。“安稳”就是因不被任何事物所障碍而无恼害的状态。巴利
150. Byāmohabhayavasena (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.8) saraṇapariyesanaṃ sārajjanaṃ sārado, byāmohabhayaṃ, vigato sārado etassāti visārado, tassa bhāvo vesārajjaṃ. Taṃ pana ñāṇasampadaṃ pahānasampadaṃ desanāvisesasampadaṃ khemaṃ nissāya pavattaṃ catubbidhaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catūsu ṭhānesū’’tiādi. Dassitadhammesūti vuttadhammesu. Vacanamattameva hi tesaṃ, na pana dassanaṃ tādisasseva dhammassa abhāvato. Bhagavatā eva vā ‘‘ime dhammā anabhisambuddhā’’ti parassa vacanavasena dassitadhammesu. ‘‘Dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 718) viya dhamma-saddo hetupariyāyoti āha ‘‘sahadhammenāti sahetunā’’ti. Hetūti ca upapattisādhanahetu veditabbo, na kārako sampāpako ca. Appamāṇanti anidassanaṃ. Nidassanañhi anvayato byatirekato pamāṇaṅgatāya ‘‘pamāṇa’’nti vuccati. Nimittanti codanāya kāraṇaṃ. Tattha codako codanaṃ karotīti kāraṇaṃ, dhammo codanaṃ karoti etenāti kāraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘puggalopī’’tiādi. Khemanti kenaci appaṭibandhiyabhāvena anupaddutataṃ.
这些法本身存在障碍,或者它们就是与障碍相应的,所以叫“障碍法”。不过,因为它们这样存在时,就成了能制造障碍的东西,所以说“能制造障碍,所以叫障碍法”。不是故意违犯,罪过就没那么重,因此说“故意违犯”。七种犯聚等只是举例说明;其余四种被称为“障碍法”的法,如果也存在,同样没有例外。但这里特指淫欲法,这是根据具体事由而说的,就像阿利塔学处(《巴吉帝亚》417-422)那样。因为即使在那时,如果看到诸欲的过患而离染,就能获得殊胜,不会贪著于欲,所以说“淫欲……是障碍”。其中,“任何人”不仅指出家者,而是指任何人。正如所说:“耽著淫欲的人,确实会忘失教法。”“于那非导出法”,是指对他人所构想的非导出法之相;这里的“于那”是处格,表示“相”的意思。巴利
Antarāyo etesaṃ atthi, antarāyevā yuttāti antarāyikā. Evaṃbhūtā pana te yasmā antarāyakarā nāma honti, tasmā āha ‘‘antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā’’ti. Asañcicca vītikkamo na tathā sāvajjoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sañcicca vītikkantā’’ti. Satta āpattikkhandhātiādi nidassanamattaṃ itaresampi catunnaṃ ‘‘antarāyikā’’ti vuttadhammānaṃ tabbhāve byabhicārābhāvato. Idha pana methunadhammo adhippetoti idaṃ aṭṭhuppattivasena vuttaṃ ariṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ (pāci. 417-422) viya. Yasmā taṅkhaṇampi kāmesu (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.8) ādīnavaṃ disvā viratto (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.8) hoti ce, visesaṃ adhigacchati, na kāmesu āsatto, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘methunaṃ…pe… antarāyo hotī’’ti. Tattha yassa kassacīti na kevalaṃ pabbajitasseva, atha kho yassa kassaci. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘methunamanuyuttassa, mussatevāpi sāsana’’nti. Tasmiṃ aniyyānikadhammeti tasmiṃ parena parikappitaaniyyānikadhammanimittaṃ. Nimittatthe hi idaṃ kammasaṃyoge bhummaṃ.
八众的注释巴利
Aṭṭhaparisavaṇṇanā
151 人的勇猛只有在战场上才看得出来,不是坐在家里的时候能看出的;同样地,无碍智的威力要在智者众中才显示出来。为了说明这一点,所以说“为显示无碍智之力”。所谓“集会而坐之处”,是以地点为代表,实际上指的就是聚集在一起的刹帝利众。其余各处也是同样的道理——为了通过类推说明已经显现的意义,才说了“魔身天众”等话,因为类推是以相似的对象为范围的。正如“刹帝利的集合就是刹帝利众”这个意思可以成立,但“魔众”这个词在这里不是这样,这里要表达的意思是“魔罗的部众就是魔众”。因此说“魔身天众……不是魔罗”。魔身天众,就是属于魔那一方的人。“以见可怖处故”,意思是依照见到令人恐惧之处来说的,也就是说,大刹帝利们是依靠自己的福德之力才做到这样。“婆罗门于三吠陀中”,这句话是为了显示其余种姓不具备这个领域而说的。因为即使是诵读吠陀的刹帝利和吠舍,大多也没有能力审察其中的含义。那么,为什么这里没有把夜摩天等众包括进来呢?因为他们极度贪著于欲乐,缺乏如理作意。夜摩天等众受用着极其殊胜微妙的欲乐,深深贪著其中,自然连想听法的心都生不起来;不过,在大菩萨和诸佛以威力摄受之下,他们有时也会在那样的大法会中前来亲近、侍奉等。正因如此,《天宫事》的开示也大多不是以他们为缘而说的。这八众是依人来说的。巴利
151. Purisassa sūratarabhāvo nāma saṅgāme pākaṭo hoti, na gehe nisinnakāle, evaṃ vesārajjañāṇassa ānubhāvo paṇḍitaparisāsu yattha katthacīti dassento ‘‘vesārajjañāṇassa baladassanattha’’nti āha. Sannipatitvā nisinnaṭṭhānanti ṭhānasīsena sannipatitakhattiyaparisameva dasseti. Eseva nayo sabbatthāti atidesena āvibhāvitamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mārakāyikāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ sadisatthavisayattā atidesassa. Yathā hi khattiyānaṃ samūho khattiyaparisāti ayamattho labbhati, na evaṃ ‘‘māraparisā’’ti ettha, mārassa parisāti pana māraparisāti ayamattho adhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘mārakāyikānaṃ…pe… na mārāna’’nti. Mārakāyikānanti mārapakkhiyānaṃ. Uggaṭṭhānadassanavasenāti sārajjitabbaṭṭhānadassanavasena, evaṃ uggā khattiyā attano puññatejenāti adhippāyo. Brāhmaṇā tīsu vedesūti idaṃ itaresaṃ avisayadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Vede sajjhāyantāpi hi khattiyā vessā ca tadatthavicāraṇāya yebhuyyena asamatthā evāti. Kasmā panettha yāmādiparisā na gahitāti? Bhusaṃ kāmābhigiddhatāya yonisomanasikāravirahato. Yāmādayo hi uḷāruḷāre kāme paṭisevantā tatthābhigiddhatāya dhammassavanāya sabhāvena cittampi na uppādenti, mahābodhisattānaṃ pana buddhānañca ānubhāvena ākaḍḍhiyamānā kadāci tesaṃ payirupāsanādīni karonti tādise mahāsamaye. Teneva hi vimānavatthudesanāpi tannimittā bahulā nāhosi. Manussānaṃ vasenāyaṃ katā.
在其他轮围世界里,人们虽然没有特别的证悟,但还是有人问:“世尊是不是也去其他轮围世界呢?”对方回答说:“他去。”这是为了说明:虽然那些人没有证得圣法,但世尊为了给他们留下习气种子,还是去那里说法。臂环是镶嵌着各种宝石、用金网编织成的上臂装饰。手镯是用各种香料熏过、或者纯金打成的臂环。断声就是破裂的声音;怒吼声就是像喉咙发出的粗涩吼声。他方语言,是指他们的语言。为了把“生起审察”这个简略的说法展开,就说了“这里说的是”等等。巴利
Paracakkavāḷesu ca manussānaṃ visesādhigamo natthīti pucchati ‘‘kiṃ pana bhagavā aññāni cakkavāḷānipi gacchatī’’ti. Itaro yadipi tesaṃ ariyadhammādhigamo natthi, vāsanāya pana tattha gantvā dhammaṃ desetīti dassento ‘‘āmagacchatī’’ti āha. Keyūraṃ nānāvidharatanaparisibbitasuvaṇṇajālavinaddhaṃ bhujābharaṇaṃ. Aṅgadaṃ nānāgandhagandhitaṃ, kevalaṃ vā suvaṇṇamayaṃ bāhuvalayaṃ. Chinnassarāti dvidhābhūtassarā (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.172) gaggarassarāti gaggarikāya viya gaggarāyamānakharassarā (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.172; a. ni. ṭī. 3.8.69). Bhāsantaranti tesaṃ bhāsaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.172; a. ni. ṭī. 3.8.69) sandhāyāha. ‘‘Vīmaṃsāuppajjatī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘idaṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
聚在一起就是“集会”。开口最初说的那些话叫“初语”;用一来一往的言语对答来平等交谈,这叫“等语”。正确的、或者彼此共许的谈论,叫“共论”;共论就是互相讨论。巴利
Saṅgammāti samāgantvā. Ādito lāpo ālāpo, vacanapaṭivacanavasena samaṃ lāpo sallāpo. Sammā, samaññā vā kathā saṃkathā, saṃkathāva sākacchā.
152 152. 所谓“生”,是指那些众生虽然并不混杂,却因为同属一类而看起来像是混杂在一起,所以叫“生”。但从意义上说,“生”其实是诸蕴生起的一种特殊方式——它随卵等出生处所的不同而各部分地生起;因此说“蕴的一部分,名为生”。“卵生”是依第一次出生来说的;若依第二次出生,则是从卵中出生,或者在卵破裂时出生,应当这样理解。因此说“破壳而出”。“无有”是指没有这些卵等外部条件。“如跃出者”是指依生起的方式,如同跃出一般;或者说,正是不依赖外部条件,在化生中能完善化生者才是化生,这里就称为“化生”。“等”字统括了在胎秽中出生的大莲王子等。那些被火焚毁的渴饿鬼,因为常受痛苦逼恼,没有欲乐的享受,所以他们不是胎生者;又因为母体形同网状,胎无法在腹中安住,所以他们只是化生,也不可能以湿生的状态存在。“如地狱生者”,这是以举例的方式显示他们也是化生。“其余”是指除被火焚毁的渴饿鬼与地狱生者之外,其余堕入恶趣者。当夜叉属于四天王天而处于化生状态时,为了遮止此义,才说“夜叉也是如此”等。这是因为他们既不是地居天,也不是堕恶趣者。巴利
152. Yavanti tāya sattā amissitāpi samānajātitāya missitā viya hontīti yoni. Sā pana atthato aṇḍādiuppattiṭṭhānavisiṭṭho khandhānaṃ bhāgaso pavattivisesoti āha ‘‘khandhakoṭṭhāso yoni nāmā’’ti. Aṇḍe jātāti paṭhamāya jātiyā vasena vuttaṃ, dutiyāya pana aṇḍato, aṇḍe vā bhijjamāne jātāti evamattho veditabbo. Tenāha ‘‘abhinibbhijja jāyantī’’ti. Vināti etehi aṇḍādīhi bāhirapaccayehi vinā. Uppatitvā viyāti uppajjanavasena patitvā viya. Bāhirapaccayanirapekkhattāyeva vā upapatane sādhukārino upapātikā, te eva idha opapātikāti vuttā. Ādi-saddena gabbhamale nibbattamahāpadumakumārādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Nijjhāmataṇhikapetānaṃ niccaṃ dukkhāturatāya kāmasevanā natthi , tasmā te gabbhaseyyakā na honti, jālavantatāya na tāsaṃ kucchiyaṃ gabbho saṇṭhāti, tasmā te opapātikāyeva saṃsedajattāyapi asambhavato. Nerayikā viyāti nidassanāpadesena tesampi opapātikattaṃ dīpeti. Avasesāti nijjhāmataṇhikanerayike ṭhapetvā avasesā vinipātikā. Yakkhānaṃ cātumahārājikatāya opapātikabhāve eva āpanne taṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ yakkhāpī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi te na bhummadevā na ca vinipātikāti.
153 153.“应去”就是“应往生”。就像“业有”,从究竟真实来说,即使没有造作者,也由因缘聚合而成,却被具有相续特征、具备彼业的有情说成是“由他所作”;同样,具有“往生有”特征的诸趣,从究竟真实来说,即使没有去者,也依照各人各自的业力,那些趣就被说成是“应由他们去”。这样从词义上说明了“趣”之后,为了再以提取义理的方式说明它,便说了“再者”等话。在地狱等各类往生有中,“趣”这个词是约定俗成的;但在其他场合也有“趣”这个词的运用,为了以同一个“趣”词加以区分,便说“趣、趣”,如同“苦苦、色色”一样。为了生起而前往、趋近,称为“往生趣”。趣就是心之趣。因此说“名为意乐之趣”,意思是意乐的转起。然而在那部义注中说“趣就是完成”的意思。因为在《梵天邀请经》中这是经文。光明就是威神力。无有就是灭尽。那因为是以离去为义,所以也是“趣”。正因为如此,“涅槃是阿拉汉的趣”,无余涅槃是阿拉汉的趣、离去、无有,因为诸界有多种含义。只有二趣,就是只有二完成,意思是如此,所以说“这名为完成趣”。巴利
153.Gantabbāti upapajjitabbā. Yathā hi kammabhavo paramatthato asatipi kārake paccayasāmaggiyā siddho taṃsamaṅginā santānalakkhaṇena sattena katoti voharīyati, tathā upapattibhavalakkhaṇā gatiyo paramatthato asatipi gamake taṃtaṃkammavasena yesaṃ tāni kammāni, tehi gantabbāti voharīyantīti. Evaṃ saddatthato gatiṃ dassetvā atthuddhāranayenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yesu nirayādibhedesu upapattibhavesu gati-saddo nirūḷho, tato aññatthāpi gatisaddappavatti atthi, taṃ ekena gati-saddena visesetvā āha ‘‘gatigatī’’ti yathā ‘‘dukkhadukkhaṃ, (saṃ. ni. 4.327) rūparūpa’’nti (visuddhi. 2.449) ca. Uppādāvatthāya gamanaṃ upagamananti ‘‘nibbattigatī’’ti vuttā. Gatinti cittagatiṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ajjhāsayagati nāmā’’ti, ajjhāsayappavattīti attho. Tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.503) pana ‘‘gatinti nipphatti’’nti attho vutto. Brahmanimantanasutte (ma. ni. 1.503) hi ayaṃ pāḷīti. Jutinti ānubhāvaṃ. Vibhavoti vināso. So hi vigamoti atthena gati. Teneva nibbānaṃ arahato gatīti (pari. 339) anupādisesanibbānaṃ arahato gati vigamo vibhavoti anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ. Dveyeva gatiyoti dveva nipphattiyoti atthoti āha ‘‘ayaṃ nipphattigati nāmā’’ti.
凡是生起的,在使它增长时就是生起,所以叫“铁”(ayo),也就是快乐。这里没有这种快乐,所以叫“地狱”(niraya)。为了说明在那里没有可欢喜、可享受的,就说“以无欢喜之义、无美味之义,叫地狱”。“横向堆积”的意思是:不像天和人等那样向上长得高,而是横向地长。“显然从快乐离去,到达死后的状态”:到达这种死后状态者的领域,所以说的就是鬼道(饿鬼界)。所谓“因为心的增盛”,是说心被念、勇健、堪修梵行等功德所累积,成为具殊胜功德之心,这就是“意”的意思。然而这个含义,应当依住于赡部洲者的情形而究竟了知。如说:“诸比丘,赡部洲人以三处胜过北俱卢人及三十三天。哪三处?勇敢、具念、此处有梵行住。”然而由于他们与那些形色等相同,与住于小洲者一起,其他大洲的居民也被认为只是人。世人则说“由于是玛奴的后裔,所以是人”。此处这是略说,详细则应依《胜义明灯》中《天宫事注》所述方式而取。以威神力,即依称为天威神的种种神变殊胜。其中,欲界诸天神以欲乐及神变殊胜,其他则仅以神变殊胜而放光、游戏、光辉,或行走、行进,或被赞叹,所以叫“天”。巴利
Yassa uppajjati, taṃ brūhento eva uppajjatīti ayo, sukhaṃ. Natthi ettha ayoti nirayo. Tato eva ramitabbaṃ assādetabbaṃ tattha natthīti dassento āha ‘‘niratiatthena nirassādaṭṭhena nirayo’’ti. Tiriyaṃ añcitāti devamanussādayo viya uddhaṃ dīghā ahutvā tiriyaṃ dīghābhi attho. Pakaṭṭhato sukhato ayanaṃ apagamo peccabhāvo, taṃ peccabhāvaṃ pattānaṃ visayoti petayonimeva vadati. Manaso ussannattāti satisūrabhāvabrahmacariyayogyatādiguṇavasena upacitamānasatāya ukkaṭṭhaguṇacittatāyāti atto. Ayaṃ panattho nippariyāyato jambudīpavāsīvasena veditabbo. Yathāha – ‘‘tīhi, bhikkhave, ṭhānehi jambudīpikā manussā uttarakuruke manusse adhiggaṇhanti deve ca tāvatiṃse. Katamehi tīhi? Sūrā satimanto idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti (a. ni. 9.21). Tehi pana samānarūpāditāya saddhiṃ parittadīpavāsīhi itaramahādīpavāsinopi manussāteva paññāyiṃsu. Lokiyā pana ‘‘manuno apaccabhāvena manussā’’ti vadanti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana paramatthadīpaniyaṃ vimānavatthusaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (vi. va. aṭṭha. 3) vuttanayena gahetabbo. Ānubhāvehīti devānubhāvasaṅkhātehi iddhivisesehi. Tattha kāmā devā kāmaguṇehi ceva iddhivisesehi ca itare iddhiviseseheva dibbanti kīḷanti jotanti, saraṇanti vā gammanti, abhitthaviyantīti vā devāti.
在“畜生道”等语句中,这里用“畜生道、饿鬼界”来统称时,其实只是指诸蕴,因为并没有一个固定、限定的空间属于它们。或者,它们住在森林、大海、山岳等固定的地方,那就按这些住处来包含空间。地狱众生等所寻求的道路,以及应当修行的行道,说的就是各种不同的业,所以论中说“以二者”等等。“如已行道者”这句话,是在说明那种业已被造作、已被积集的状态。这里应当看到:先用共通的方式说了通往地狱的道路和通往地狱的行道,也就是指能导致地狱的业;然后为了显示它随各自相续而堕落的个别性,才说了“如已行道者”等。“堕落”的意思是:无力地,或者以扭曲的形态陷落。那么,为什么世尊在这里开示辨别五趣的智慧之后,又说“涅槃也……”呢?针对这个疑问,论中说“然而这里”等等。因为世尊在显示自己觉悟、善觉的时候,说法不会有所保留。巴利
Tiracchānayoniñcātiādīsūti ettha tiracchānayonipettivisayaggahaṇena khandhānaṃ eva gahaṇaṃ tesaṃ tādisassa paricchinnassa okāsassa abhāvato. Yattha vā te araññasamuddapabbatādike nibaddhavāsaṃ vasanti, tādisassa ṭhānassa vasena okāsopi gahetabbo. Nirayūpagādīhi sattehi maggitabbato maggo paṭipajjitabbā paṭipadā cāti taṃ taṃ kammameva vuttanti āha ‘‘ubhayenapī’’tiādi. Yathā ca paṭipannoti iminā tassa kammassa katūpacitākāramāha. Ettha ca nirayagāmiñca maggaṃ nirayagāminiñca paṭipadanti iminā sādhāraṇato nirayasaṃvattaniyaṃ kammaṃ vatvā puna taṃ taṃ santānapatitatāya asādhāraṇataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāpaṭipanno’’tiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vinipatantīti vivasā, virūpaṃ vā nipatanti. Kasmā panettha pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘nibbānañcāha’’ntiādimāhāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘idaṃ panā’’tiādi. Na hi bhagavā attano buddhasubuddhataṃ vibhāvento sāvasesaṃ katvā desanaṃ deseti.
智生起方式的注释巴利
Ñāṇapavattākāravaṇṇanā
154 智的生起方式,就是指智生起时的样态,或者智表现出来的方式。纯粹是苦,就是完全地苦、彻底地苦。为了说明它们任何时候都是苦,连一丝一毫乐的味道都没有掺杂,所以又说“恒常是苦、没有间断的苦”。深重,就是不轻微,意思是巨大。或者剧烈,就是尖锐猛烈。粗硬,就是粗糙坚硬。辛辣,就是不可意。挖掘,就是被挖开,所以叫坑;堆积,就是被堆起来,所以叫堆。抖散,就是用两只手把火炭捧起来,逆着风撒出去,因此他们全身都被烧焦,所以说“肢体被烧遍”。人量,就是一个人的高度。只有一条路,就是只有一条道。无法越过,就是没办法跨过去、没办法绕过去。巴利
154.Ñāṇappavattākāranti ñāṇassa pavattiākāraṃ, ñāṇassa vā pavattipakāraṃ. Ekantadukkhāti ekantena dukkhā accantadukkhā. Tā pana sabbakālaṃ dukkhā sukhālayenapi asammissāti dassento āha ‘‘niccadukkhā nirantaradukkhā’’ti. Bahalāti atanukā, mahantāti attho . Tibbāti vā tikhiṇā. Kharāti kakkhaḷā. Kaṭukāti vā aniṭṭhā. Kassati khaṇīyatīti kāsu, āvāṭo. Kasīyati cīyatīti kāsu, rāsi. Phunantīti dvīhi hatthehi aṅgārāni ukkhipitvā paṭivātaṃ ophunanti, tena tesaṃ sakalasarīraṃ ḍayhati. Tenāha ‘‘paridaḍḍhagattā’’ti. Purisappamāṇaṃ porisaṃ. Ekapathenevāti ekamaggabhūteneva. Anukkamanīyenāti ukkamituṃ apakkamituṃ asakkuṇeyyena.
有人会问:天眼智是以当下显现的颜色为对象,那它怎么能认出那个投生到地狱、具有不同色身的众生,并知道“就是这个人”呢?针对这个责难,才说了“在那里,虽然……”等等。他是靠随业往生智来确认“就是这个人”的。不过,这种确认之所以能够达到,是靠天眼的威力,所以说“这叫做天眼力”。巴利
Nanu ca dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ paccuppannavaṇṇārammaṇaṃ, tena kathaṃ rūpantarasamaṅgiṃ niraye nibbattasattaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ so’’ti jānātīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yathākammūpagañāṇena ‘‘ayaṃ so’’ti sallakkheti, tassa pana dibbacakkhuānubhāvena pattabbattā ‘‘dibbacakkhubalaṃ nāma etanti vuttaṃ.
按前面所说的方法,也就是像“畜生道应当看作粪坑”这样,按照火坑譬喻里已经讲过的方式来理解。这些地方苦受居多,所以叫“苦多”。枝叶繁密,是指叶子茂密不稀疏、薄而宽大。为了展示那座享受广大快乐的殿堂,所以说“长殿堂”,因为方形等殿堂比较狭小。用红色羊毛制成的敷具,是指用红色羊毛制成的铺敷物。遮蔽上方,所以叫“上覆”,也就是天篷。而这里特指红色的天篷,所以说“以红色天篷”。巴利
Purimanayenevāti ‘‘gūthakūpo viya tiracchānayoni daṭṭhabbā’’tiādinā aṅgārakāsupamāyaṃ vuttanayeneva. Dukkhā vedanā bahulā etāsūti dukkhabahulā. Bahalapattapalāsoti aviraḷatanuvipulapaṇṇo. Sukhaparibhogaṃ mahāpāsādaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dīghapāsādo’’ti vuttaṃ caturassapāsādādīnaṃ khuddakattā. Uṇṇāmayaattharaṇenāti uṇṇāmayalohitaattharaṇena. Uttaraṃ uparibhāgaṃ chādetīti uttaracchado, vitānaṃ. Taṃ pana lohitavitānaṃ idhādhippetanti ‘‘rattavitānenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“后分的连接”是指把经文中“于后时”所说的那部分后文连接起来。不过,当前面部分已经大致说明之后,这部分就容易理解了,所以说“如同那位”等。“已登道者”只是指仅仅进入道而已。巴利
Aparabhāgayojanāti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘aparena samayenā’’ti vuttassa aparabhāgassa yojanā. Sā pana ekadesena purimabhāge vutte eva suviññeyyā hotīti ‘‘yathā so’’tiādimāha. Maggāruḷhamevāti maggaṃ upagatamattameva.
所谓“只是以天眼看见”,是因为没有确定性,才说无确定性。说“也将以天眼看见”,并不是因为无上乐的体验属于天眼的范围才这么说;未来那件事,是靠作为天眼辅助的未来分智看见的,所以这里是借原因来代说结果。不过在经文里,直接说的是“以心彻知心”。前面简要说的“然而在意义上有所不同”,为了展开解释它,先说了“天界之乐”等;又借上面所举的譬喻,这个道理也就很明显了,于是说“即使在譬喻中”等。圣弟子从种姓智生起开始,见到灭之后,就以省察已生起的道与果、以及随后入果等至的方式,犹如安住在灭中一样,正是依止于此而运转,所以说“安住于最殊胜的灭之卧处”。因此说“见涅槃……”。巴利
Niyamābhāvāti ‘‘dibbacakkhunāva passatī’’ti niyamassa abhāvā. ‘‘Dibbacakkhunāpi passissatī’’ti idaṃ na anuttarasukhānubhavanassa dibbacakkhugocarattā vuttaṃ, anāgatassa pana tassa dibbacakkhuparibhaṇḍabhūtena anāgataṃsañāṇena dassanamevāti kāraṇūpacārena vuttaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi’’cceva vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atthato pana nānā hotī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘devalokasukhaṃ hī’’tiādiṃ vatvā yathādassitaupamāhipi ayamattho pākaṭo evāti dassento ‘‘upamāyampī’’tiādimāha. Gotrabhuñāṇuppādato paṭṭhāya nirodhaṃ passitvā uppannamaggaphalapaccavekkhaṇavasena ceva parato phalasamāpattisamāpajjanavasena ca ariyasāvako nirodhe sayito viya hoti tadapassayeneva pavattanatoti āha ‘‘nirodhasayanavaragata’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānā…pe… passatī’’ti.
难行苦行等清净的注释巴利
Dukkarakārikādisuddhivaṇṇanā
155 由于和“问的连接”等三种连接方式不同,所以说了“依各别的连接”。并不只是持有“通过苦行就能得到清净”这种见解的人,为了说明他对苦行者怀有深信,才说了“而且”等话。“四蜷者”:用两只脚和两只手,共四肢蜷缩着行走的人。“撒在地上者”:扔在地上的东西。“食物”:吃的东西。巴利
155. Pucchānusandhiādianusandhittayato aññattā ‘‘pāṭiyekkaṃ anusandhivasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na kevalaṃ ‘‘dukkarakārikāya suddhi hotī’’ti evaṃladdhiko eva, atha kho dukkaracārīsu abhippasannoti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Catukuṇḍikoti dvīhi pādehi hatthehīti catūhi aṅgehi kuṇḍanako āhiṇḍanako. Chamānikiṇṇanti bhūmiyaṃ khittaṃ. Bhakkhasanti āhāraṃ.
梵行:因为远离了悭吝之垢等恶法,又增长了慈等功德,所以是最殊胜清净的行为,这就叫梵行,这里指的是布施。世尊确实也是这样说的,说这是智者所安立的。其余各处也应当同样根据情况,先确定梵行的同义词,然后再加以说明。是怎样的呢?是什么样子的呢?行,就是所受持的戒行。善行,就是善加修习圆满的福德。威德,就是威力。光耀,就是衣服和装饰品的光彩辉映而闪耀的身光。获得强力与精进,就是兼具身力和精进。巴利
Macchariyamalādipāpadhammavigamanato mettādiguṇānubrūhanato ca brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ cariyanti brahmacariyaṃ, dānaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ bhagavatā paṇḍitapaññattaṃ vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi yathārahaṃ brahmacariyapariyāyo niddhāretvā vattabbo. Kinti kīdisaṃ. Vatanti samādinnavataṃ. Suciṇṇassāti suṭṭhu ciṇṇassa puññassa. Iddhīti ānubhāvo. Jutīti vatthābharaṇobhāsasamujjalā sarīrappabhā. Balavīriyūpapattīti kāyabalena ceva ussāhena ca samannāgamo.
因为过去向那些前来求助的人伸出手,为阿奢耶长者指示布施之处,凭这份福德,如今我的手就像如意树一样,能满一切愿,想要什么就给什么;在满愿的同时,又像流蜜一样,施予令人喜爱的东西。凭我的梵行:就是凭如前所说的、以身体服务为本质的最胜行持。福德:指福德的果报。这果报因为具有值得尊敬的性质,所以称为福德;或者是因为省略了后面的词,就像“如是此福德增长”等说法中那样,所以称为福德。巴利
Tena pāṇi kāmadadoti tena addhikānaṃ upagacchantānaṃ hatthaṃ pasāretvā asayhaseṭṭhino dānaṭṭhānadassanamayena puññena idāni mayhaṃ hattho kapparukkho viya kāmadado icchiticchitadāyī, kāmadado honto ca madhussavo iṭṭhavatthuvissajjanako jāto. Tena me brahmacariyenāti tena mama yathāvuttakāyaveyyāvaṭiyakammasaṅkhātena seṭṭhacariyena. Puññanti puññaphalaṃ. Tampi hi pujjasabhāvato, uttarapadalopena vā ‘‘evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.80) ‘‘puñña’’nti vuccati.
把五学处合在一起,就叫做“五学处”,如同说“三有”“三车”一样。“于梵行中”一语,指的是在说法之时。因为此法能给应当受调伏的人带来清净殊胜的境地,所以是最上的行持;又因为是梵天神或世尊的语行,所以称为“梵行”。巴利
Pañca sikkhāpadāni samāhaṭāni pañcasikkhāpadaṃ yathā ‘‘tibhavaṃ, tisakaṭa’’nti ca. Brahmacariyasminti dhammadesanāya. Sā hi vineyyānaṃ brahmabhāvāvahanato brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ cariyaṃ, brahmuno vā bhagavato vācasikaṃ cariyanti ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuccati.
有一千人成为舍弃死亡的人,也就是大约一千人通过证得阿拉汉果、超越死亡的领域而舍弃了死亡。关于“我们将成为梵行者”:在这里,他们因为哪种梵行而被称为梵行者呢?在明确了那种梵行之后,说道:“离淫欲被称为梵行。”巴利
Sahassaṃ maccuhāyinanti sahassamattā arahattasamadhigamena maccuvisayātikkamena maccupahāyino jātā. Brahmacārī bhavissāmāti ettha yena brahmacariyena te brahmacārinoti vuccanti, taṃ brahmacariyaṃ niddhāretvā āha ‘‘methunavirati brahmacariyanti vuttā’’ti.
不超越:就是不越过,即使是在不该去的地方,在其他方面也不违犯。因此说:“除了那些之外,我们行梵行。”我等:就是我们的。巴利
Nātikkamāmāti na aticarāma agamanīyaṭṭhānepi itaratthāpi na vītikkamāma. Tenāha ‘‘aññatra tāhi brahmacariyaṃ carāmā’’ti. Amhanti amhākaṃ.
以调伏自己之力:意思是,按照自己所承诺的那样,以模仿阿拉汉的方式,以所转起之心的调伏,也就是调伏包括意根在内的六根。由于已经达到最殊胜修行的顶点,圣道就是梵行。梵行,就是以此而行于最上、最殊胜者,也就是导师的教法。巴利
Attadamanavasenāti yathāpaṭiññaṃ arahantānaṃ anukaraṇākārena pavattacittadamanavasena, manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ damanenāti attho. Sikhāppattaseṭṭhacariyatāya ariyamaggo brahmacariyaṃ. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ carati etenāti brahmacariyaṃ, satthusāsanaṃ.
不慌不忙:就是不急急忙忙,会看清时机和场合。果报的期望得以实现:即使是极难得到的果报,只要配合正确的精进,期望也一定会实现。我已修完梵行:意思是特别达到了殊胜的志向,圆满实现了崇高的心愿。他正是因为具备最殊胜的意行,才用梵行这个同义词来称呼。巴利
Ataramānānanti na taramānānaṃ desakālaṃ udikkhantānaṃ. Phalāsāva samijjhatīti sudullabhaphalepi āsā sammāpayogamanvāya samijjhati eva. Vipakkabrahmacariyosmīti visesena nipphannapaṇītajjhāsayo paripuṇṇauḷāramanoratho. So hi seṭṭhamanosamācāratāya brahmacariyapariyāyena vutto.
这里说的“就是这部经出现的地方”,意思是:在三藏佛语当中,就是“精进即梵行”这句经文出现的地方。之所以在这里把精进称为梵行,是因为在那个范围内,精进是最殊胜、最极致的,同时也是成就那种修行的原因。“四支具足”则是说,依靠成就四种难行之事者的四种自身行为方式,而称为四支具足。巴利
Idameva suttaṃ āgataṭṭhānanti adhippāyo tepiṭake buddhavacane idameva suttapadaṃ ‘‘vīriyaṃ brahmacariya’’nti āgataṭṭhānanti attho. Vīriyañhi tasmiṃ visaye uttamaṃ paramukkaṃsagataṃ tādisacariyāhetu cāti brahmacariyanti idha vuttaṃ. Caturaṅgasamannāgatanti catubbidhadukkarakiriyāya sādhakassa catubbidhassa attano pavattiākārassa vasena caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ.
也许有人会想:穿着破碎布片,又没有完整缝制的衣服,那不就该被称为裸形者吗?为了排除这种说法,他说了“裸形者”。他的意思是:我这样去做,就不会对众生造成逼迫。就像在乞食这件事上,为了显示最严格的头陀行,而说“我不接受被恭敬地端来的食物”等等,这里也应当同样理解:不因为听到“来吧,尊者”之类恭敬的话就接受。所谓“成为男人交会之处的”,就是指女人靠近男人时所给的食物。“编集”是指众人依此聚集而做的事,也就是村民等集体所为。这里特指为施食而作的集体准备,所以说“于集众而作之饭食中”。“布施物”是指他们凭此而行布施。间隔一日,也就是隔天供食,称为“间日食”。其余词句也依此理解。“以一日一次的规则”,就是依照隔日进食的规定。为了进一步说明这正是依照前面所说的方式次第而行,所以再次提到“间日食”等。因此才说了“如是等类”这些话。巴利
Koci chinnabhinnapaṭapilotikadharo dasantayuttassa vatthassa abhāvato nicceloti vattabbataṃ labheyyāti taṃ nivattento āha ‘‘naggo’’ti. Evaṃ akāsiṃ, evampi sattapīḷā mā ahosīti adhippāyo. Yathā ‘‘abhihaṭaṃ na sādiyāmī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.155) bhikkhāpariyesane ukkaṭṭhacāritādassanaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘naehi bhaddantikādibhāvopī’’ti gahetabbaṃ. Purisantaragatāyāti purisasamīpagatāya. Saṃkittīyanti etāyāti saṃkitti, gāmavāsiādīhi samudāyavasena kariyamānakiriyā. Idha pana bhattasaṃkitti adhippetāti āha ‘‘saṃkittetvā katabhattesū’’ti. Dadanti tāyāti datti. Ekāhaṃ antarabhūtaṃ etassa atthīti ekāhikaṃ. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Ekāhavārenāti ekāhikavārena. ‘‘Ekāhika’’ntiādinā vuttavidhimeva paṭipāṭiyā pavattabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ puna vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘iti evarūpa’’ntiādi.
用伊罗迦草等编成的,意思是说:把伊罗迦草等编起来做成下裙的,就是裹尸布,也就是下劣的布。张线织成的,是把纱线拉开织成的。天然刺,就是木签那样的刺。巴利
Erakatiṇādīni vāti erakatiṇādīni ganthitvā katanivāsanāni chavadussāni, nihīnadussānīti attho. Tantāvutānanti tantaṃ pasāretvā vītānaṃ. Pakatikaṇṭaketi salākakaṇṭake.
156 “多年积聚而生起的”:是指经过很多年累积而形成的。有人会问:前面才刚说“他致力于傍晚第三次入水沐浴的苦行”,接着又说“身上积存了多年的尘垢污秽”,这两件事在同一个人身上怎么可能同时成立?所以回答说:“这是针对他自己受持尘垢苦行戒的时期而说的。”正因如此,他宣称“我是裸形者”这种裸形身份的承诺,和“我穿麻衣”等有衣遮蔽的承诺,以及其中穿麻衣、非麻衣、裹尸布等劣质衣物的承诺,彼此并不矛盾,应当看作是因为他在各个不同时期如此这般地行持。那些就是裸形者。“结杀”:就是完全杀戮,因此说“杀戮”。所谓有戒者并不存在,因为他持有“即使无意图的恶也是恶”这样的见解。“受持戒”:这是针对退避而行(以免伤害生物)的行为而说的。巴利
156.Nekavassagaṇasañjātanti anekavassasamūhasañjātaṃ. Nanu ca idāneva ‘‘sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘nekavassagaṇikaṃ rajojallaṃ kāye sannicita’’nti ca, tadubhayaṃ ekasmiṃ kathaṃ sambhavatīti āha ‘‘idaṃ attano rajojallakavatasamādānakālaṃ sandhāya vadatī’’ti. Eteneva ‘‘acelako homī’’ti vuttaacelakapaṭiññā, ‘‘sāṇānipi dhāremī’’tiādinā vuttachannakapaṭiññā, tatthāpi sāṇa-masāṇa-chavadussādi-nivattha-paṭiññā ca aviruddhāti daṭṭhabbā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle tathā tathā paṭipannattā. Teti acelakā. Saṅghātanti sabbaso ghātaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vadha’’nti. Sīlavā nāma natthi ‘‘anabhisandhikampi pāpaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ laddhikattā. Sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhāyāti idaṃ paṭikkamanakiriyaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
为了把外道纳入自己的掌控,也就是为了考察外道里面哪些没有价值、哪些有价值。那出家,指的是邪命外道的出家。畸异食物,就是畸形的、不正常的食物。所以经文才说“非通常的食物”。巴利
Pāsaṇḍapariggahaṇatthāyāti pāsaṇḍesu asārasārabhāvavīmaṃsanatthāya. Taṃ pabbajjanti ājīvakapabbajjaṃ. Vikaṭabhojaneti vikatabhojane virūpabhojane. Tenāha ‘‘apakatibhojane’’ti.
157 对于“在恐怖的所作中”这一说法,此词属表状态/行为的构词,有人解释说:“在恐怖的所作中,也就是在恐怖的行为中。”本来应该说成“在恐怖性中”,这里应当看作省略了一个 ta 音。“大多数”这个说法也应该结合“多毛者”这类情况来理解,而不是就毛来说,所以才说“或者对大多数……”等等。巴利
157.Bhiṃsanakatasminti bhāvasādhanabhāvī idaṃ padanti āha ‘‘bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ bhiṃsanakakiriyāyā’’ti. ‘‘Bhiṃsanakattasmi’’nti vattabbe ekassa ta-kārassa lopo daṭṭhabbo. Yebhuyyaggahaṇaṃ lomavantavasenapi yojetabbaṃ, na lomavasenāti āha ‘‘bahutarānaṃ vā’’tiādi.
在“su”这个音里,把“u”音变成“o”音,所以巴利圣典中写作“sotatto”。为了说明这个意思,注释说“sutatto”。或者,“sotatto”也可以理解为“好好地已被彻底炙烤”。在“sosinno”这个词上,也是同样的道理。“为了清净住立”,意思是为了寻求轮回中的清净。巴利
Su-sadde u-kārassa o-kāraṃ katvā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sotatto’’ti vuttanti tadatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘sutatto’’ti āha. Suṭṭhu avatattoti vā sotatto. Sosinnoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Suddhivasanatthāyāti saṃsārasuddhigavesanatthāya.
关于“于精舍”:这是指在自身处的处格,所以说“精舍本身就以‘于精舍’来表达”。正因为如此:就是由于这种格的颠倒。这个意思:应当知道,这就是由于性的颠倒而有的意思。“遭苦者”:要连起来理解。“于一切处”:指在苦乐、得失等一切情况下。“如秤”:意思是像秤一样。巴利
Vihārasminti paccatte bhummavacananti āha ‘‘vihāro eva hi ‘vihārasmi’nti vutto’’ti. Teneva cāti teneva vibhattivipallāsavasena. Evaṃ atthoti ayaṃ evaṃ liṅgavipallāsavasena attho veditabbo. Dukkhappattoti ānetvā sambandho. Sabbatthāti sukhadukkhe lābhālābhādike ca. Tulitoti tulāsadiso.
关于食物清净的注释巴利
Āhārasuddhivaṇṇanā
158 为了得以清净:指从轮回中得以清净。巴利
158.Sujjhitunti saṃsārato sujjhituṃ.
159 159.“八十节骨”是指八十节脊骨,也有人叫它“黑节骨”。这是指骨节中间的部分。“凹凸不平”是指肌肉干瘪时,两个关节之间的血管网因风而肿胀,鼓起来,所以叫“隆起”。“臀部”是指臀部所在的位置。“坐处”是指用尘土或沙子堆成的坐处。“以箭柄”是指用箭的柄部,或者说是以箭柄为通道。“踏处”是指踩踏过的地方。“像酪浆团一样”是指像酪浆团那样的东西,或者是为了摩擦身体而做的粗石圆串,像串起来的食物一样。“从脊柱”是指从背脊。“圆环”是指放在墙脚顶上的圆环,用头顶住它。“肋骨不是这样”是指像前面说的椽子那样倾斜叠放,菩萨的肋骨并不是那样倾斜叠放安立的。巴利
159.Āsītikapabbānīti āsītikapiṭṭhipabbāni, ‘‘kāḷapabbānī’’ti vadanti. Pabbānaṃ majjhe. Unnatunnatānīti maṃse milāte dvinnaṃ sandhīnaṃ antare vātenuddhumātadhamanījālatāya unnatāni unnatānīti. Ānisadanti ānisadaṭṭhānaṃ. Nisinnaṭṭhānanti paṃsūhi, vālikāhi vā nicitaṃ nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ. Sarapoṅkhenāti sarassa poṅkhappadesena, sarapoṅkhasaññitena vā maggena. Akkantanti akkantaṭṭhānaṃ. Takkagoḷikasadisānaṃ, sarīraghaṃsanatthaṃ kata kuruvindagoḷakānaṃ vā āvaḷi vaṭṭanāhāro. Vaṃsatoti piṭṭhivaṃsato. Maṇḍaleti bhittipādānaṃ matthake ṭhapitamaṇḍalake sīsaggena patiṭṭhahanti. Na evaṃ phāsuḷiyoti yathā yathā vuttagopānasiyo papatā tiṭṭhanti, na evaṃ bodhisattassa phāsukāpi papatā ṭhitā.
“凹陷”是指向下塌陷,因为位置变低、往下陷而显现出来。“这样的形态”是指前面所说的那种样子,意思是更加凹陷。所谓“直到贴着脊梁骨”,是说我的腹皮一直贴到脊梁骨,因为它紧贴并停留在脊梁骨上;这是因为胃里的东西完全耗尽,肠子等也极度干缩了。“越来越沉重”就是更加沉重。应当这样理解:腹皮连着脊梁骨,脊梁骨也连着腹皮。“根本不排出”,是因为依靠食物的水界完全干枯了,所以完全不排泄。“腐烂的根”是指:滋养毛根的肌肉和血液都已耗尽,那些毛根干枯,从原来的位置脱落,因为已经不存在了,所以才说“腐烂的根”。因此说“而彼……”等。巴利
Okkhāyikāti avakkhāyikā, heṭṭhā hutvā ninnabhāvena paññāyamānā. Evarūpāti yathāvuttarūpā, ninnatarāti attho. Yāva piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃallīnāhotīti mayhaṃ udaracchavi yāva piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ, tāva taṃ āhacca ṭhitattā allīnā hoti udariyassa parikkhayena antānañca suṭṭhumilātatāya. Bhāriyabhāriyāti garutarā. Sahaudaracchaviṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ, sahapiṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ udaracchavinti yojanā. Neva nikkhamati āhārasannissayaāpodhātuyā sabbaso visukkhattā. Pūtimūlānīti lomamūlānaṃ paribrūhanake maṃse lohite ca parikkhīṇe tāni sukkhāni ṭhānato bhaṭṭhāni abhāveneva ‘‘pūtimūlānī’’ti vuttāni. Tenāha ‘‘tassa panā’’tiādi.
已证得是指现在已证得。通过“就像现在由观慧证得”这句话,说明虽然大菩萨们智慧已经成熟、已自在掌握禅那与神通,他们仍修观的前方便,但他们在最后一生中修观的方式,和那时并不一样。“即此”是指:那个被说到的义理,在这里、在这段文句当中正好适用,因为前后并不矛盾。“否则”是指:如果按照比丘们所说的那种方式,就可能不相应了,因为这里所说的“此”是另一回事。巴利
Adhigatāti idāni adhigatā. Yathā etarahi vipassanāpaññāya adhigatattāti iminā kiñcāpi mahābodhisattā paripākagatañāṇā vasībhūtajjhānābhiññā vipassanāya parikammaṃ karonti, yathā ca nesaṃ carimabhave vipassanācāro, na tathā tadāti dasseti. Etadevāti yaṃ yena vuttaṃ atthajātaṃ, etadeva ettha etasmiṃ pāṭhapadese yuttaṃ pubbenāparaṃ avirujjhanato. Itarathāti bhikkhūhi vuttappakārena ananurūpo siyā ‘‘imissā’’ti vuttāya aññatte.
关于轮回清净等的注释巴利
Saṃsārasuddhiādivaṇṇanā
160 “轮回”是指以一次次死亡再生的方式,在种种生命存在状态中不断流转。针对这一点,曾这样说:巴利
160.Saṃsārenāti aparāparaṃ cavanupapajjanavasena bhavesu saṃsaraṇena. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
“ 诸蕴、诸界与诸处的次第;
它不间断地持续着,这就叫作轮回。”巴利
‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.619; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.95; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.60; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.199; dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā; vibha. aṭṭha. 226; su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.523; udā. aṭṭha. 39; itivu. aṭṭha. 14, 58; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.67, 99; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 58; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 6; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.117; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.127; a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.9; sārattha. ṭī. 1.1);
“多”是指多种方式、长时间、很多次。“结生”是指在各处诸有中投生。“以居住”是指在各种有情的住处中居住,也就是投生后在那里生活。这里说的其实就是“蕴”,因为是用各种不同的说法来描述这些蕴本身生起方式的差别。“多祭祀”是指杀羊、杀猪、杀牛、杀豺狼等种种不同的大祭祀。“多火”是指通过语祭等,甚至包括熟食祭等,以侍奉许多火。巴利
Bahukanti bahukālaṃ bahukkhattuṃ. Upapajjitvāti tattha tattha bhave nibbattitvā. Āvāsenāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sattāvāse āvasanena nibbattitvā jīvanena. Khandhāyeva vuttā tesaṃyeva pavattivisesassa tena tena pariyāyena vuttattā. Bahuyāgeti ajasūkaragomāyvādike bahuvidhe mahāyaññe. Bahuaggīti vācāpeyyādivasena antamaso pākayaññādivasena ca bahukepi aggī paricaraṇena.
161 161. 连幼儿也被叫做“年少”,所以为了区分,又说“青年”。超过第一年龄阶段的众生,自然就会头发花白,为了显示还处在第一年龄阶段,所以说“头发极黑”。Jarājiṇṇa 是指因衰老而衰败,不是被非时的衰老所压倒。因为智慧已达到极致,所以称为“长老”。因此说“已经成长,肢体安住”,意思是身高和体围方面已经不再增长。Jātimahallaka 是指因出生/年龄而年老,不是因为财富、眷属等而年老。Addhagata 这里的 addha 一词表示长时间,所以解释为“经历了许多长时”。这是省略了“龄”等词的说法,所以说“后龄”。能于百句乃至千句,当它进入耳门时,便能领会、把握。这是慧的作用,因为只是领受。所谓“彼”,即百句与千句。依持是以不散落的方式持于心。系缚是为了不致忘失,而一再地加以系缚。这则是念的作用,可以了知。经文中又说“以极度的慧、念与精进”,后面又说“如是增上慧行者”。堪能精进名为策励,为了显示殊胜的所缘,而说明它结合了前述的念。“彼”是指由于如前所述的慧、念、策励,对熟悉于清净界与语词之教法,依圣典而见义之能力,依理而见因之能力。巴利
161. Bāladārakopi ‘‘daharo’’ti vuccatīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘yuvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Atikkantapaṭhamavayā sattā sabhāvena palitasirā hontīti paṭhamavaye ṭhitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘susukāḷakeso’’ti vuttaṃ. Jarājiṇṇoti jarāya jiṇṇo, na akālikena jarāya abhibhūto. Ukkaṃsagatabuddhatāya vuddho. Tenāha ‘‘vaḍḍhitvā ṭhitaaṅgapaccaṅgo’’ti, ārohapariṇāhavasena vuddhirahitoti attho. Jātimahallakoti jātiyā mahallako, na bhogaparivārādīhīti attho. Addhagatoti ettha addha-saddo dīghakālavācīti āha ‘‘bahuaddhānaṃ gato’’ti. Vayotiādipadalopenāyaṃ niddesoti āha ‘‘pacchimavaya’’nti. Padasatampi…pe… samatthatāti padasatampi padasahassampi sotapathamāgacchantameva uggahaṇasamatthatā pariggahetuṃ samatthatā. Ayañca gatiyā byāpāroti sakkā viññātuṃ gahaṇamattabhāvato. Tadevāti padasatampi padasahassampi. Ādhāraṇaṃ apilāpanavasena hadaye dhāraṇaṃ. Upanibandhanaṃ yathā na pamuṭṭhaṃ hoti, tathā upecca aparāparaṃ nibandhanaṃ. Ayaṃ pana satiyā byāpāroti sakkā viññātuṃ. Pāḷiyañca ‘‘paramāya gatiyā ca satiyā ca dhitiyā cā’’ti vuttaṃ, parato ca ‘‘evaṃ adhimattagatimanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Samatthavīriyaṃ dhiti nāmāti visiṭṭhavisayaṃ dassento yathāvuttasatisamāyogaṃ tassa dīpeti. Tassāti yathāvuttagatisatidhitīhi subhadhātavacīparicitassa pariyattidhammassa āgamavasena atthadassanasamatthatā yuttivasena kāraṇadassanasamatthatā.
Daḷhadhanvā(持坚弓者)是指拥有坚固、结实的弓的人,在这里就被称为“daḷhadhammā”(坚法者)。为了击破敌人而拿弓的人就是“dhanuggaho”(持弓者),而正是他,把箭投射出去,所以叫“issāso”(射箭者);因此说“持弓站立的射箭者”。“两千力”是指能承载两千巴拉重的铁等重物。因此说“名为两千力的弓”等等。“Daṇḍeti”是指弓身。所谓“箭许”,是指从长度上说,箭的量有多大,当与箭等长的弓身刚被举起时,弓弦也就被装上,而那个重物便从地面脱离;应当如此理解这“名为两千力的弓”。“Uggahitasippoti”是指已受持弓术。“Katahatthoti”是指于诸目标极为坚定而不失误的射艺。然而,这样的人在那里成为自在者,就名为“katahattho”(熟练手),所以说“ciṇṇavasībhāvo”(已修习自在状态)。“Kataṃ rājakulādīsu upecca asanaṃ etena so katūpāsano”是说“rājakulādīsu dassitasippo”(在王族等处显示技艺者)。“Evaṃ katanti”是指如此以内腔中空等方式,做成轻便的。巴利
Daḷhaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 3.9.38) thiraṃ dhanu etassāti daḷhadhanvā, so eva idha ‘‘daḷhadhammā’’ti vutto. Paṭisattuvidhamanatthaṃ dhanuṃ gaṇhātīti dhanuggaho, so eva usuṃ saraṃ asati khipatīti issāsoti āha ‘‘dhanuṃ gahetvā ṭhito issāso’’ti. Dvisahassapalaṃ lohādibhāraṃ vahituṃ samatthaṃ dvisahassathāmaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dvisahassathāmaṃ nāmā’’tiādi. Daṇḍeti dhanudaṇḍe. Yāva kaṇḍappamāṇāti dīghato yattakaṃ kaṇḍassa pamāṇaṃ, tattake dhanudaṇḍe ukkhittamatte āropito ceva hoti jiyādaṇḍo, so ca bhāro pathavito muccati, evaṃ idaṃ ‘‘dvisahassathāmaṃ nāma dhanūti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Uggahitasippoti uggahitadhanusippo. Katahatthoti thirataraṃ lakkhesu avirajjhanasarakkhepo. Īdiso pana tattha vasībhūto katahattho nāma hotīti āha ‘‘ciṇṇavasībhāvo’’ti. Kataṃ rājakulādīsu upecca asanaṃ etena so katūpāsanoti āha ‘‘rājakulādīsu dassitasippo’’ti. Evaṃ katanti evaṃ antosusirakaraṇādinā sallahukaṃ kataṃ.
“注视”就是看。即使这样,这些比丘谁先问、谁第二个问,这种提问的次序还是能看得出来:因为对这样有智慧的人来说,那微细的间隔是可以把握的。可是诸佛说法的次序,在这种地方,别人看不出来,只有诸佛自己才看得出来。现在为了从道理上说明这种“只有佛能看出”的情形,就说了“一拃四指影”等话。在一弹指那么短的时间里,就有百千万亿个心识生起,所以说“在影子超过一拃四指之前,世尊……就已经说了”,接着为了说明世尊说法比这还要快,又说了“暂且不说这些”等话。现在为了说明其中的道理,就说了“为什么”等话。说十六句,这是为了显示:在世间人说出一个词的刹那,世尊已经说了二千八百句。现在为了说明这其中的道理,又说了“为什么”等话。巴利
Oloketīti udikkhati. Evaṃ santepi tesaṃ vāro paññāyatīti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ paṭhamaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ dutiya’’ntiādinā pucchanavāro tādisassa paññavato paññāyati sukhumassa antarassa labbhanato. Buddhānaṃ pana vāroti īdise ṭhāne buddhānaṃ desanāvāro aññesaṃ napaññāyanato buddhānaṃyeva paññāyati. Idāni tameva paññāyanataṃ yuttito dassento ‘‘vidatthicaturaṅgulachāya’’ntiādimāha. Accharāsaṅghāṭamatte khaṇe aneka-koṭisahassa-cittapavattisambhavato ‘‘vidatthicaturaṅgulachāyaṃ atikkamanato puretaraṃyeva bhagavā…pe… kathetī’’ti vatvā tato lahutarāpi satthu desanāpavatti atthevāti dassento ‘‘tiṭṭhantu vā tāva ete’’tiādimāha. Idāni tattha kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Soḷasa padāni kathetīti etena lokiyajanassa ekapaduccāraṇakkhaṇe bhagavā aṭṭhavīsasatapadāni kathetīti dasseti. Idāni tassapi kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“法”是指巴利圣典。“句”是借由它来通达意义,也就是句所表达的含义。“文”是能表达意义的字母。因为当它被按词、句、字母来划分时,就能表达和显示各种不同的意义。因此说,“法句文”就是巴利圣典中的句和文,是能表达各种意义的字母。借此说明:如来用一句又一句、一文又一文的句文说法,即使经过极长的时间,那些句文也永远不会有穷尽。借由它来回答问题,就是“问答”,即如此生起的辩才。诸佛世尊的辩才确实无穷无尽,所以说“说法没有退减”。因此说“这显示了什么”等等。同样,即使世尊临近般涅槃,他的说法和其他时候的说法也没有差别。所以,初佛语、中佛语、后佛语都是相同的。八十岁之后,是第五个寿量阶段。巴利
Dhammoti pāḷi. Pajjati attho etenāti padaṃ, tadattho. Atthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, akkharaṃ. Tañhi padavākyakkharabhāvehi paricchijjamānaṃ taṃ taṃ atthaṃ byañjeti pakāseti. Tenāha ‘‘dhammapadabyañjananti pāḷiyā padabyañjanaṃ, tassa tassa atthassa byañjanakaṃ akkhara’’nti. Etena aparāparehi padabyañjanehi sucirampi kālaṃ kathentassa tathāgatassa na kadāci tesaṃ pariyādānaṃ atthīti dasseti. Pañhaṃ byākaronti etenāti pañhabyākaraṇaṃ, tathāpavattapaṭibhānaṃ. Aparikkhayapaṭibhānā hi buddhā bhagavanto, yato vuttaṃ ‘‘natthi dhammadesanāya hānī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 3.141, 305; vibha. mūlaṭī. 1.suttantabhājanīyavaṇṇanā). Tenāha ‘‘iminā kiṃ dassetī’’tiādi. Tathā āsannaparinibbānassapi bhagavato desanāya itarāya ca visesātāvoti paṭhamabuddhavacanampi majjhimabuddhavacanampi pacchimabuddhavacanampi sadisameva. Āsītikavassato paraṃ pañcamo āyukoṭṭhāso.
162 在这里,虽然世尊通过宣说那嘎萨玛拉长老的稀有、未曾有之事,表明了自己身毛竖立的状态,所以得了“身毛竖立篇章”这个名字;但这部经是以显示一切知智等不共之智的威力等十六种方式,发出狮子吼而宣说的,因此应当理解为:结集经典的大长老们把它命名为“大狮子吼”。巴利
162. Kāmañcettha bhagavatā nāgasamālattherassa acchariyaabbhutapavedanamukhena attano lomānaṃ haṭṭhabhāvassa paveditattā ‘‘lomahaṃsanapariyāyo’’ti nāmaṃ gahitaṃ, tathāpi sabbaññutaññāṇādi-anaññasādhāraṇañāṇānubhāva-vibhāvanādivasena soḷasasamūhato sīhanādassa nadanena desanāya pavattitattā ‘‘mahāsīhanādo’’tveva saṅgītikāramahātherehi nāmaṃ ṭhapitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
3. 《大苦蕴经》的注释巴利
3. Mahādukkhakkhandhasuttavaṇṇanā
163 “从此以后”,是说在三种人之上,僧团因为四众所作等甘马而成为应受别住的人。“去了村庄”,是说以村庄为目的而前往,所以这样说;同样,为了进入舍卫城而从寺院出发的人,就说他们“进入了”。“遍知”,是指断遍知。只有这种才是超越,另一种不是。在色、受等方面也是这样。虽然说一切外道都没有能安立遍知欲等法的时机,但对于那些有这种说法的人,就依据他们而说“知道自宗”。“这位比丘远离诸欲……进入并安住于初禅,到此程度,就是欲的遍知”,他们即使不能这样具体说明初禅,只是在说初禅时,仅以“彻底断除”的想法来安立欲的遍知。这是什么原因呢?因为他们没有那样的教法与证得。在色遍知、受遍知方面也是这样。“可能会被说”,就是可能被说。第二句也是这样,是在“教诫或应教诫”这样的语句中。据说那些比丘……巴利
163.Tatoparanti tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ upari saṅgho catuvaggakaraṇīyādikammehi paṭikammappattattā. Gāmaṃ gatoti vuccati gāmaṃ uddissa gatattā, evaṃ sāvatthiṃ pavisituṃ vihārato nikkhantā ‘‘pavisiṃsū’’ti vuttā. Pariññanti pahānapariññaṃ. Sā hi samatikkamo, na itarā. Rūpavedanāsupīti ‘‘rūpānaṃ pariññaṃ, vedanānaṃ pariñña’’nti etthāpi. Kāmaṃ sabbesaṃ titthiyānaṃ kāmādipariññāpaññāpanahetubhūto samayo natthi, yesaṃ pana atthi, te upādāya ‘‘sakasamayaṃ jānantā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yato yato kho bho ayaṃ bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, ettāvatā kho bho kāmānaṃ pariññā hotī’’ti evaṃ sarūpato paṭhamajjhānaṃ vibhāvetuṃ asakkontāpi kevalaṃ accantappahānasaññāya kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapeyyuṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ vadamānā. Taṃ kissa hetu? Tādisassa āgamādhigamassābhāvato. Rūpavedanāpariññāsupi eseva nayo. Vuccethāti vucceyya. Dutiyapadepīti ‘‘anusāsaniyā vā anusāsani’’nti evaṃ vuttavākyepi. Te kira bhikkhū.
165 不能正确解说:意思是他们无法以正确的方式、完整地引导和使人了知。因此说“即使准备之后,也不能说法”。因为所问的问题不在他们的领域内,所以会陷入困境——这是句子的连接方式。“含天神的”:这里是指取无色界天,因为那些天在世间诸天神中,以长寿等最为殊胜。“含魔的”:是指取欲界天。“含梵天的”:是指取色界梵天。“含沙门与婆罗门的”:在这里,以“沙门”涵括出家者,以“婆罗门”涵括种姓上的婆罗门,再以“天”涵括假名之天,以“人”涵括其余的人界。至于以“世间世代”的取义,注释书中已经说明了其用意。别的称心是无从谈起的:这句话表明,对外道来说,如实地了知欲、色、受中的乐味、过患等根本不存在,更何况去宣说呢?巴利
165.Naceva sampāyissantīti na ceva sammadeva pakārehi gamessanti ñāpessanti. Tenāha ‘‘sampādetvā kathetuṃ na sakkhissantī’’ti. Yasmā avisaye pañho pucchito hoti, tasmā āpajjissantīti yojanā. Sadevaketi arūpadevaggahaṇaṃ. Te hi lokiyadevehi dīghāyukatādinā ukkaṭṭhā. Samāraketi kāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ. Sabrahmaketi rūpāvacarabrahmaggahaṇaṃ. Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyāti ettha samaṇaggahaṇena pabbajite, brāhmaṇaggahaṇena jātibrāhmaṇe, puna devaggahaṇena sammutideve, manussaggahaṇena avasiṭṭhamanussakāyaṃ pariyādiyati. Lokapajāggahaṇena pana payojanaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dassitameva. Aññathā ārādhanaṃ nāma natthīti iminā kāmarūpavedanāsu assādādīnaṃ yāthāvato avabodho eva ito bāhirakānaṃ natthi, kuto pavedanāti dasseti.
166 “令心欢喜”是指通过如实宣说,使他人的心感到满足。“功德”一词有“束缚”的含义:因为它是欲贪结的缘,所以即使对事物层面的欲乐,也说有“束缚”的含义;或者应把“功德”理解为“部分”的意思。“匆忙奔走”是指急急忙忙地行走。过去等各个阶段中的初分等年龄段,本身就是心被系缚的状态,以积聚的样态被执取为“年龄的功德”,因此他说“积聚的含义就是功德的含义”。“眼所识”是指通过眼识等根门之识而被了知。“耳所识”等的解释也是同样的道理。“成为可爱所缘”是指本质上就属于可爱所缘这一类,或者已经达到了可爱所缘的状态。“可意欲的”是指应当被欲求的。“令心增长的”是指愉悦迷人的。以此也含括了臆想中可爱的一面。“生起怜爱性”是指具有应被怜爱的性质。“与欲贪相关”是指以欲贪为前提而与之相连、相系,应当如此理解,因此他说“作为所缘”。巴利
166.Cittārādhananti yāthāvapavedanena paresaṃ cittassa paritosanaṃ. Bandhanaṭṭhena guṇāti kāmarāgasaṃyojanassa paccayabhāvena vatthukāmesupi bandhanaṭṭho vutto, koṭṭhāsaṭṭho vā guṇaṭṭho daṭṭhabbo. Tarayantīti taramānā yanti gacchanti. Atītādibhinnapaṭhamādivayā eva cittatā rāsibhāvena vayoguṇāti gahitāti āha ‘‘rāsaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho’’ti. Cakkhuviññeyyāti vā cakkhuviññāṇataṃdvārikaviññāṇehi vijānitabbā. Sotaviññeyyātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtāti sabhāveneva iṭṭhārammaṇajātikā, iṭṭhārammaṇabhāvaṃ vā pattā. Kamanīyāti kāmetabbā. Manavaḍḍhanakāti manoharā. Etena parikappanatopi iṭṭhabhāvaṃ gaṇhāti. Piyajātikāti piyāyitabbasabhāvā. Kāmūpasaṃhitāti kāmarāgena upecca sandhāniyā sambaddhā (a. ni. ṭī. 3.6.63) kātabbāti āha ‘‘ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’ti.
167 安立“想”之后,就是指先在心里作这样的标记:“在这个指节等部位取到一百,在这个部位取到一千”,然后才开始计算。所谓“不间断地数”,就是按“一、二”这样一直数到九,中间不中断地数。所谓“整体地数”,就是通过累计、汇总等方式合起来数。因此他说“看过田地之后”等等。耕作叫“农”,这里用“农”这个词,是把所有和农业相关的谋生方式都包括进去了,所以他说“农就是农作之事”。“徒步经商”,是指靠步行商队做买卖;“陆路经商”,是指靠车队做买卖。用“等”字,还包括了靠船只贩卖等做买卖的方式。“商道”,就是商人的路,意思是靠买卖交易来维持往来,这就是它的含义。射箭的技艺叫“箭术”,靠弓箭手艺谋生;这里“箭术”只是举一个例子,实际上是指一切靠武器谋生的方式,所以他说“拿着武器做侍奉之事”。国师、大臣的事务等,属于王家的事。用“等”字,还包括了战车技艺、刹帝利学问技艺等前面没有提到的各种大技艺和小技艺。“被寒冷置于前方”,就是被寒冷放在前面。因为有人在寒冷时节为了谋生而进入寒冷的地方,就像被猛兽等侵害一样,被寒冷逼迫着,寒冷就像被放在他前面一样。因此他说“被寒冷所苦”。“被炎热置于前方”,这里也是同样的道理。“爬行”,就是匍匐前进。“被侵害”,就是被伤害、被逼迫。“逼迫”就是苦恼,意思是压迫。“以欲为因”,也可以作中性抽象名词来解释,就像“日月运行不正”那样的说法。其余两个词也是这样。因此他说“就是以诸欲为因”。这里“以诸欲为因”这句话,如果把前一个词限定为唯一,就不合理,因为那样会排除其他助缘;同样,如果把后一个词限定为唯一,也会有问题,因为诸欲有时也可能没有原因。所以他才说“必定生起”。巴利
167.Saññaṃ ṭhapetvāti ‘‘imasmiṃ aṅgulikādipabbe gahite sataṃ hoti, imasmiṃ sahassa’’ntiādinā saññāṇaṃ katvā gaṇanā. Acchiddagaṇanāti ‘‘ekaṃ dve’’tiādinā navantavidhinā nirantaragaṇanā. Piṇḍagaṇanāti saṅkalanapaṭuppādanādinā piṇḍitvā gaṇanā. Tenāha ‘‘khettaṃ oloketvā’’tiādi. Kasanaṃ kasīti kasiggahaṇena sabbo kasipaṭibaddho jīvikūpāyo gahitoti āha ‘‘kasīti kasikamma’’nti. Jaṅghavaṇijjāti jaṅghasatthavasena vaṇijjaṃ āha, thalavaṇijjāti sakaṭasatthavasena. Ādi-saddena nāvāpaṇādivasena vohāraṃ. Vaṇippathoti vaṇijamaggo, dānaggahaṇavasena saṃvohāroti attho. Usūnaṃ asanakammaṃ issattaṃ, dhanusippena jīvikā, idha pana issattaṃ viyāti issattaṃ, sabbaāvudhajīvikāti āha ‘‘āvudhaṃ gahetvā upaṭṭhānakamma’’nti. Porohiccāmaccakammādi rājakammaṃ.Ādi-saddena rathasippakhattavijjāsippādi-vuttāvasesaṃ mahāsippaṃ khuddakasippañca saṅgaṇhāti. Sītassa purakkhatoti sītassa purato kato. Yo hi sītakāle jīvikāhetu sītalapadesaṃ pakkhandati, so vāḷamigādīhi viya sītena paripātiyamāno tena purato kato viya hoti. Tenāha ‘‘sītena bādhiyamāno’’ti. Uṇhassa purakkhatoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Saritvāti saṃsappitvā. Ghaṭṭiyamānoti hiṃsiyamāno bādhiyamāno. Ābādhanaṃ ābādho, pīḷāti attho. Kāmahetunti vā bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso yathā ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’ti (a. ni. 4.70). Tathā sesapadadvayepi. Tenevāha ‘‘kāmānameva hetū’’ti. Kāmānaṃ hetūti ettha purimapadāvadhāraṇamayuttaṃ tadaññapaccayapaṭikkhepāpattito, tathā uttarapadāvadhāraṇaṃ kāmānaṃ kadāci ahetubhāvassapi sambhavato, tasmā ‘‘uppajjatiyevā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“他已奋起”,这里说的是奋起精进,所以接着说“以发起活命的精进”。那“精进”就是发起活命的精进。“对前后之间精勤努力的人”,是指从开始起就一直让精进不间断地持续生起的人。“因心中生起的强猛忧而忧愁”,是指因心的灼烧而在内心里忧戚。“因身上生起的痛苦”,是指由那忧的力量而在身上生起的痛苦。或者,依忧愁的表现而种种悲叹,就是“悲叹”。“捶击胸膛”,就是击打胸口部位。“空无……”等语,是显示悲叹时的样子,也是显示陷入迷乱时的样子。先说了“我的”,接着又说“我们”,用种种说法表明自身可以被两方面称说,或者是因忧愁而说出的迷乱之语。巴利
Uṭṭhahatoti iminā uṭṭhānavīriyaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘ājīvasamuṭṭhāpakavīriyenā’’ti. Taṃ vīriyanti ājīvikasamuṭṭhāpakavīriyaṃ. Pubbenāparaṃ ghaṭentassāti ārambhato paṭṭhāya nirantaraṃ pavattentassa. Citte uppannabalavasokena socatīti cittasantāpena anto nijjhāyati. Kāye uppannadukkhenāti tasseva sokassa vasena kāye uppannadukkhena. Sokuddesena taṃ taṃ vippalapento vā paridevati. Uraṃ tāḷetvāti vakkhappadesaṃ paharitvā. ‘‘Mogha’’ntiādi paridevanākāradassanañceva sammohāpajjanākāradassanañca. Meti vatvā puna noti puthuvacanaṃ attano ubhayathāpi voharitabbato, byāmūḷhavacanaṃ vā sokavasena.
168 在这里,通过“欲”这个词,特别是指对象性的欲乐被包含进来了,所以作了“欲”等这样的表述;不过,由于它们紧接着出现,烦恼欲也同样被包含在内。关于“刀与皮盾”这一句,这里通过“皮盾”一词,并不只是指皮制的,或者只是指用皮缝制的,而是指一切能阻挡武器的器具,为了说明这一点,所以他说“皮盾、木板盾等”。通过“等”这个字,包括了箭等物品。“把弓和箭袋都准备好”,就是把弓和装箭的箭袋都准备好;把弓弦装到弓身上,使其成为那样的状态等等,这就是“把弓准备好”。或者,通过安排两支军队的阵形,形成双方对阵的阵势。“在那些闪耀挥动着的当中”,是指那些因锋利而泛黄发亮、因而闪耀挥动的刀剑之中。巴利
168. Idha kāmaggahaṇena visesato vatthukāmā gahitāti kāmādiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, nānantariyatāya pana kilesakāmopi gahito eva. Asicammanti ettha cammaggahaṇena na kevalaṃ cammamayassa, cammaparisibbitasseva vā gahaṇaṃ, atha kho sabbassapi āvudhabādhakassa gahaṇanti dassento ‘‘kheṭakaphalakādīnī’’ti āha. Ādi-saddena sarādisaṅgaho. Dhanukalāpaṃ sannayhitvāti dhanuñceva khurappatūṇiñca sannayhitvā, dhanudaṇḍassa jiyāya tathābhāvakaraṇādipi (a. ni. ṭī. 3.5.76) dhanuno sannayhananti. Dvinnaṃ senānaṃ byūhasaṃvidhānena vā ubhatobyūḷhaṃ. Vijjotalantesūti nisitapītaphalatāya vijjotanavasena parivattamānesu.
靠近城墙而设置的,就是城墙的附属工事,也就是所说的“uddāpā”(堡寨)。百齿刑具,是指有数百颗利齿的刑具,它的底部有数百颗锋利的齿。因为极其沉重,十人二十人也举不起来,只能借助机械把它举起、绑好再安置。因此他说“以八齿的形状”等。他们压服,就是使他们屈服卧倒。巴利
Pākārasamīpātisaṅkhāratāya pākārapādā upakāriyo, yā ‘‘uddāpā’’ti vuccanti. Satadantenāti anekasatadantakena, yassa tikhiṇadantāni anekasatāni mūlāni honti. Atibhāratāya dasavīsamattāpi janā ukkhipituṃ na sakkonti, yantavasena pana ukkhipitvā bandhitvā ṭhapenti. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭhadantākārenā’’tiādi. Omaddantīti oṭṭhapenti.
169 以偷盗为生的人也会撬开门闩行窃。所谓“无余掠夺”,就是包围一座小村庄,把里面一切能拿的东西丝毫不剩地抢走,并俘虏村民。因此说“大掠夺”。“拦路抢劫的勾当”,就是站在荒野道路上,抢劫过往行人。“为了便于打击”,就是为了让棍棒打起来容易得手。由酸粥产生出来的酸粥水,就是酸粥汁,也叫酸浆。把它倒进去的那个东西,就是酸粥汁槽。做成类似酸浆罐那样的刑罚,就是酸浆罐刑。揭起头盖骨之后,就是弄出一个能让铁球进去的洞。螺形剃头刑,就是像海螺一样剃光头的刑罚。巴利
169.Sandhimpi chindanti corikāya jīvitukāmā. Nillopanti nissesavilopaṃ, ekaṃ parittaṃ gāmaṃ parivāretvā tattha kiñcipi gayhūpagaṃ asesetvā karamaraggahaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘mahāvilopa’’nti. Panthaduhanakammaṃ aṭavimagge ṭhatvā addhikānaṃ vilumpanaṃ. Pahārasādhanatthaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.1) daṇḍappahārassa sukhasiddhiatthaṃ. Kañjito nibbattaṃ kañjiyaṃ, āranālaṃ. Yaṃ ‘‘bilaṅga’’ntipi vuccati, taṃ yattha siñcati, sā kañjiyaukkhalikā. Bilaṅgathālikasadisakaraṇaṃ bilaṅgathāliyaṃ. Sīsakapālaṃ uppāṭetvāti ayoguḷapavesanappamāṇaṃ chiddaṃ katvā. Saṅkhamuṇḍakammakāraṇanti saṅkhaṃ viya muṇḍakammakāraṇaṃ.
罗睺面刑罚:就是像太阳进入罗睺口中那样的刑罚。火鬘刑罚:就是带有火鬘的刑罚。手灯刑罚:就是以手为灯的刑罚。撕裂草席刑罚:就是像撕裂草席那样,把绑在身上的东西扯开的刑罚。穿着树皮衣刑罚:就是让人穿上从身上扯下来的树皮条的刑罚。施行这种刑罚时,从脖子开始割断绑缚之物,只让它留在腰间;同样,从脚踝开始割断,也只让它留在腰间。不过注释书里说:“从腰开始割断,让它留在脚踝上。”羚羊刑罚:就是像羚羊那样的刑罚。套上铁环:就是戴上铁环。打入铁桩:就是在肘、膝的尖端钉入铁桩。即如此被施刑的众生。巴利
Rāhumukhakammakāraṇanti rāhumukhagata-sūriyasadisa-kammakāraṇaṃ. Jotimālikanti jotimālavantaṃ kammakāraṇaṃ. Hatthapajjotikanti hatthapajjotanakammakāraṇaṃ. Erakavattakammakāraṇanti erakavattasadise sarīrato baddhe uppāṭanakammakāraṇaṃ. Cīrakavāsikakammakāraṇanti sarīrato uppāṭitabaddhacīrakāhi nivāsāpanakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā yathā gīvato paṭṭhāya baddhe kantitvā kaṭiyameva ṭhapenti, evaṃ gopphakato paṭṭhāya kantitvā kaṭiyameva ṭhapenti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kaṭito paṭṭhāya kantitvā gopphakesu ṭhapentī’’ti vuttaṃ. Eṇeyyakakammakāraṇanti eṇīmigasadisakammakāraṇaṃ . Ayavalayāni datvāti ayavalayāni paṭimuñcitvā. Ayasūlāni koṭṭentīti kapparajaṇṇukakoṭīsu ayasūlāni pavesenti. Nti taṃ tathākatakammakāraṇaṃ sattaṃ.
用钩子撕扯人肉的刑罚,叫钩肉刑。把人切成钱币大小的刑罚,叫钱币刑。敲打就是切割。剥了皮再浇碱水的刑罚,叫碱水浇皮刑。像翻动门闩那样翻转人的刑罚,叫门闩翻转刑。他们用铁桩钉进去,把身体固定成一块。像草坐垫那样把身体卷缠起来的刑罚,叫草坐垫刑。行刑人就是执行杀害的人。就像做草坐垫时先做成草束再卷缠起来那样,他们也是这样卷缠的,这就是那句话的意思。所谓“饥饿者”,指的就是那些饿得发慌的、家里养的狗。那些狗强壮、善跑又凶猛。因为业而流转到那里,那里就是后世,也就是他世。转生到那里,就是属于后世的。巴利
Baḷisamaṃsikanti baḷisehi maṃsuppāṭanakammakāraṇaṃ. Kahāpaṇikanti kahāpaṇamattaso chindanakammakāraṇaṃ. Koṭṭentīti chindanti. Khārāpatacchikanti tacchetvā khārāvasiñcanakammakāraṇaṃ. Palighaparivattikanti palighassa viya parivattanakammakāraṇaṃ. Ekābaddhaṃ karonti ayasūlassa koṭṭanena. Palālapīṭhakanti palālapīṭhassa viya sarīrassa saṃvellanakammakāraṇaṃ. Kāraṇikāti ghātanakārakā. Palālavaṭṭiṃ viya katvāti yathā palālapīṭhaṃ karontā palālavaṭṭiṃ katvā saṃvellanavasena naṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.1) veṭhenti, evaṃ karontīti attho. Chātakehīti bubhukkhitehi koleyyakasunakhehi. Balavanto hi te javayoggā sūrā ca honti. Kammavasena sampareti etthāti samparāyo, paraloko. Tattha bhavoti samparāyiko.
170 170. 欲贪在这里被调伏、被舍断,所以涅槃就是欲贪的调伏,也是欲贪的舍断。因此他说“那正是涅槃”。其中“依于此”,是就调伏、舍断欲贪之人的所缘来说的。“以三种遍知”:用这个来说明,以知遍知和度遍知来遍知——这是不可能的,断遍知就更不用说了。“为了成为那样”:就是为了达到遍知的状态。巴利
170. Chandarāgo vinīyati ceva pahīyati ca etthāti nibbānaṃ chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānañcāti. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānañhī’’ti. Tattha āgammāti idaṃ yo chandarāgaṃ vineti pajahati, tassa ārammaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tīhi pariññāhīti iminā ñātatīraṇapariññāhi parijānissantīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Ko pana vādo pahānapariññāyāti dasseti? Tathabhāvāyāti parijānanakabhāvāya.
171 “不狭小”:就是不低劣。“广大”:就是巨大。如果是为了显示容色的圆满,那为什么不取色十法呢?回答说:“因为对女人来说……”等等。为了说明即使得不到食物等受用的情况,也说“即使生在贫穷家庭的人”。色处一点一点变得清净;由于肉的增盛,乳房的肉也随之增长、生出。“Vaṇṇeti”:它像是把“已进入内心”这一状态显现出来,所以叫色。这色本身因为和谐、受用等而显现,所以叫“nibhā”。因此说:“vaṇṇanibhā就是色本身。”巴利
171.Aparittenāti ahīnena. Vipulenāti mahatā. Yadi vaṇṇasampattidassanatthaṃ, vaṇṇadasakaṃ kasmā na gahitanti āha ‘‘mātugāmassa hī’’tiādi. Bhojanasampadādīnaṃ alābhepīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘duggatakule nibbattassapī’’ti vuttaṃ. Thokaṃ thokaṃ vaṇṇāyatanaṃ pasīdati maṃsassa paribrūhanato thanamaṃsāni vaḍḍhanti jāyanti. Vaṇṇeti hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsento viya hotīti vaṇṇo. So eva sāmaggopabhogādinā nibhātīti nibhā. Tenāha ‘‘vaṇṇanibhāti vaṇṇoyevā’’ti.
“弯曲的”是指因为极度弯曲,所以叫弯曲。那样的身体就像被折断了一样,所以说“折断”。因此说“这也只是说明了他的弯曲”。牙齿断碎、部分脱落,就是牙齿残缺。头发变成白色,所以说“白发”,因此说“白头发”。头发少量脱落叫“秃”,这里是指大量脱落,所以说“大秃头”。到了百岁时出现的斑点,就是指“被斑点毁坏的身体”。那些斑点有些白、有些黑,所以说“白黑斑点”。“有病的”是指有变化的病。“重病”是指接近死亡,因为临终的病而病重。巴利
Bhogganti ativiya vaṅkatāya bhoggaṃ. Tādisaṃ pana sarīraṃ bhaggaṃ viya hotīti āha ‘‘bhagga’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘imināpissa vaṅkabhāvameva dīpetī’’ti. Dantānaṃ chinnabhinnatāya ekaccānaṃ patanena ca khaṇḍitadantaṃ. Kesānaṃ setavaṇṇatāya palitanti āha ‘‘paṇḍarakesa’’nti. Kesānaṃ mattaso siyane khallāṭavohāroti bahuso siyanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘mahākhallāṭasīsa’’nti. Vassasatikakāle uppajjanatilakāni sandhāyāha ‘‘tilakāhatagatta’’nti. Tāni pana kānici setāni honti kānici kāḷānīti āha ‘‘setakāḷatilakehī’’ti. Byādhikanti sañcātabyādhiṃ. Bāḷhagilānanti māraṇanti kagelaññena gilānaṃ.
173 173. “那时”是指在进入并安住于禅那的时候。“不意图”就是不导向。以伤害为义,所以叫伤害;伤害本身就是所害,这里没有这种所害,就是无害,也就是没有苦。因此说“无苦的”。巴利
173.Tasmiṃ samayeti tasmiṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇasamaye. Na cetetīti na abhisandahati. Byābādhanaṭṭhena byābādho, byābādhova byābajjhaṃ, natthi ettha byābajjhanti abyābajjhaṃ, dukkharahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘niddukkhamevā’’ti.
174 无常等行相,就是指无常行相、苦行相、变易行相和动摇等行相。巴利
174.Aniccādiākāroti aniccākāro dukkhākāro vipariṇāmākāro calādiākāro ca.
《小苦蕴经》注释巴利
4. Cūḷadukkhakkhandhasuttavaṇṇanā
175 这里要说的内容,应当依照《念处经》义注里已经讲过的方式来理解。为了说明其中的一部分,所以他说“因为他确实……”。其中,由于那些王子被称为释迦族,又由于那里是他们居住的地方,所以那个地区也这样得名,这一点应当说明。因此他说“释迦族的起源在《安巴塔经》里已经提到过”。“迦毗罗卫”这个名称则是依照过去的称呼而说的。巴利
175.Sakkesūti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ satipaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbanti taṃ ekadesena dassento ‘‘so hī’’ti āha. Tattha yena rājakumārā sakyā nāma jātā, yato tesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānatāya janapado tathā vuccati, taṃ vattabbanti āha ‘‘sakyānaṃ pana uppatti ambaṭṭhasutte āgatāvā’’ti. Kapilavatthūti vuttaṃ purimasaññāvasena.
“种种”这个词,是在说“诸贪法”这个复数形式所显示的相。因为贪随着各种不同的状态和活动方式的差别,有“欲、贪、渴爱、执著、期待”等等许多种类;但以贪求为特征,就只称为“贪”。因此他说“种种的贪”。同样,对于嗔和痴的种种性,也以“嗔、对抗、怒、怨恨、对立”等,以及“迷乱、不正伺察、不审察、愚昧、愚蠢”等来说明,因此说“其余两者也是如此”。“遍取”:完全、周遍地拿取。“执取”:这是这里的意思,所以说“在执取上”。“遍尽”(pariyādiyati):已经完全消尽,因为声明家说“dī”这个音表示“尽”的意思。巴利
Nānappakārakanti ‘‘lobhadhammā’’ti bahuvacanassa nimittaṃ vadati. Lobho hi tena tena avatthāvisesena pavattiākārabhedena ‘‘chando rāgotaṇhā āsatti apekkhā’’tiādinā anekappabhedo, lubbhanalakkhaṇena pana ‘‘lobho’’tveva vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘nānappakārakaṃ lobhaṃyevā’’ti. Tathā ‘‘doso paṭigho kodho upanāho virodho’’tiādinā, ‘‘muyhanaṃ asamapekkhanaṃ apaccavekkhaṇā dummejjhaṃ bālya’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 390) ca dosamohānaṃ nānappakārataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo’’ti. Pariyādiyitvāti parito sabbaso ādāya. Gahetvāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘gahaṇe āgata’’nti. Pariyādiyatīti parikkhīṇoti. Dī-saddañhi saddavidū khayatthaṃ vadanti.
有时候,这是用省略叠词的方式来说明的,所以他说“在每一个时候”。贪、嗔、痴,是指被初道断除后残余的贪、嗔、痴。如果说它们被无余地断除,那第二道又做了什么?这是他的意图。不过,当他看到烦恼现行时,也知道“我还有未断除的”。这样一来,怎么会有“已无余断除”的想法呢?所以他说“对于未断除的……他有想”。既然这样,一个仅凭初道就断除了疑惑的人,怎么会生起“我内部到底还有什么法未被断除呢”这样的疑惑?说了这话之后,他给出原因:“因为不精通教法”。就像对律的悔恨一样,由于对教法不善巧,圣者们有时也会在某些地方生起一点疑惑,犹如那些尚未彻底断除迷乱的人那样。对于不在自己范围内的东西不了知,这跟精通教法有什么关系?仅凭省察就能成就这件事。为了说明这一点,他说:“难道他没有省察吗?”对方不能说“没有”,于是说“有”,并显示其中存在的区分,说“然而那个省察……”等等。其中,“那个”指省察。“一切”指一切圣者。并非完全没有,但也不是完全具备,所以说“然而在这些……”等等。巴利
Ekadāti āmeḍitalopena niddesoti āha ‘‘ekekasmiṃ kāle’’ti. Lobhadosamohāti paṭhamamaggena pahīnāvasesā lobhadosamohā. Niravasesā pahīyanti, aññathā dutiyamaggena kiṃ kataṃ siyāti adhippāyo. Samudācārappattaṃ pana disvā ‘‘appahīnaṃ me atthī’’tipi jānāti. Evaṃ kathaṃ niravasesappahānasaññāti āha ‘‘appahīnakaṃ…pe… saññī hotī’’ti. Evaṃ paṭhamamaggeneva samucchinnasaṃsayassa ‘‘ko su nāma me dhammo ajjhattaṃ appahīnoti evaṃ sandheho kathaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vatvā ‘‘paṇṇattiyā akovidattā’’ti kāraṇamāha. Vinayakukkuccaṃ viya hi paṇṇattiyaṃ akusalatāya ariyānampi katthaci vimatimattaṃ uppajjati yathā taṃ sabbaso appahīnasammohānanti. Attano avisaye anabhijānanaṃ paṇṇattikosallena kimettha payojanaṃ, paccavekkhaṇāmattena ayamattho sijjhatīti dassento ‘‘kiṃ tassa paccavekkhaṇā natthī’’ti āha. Itaro ‘‘natthī’’ti na sakkā vattunti katvā ‘‘atthī’’ti vatvā tattha labbhamānavibhāgaṃ dassento ‘‘sā panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sāti paccavekkhaṇā. Sabbesanti sabbesaṃ ariyānaṃ. Yathā paripuṇṇā na hoti, na evaṃ sabbaso na hotīti āha ‘‘imāsu panā’’tiādi.
176 “内在”指的是自己身内的内在,所以注释里说“在你的相续中”。“未断除”是指并非无余地断除。“两种”是指事欲和烦恼欲这两种欲。因为烦恼欲从被享受的那一刻起,就已经被受用了。巴利
176.Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘tava santāne’’ti. Appahīnoti anavasesato appahīno. Duvidheti vatthukāmakilesakāme. Kilesakāmopi hi yadaggena assādīyati, tadaggena paribhuñjīyati.
177 177. 可享受的,就是“味”,也就是乐。这些欲里的味极少、少得可怜,所以叫“味少”。因此他说“乐少”。由于追求等苦为因,以及现世由恶行所带来的苦、来世之苦,在诸欲中很多,所以是“苦多”。“愁恼多”就是众多杂染。而那些杂染,按照下文将要说的方式,在这里现世方面也很多,所以他说“现法……多”。又因为这些杂染对于拥有它们的人,会在现世和来世障碍其利益的修行,并成为产生过患的原因,所以说“现法……多”。“若如是”就是依照“诸欲味少”等这样的方式。“由理”就是依据法理。“由因”就是依据合理的推论。“善见”是关联语。由观慧,就是由圣道慧。它能殊胜地观照四圣谛,所以称为“观”。因此他说“意指下分双道智”。“喜乐”就是带有喜乐的二禅那。“双道”就是下分道。他不是完全未舍弃欲贪之欲者,因此并非不退转。因此他提出“为何”等问难。像内院戏者那样舍弃的智慧,这里指的是过患随观智。巴利
177. Assādīyatīti assādo, sukhaṃ. Appo appamattako assādo etesūti appassādā. Tenāha ‘‘parittasukhā’’ti. Pariyesanadukkhādihetukaṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ tattha duccaritacaraṇena samparāyikañca dukkhamettha kāmesu bahukanti bahudukkhā. Bahupāyāsāti bahuparikkilesā. Te pana parikkilesā vakkhamānanayena bahūyevettha diṭṭhadhammikāpīti āha ‘‘diṭṭhadhammika…pe… bahū’’ti. Te ca parikkilesā yasmā taṃsamaṅgino hitapaṭipattiyā antarāyakarā idha ceva paraloke ca ādīnavakāraṇañca pavattanti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammika…pe… bahū’’ti. Evaṃ cepīti evaṃ ‘‘appassādā kāmā’’tiādinā ākārena. Nayenāti dhammena. Kāraṇenāti yuttiyā. Suṭṭhu diṭṭhaṃ hotīti sambandho. Vipassanāpaññāyāti ariyamaggapaññāya. Sā cattāripi saccāni visesato passatīti vipassanāti adhippetā. Tenāha ‘‘heṭṭhāmaggadvayañāṇenāti attho’’ti. Pītisukhanti pītisukhavantaṃ jhānadvayaṃ. Dve maggeti heṭṭhāmagge. Āvaṭṭanasīlo ābhujanasīlo na hotīti anāvaṭṭī neva hoti sabbaso appahīnakāmarāgachando. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. Orodhanāṭakā pajahanapaññāti ādīnavānupassanāñāṇamāha.
179 味也已经讲了。因为用“乐味少”这句话,已经把诸欲中所有的乐味毫无遗漏地全部涵盖进去,从而显示了它微不足道,所以过患也已经讲了,因为通过简略说明就已经显示了其余过患。所谓“宣说彼”,就是用“唯受一向之乐”这句话来宣说出离。所谓“以此二端”,就是先以“玛哈那玛,有这五种欲”等说法,通过开示五种欲乐,说明沉溺欲乐的行为;再以“他们一直站着,拒绝坐下”等说法,说明自我折磨的行为。开示了这两端之后,便说我的教法是脱离这两端的。因为教法的圆满以果等至为顶点,所以为了显示教法的成就,说“以果等至为顶点,显示整个教法”。像“喜好蔬菜的国王”这个例子一样,“灵鹫山”是省略了中间成分的复合词。其次,在这里的另一种解释是:因为有鹫,鹫在这座山的峰上,所以叫“灵鹫山”。指那些一直站着的人,从坐的地方起来之后,就一直站在同一个地方。因此他说“不坐”。“尼干陀”指若提子。这里没有剩余,所以是“无剩余”。这只是对“有”这种说法的言辞而已,因此他说“所谓无剩余”。以“恒常”之义,用“恒时”这个词来显示它反复现行,所以说“已止息”。这是用它来显示不间断地现行。这里的含义应当这样理解。巴利
179.Assādopi kathito, ‘‘appassādā’’ti hi iminā yāvatako kāmesu assādo, taṃ sabbaṃ anavasesato pariggahetvā cassa parittabhāvo dassitoti ādīnavopi kathito saṅkhepeneva sesassaādīnavassa dassitattā. Taṃ kathetunti taṃ nissaraṇaṃ ‘‘ekantasukhapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti iminā kathetuṃ. Imehi antehīti ‘‘pañcime, mahānāma, kāmaguṇā’’tiādinā kāmaguṇadassanamukhena kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ ‘‘ubbhaṭṭhakā honti āsanapaṭikkhittā’’tiādinā attakilamathānuyogañca dassetvā imehi dvīhi antehi muttaṃ mama sāsananti, phalasamāpattipariyosānattā sāsanasampattiyā ‘‘upariphalasamāpattisīsena sakalasāsanaṃ dassetu’’nti āha. Gijjhasadiso kūṭoti majjhepadalopīsamāso yathā ‘‘sākapatthivo’’ti (pāṇini. 2.1.60). Dutiye panettha gijjhavantatāya gijjhā kūṭe etassāti gijjhakūṭo. Uddhaṃyeva tiṭṭhanakā nisajjāya vuṭṭhitakālato paṭṭhāya ekaṭṭhāneneva tiṭṭhanakā. Tenāha ‘‘anisinnā’’ti. Nigaṇṭhassāti nāṭaputtassa. Natthi etassa parisesanti aparisesaṃ. Evaṃ saṅkhābhavacanamattamassāti āha ‘‘aparisesasaṅkhāta’’nti. Niccaṭṭhena satata-saddena abhiṇhappavatti jotitā siyāti ‘‘samita’’nti vuttaṃ. Tena nirantarappavattiṃ dassetīti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
180 “凡有所作,他都知道”——了知并灭尽、舍弃苦,这被称为智者的任务;而智者应当了知已做和未做之事。因此,你们在灭尽旧业时,首先应当了知“旧业有这么多”,然后以“经过这么长时间的苦行,已有这么多旧业被灭尽,现在还有这么多应当做”这样的方式,像世人一样自行划定自己应做的事。他就是在说明这一点,所以说“你们也应当这样了知”。“净分”:指纯粹的部分,即未来不需依靠便能成就的业尽,或者由此而来的苦尽,这就是它的意思。通过问“有达到净分的人吗”,这是在显示:在尼干陀的教说中,完全不存在断除不善和修习善法,因为完全没有清净的修习。既然如此,苦尽又怎么可能发生呢?巴利
180.Yaṃ karoti, taṃ jānātīti dukkhassa nijjaraṇakhepanaṃ nāma viññūnaṃ kiccaṃ, viññunā ca purisena katākataṃ jānitabbaṃ, tasmā tumhehi purāṇānaṃ kammānaṃ byantibhāvaṃ karontehi paṭhamaṃ tāva ettakāni purāṇāni kammānīti jānitabbāni, tato ‘‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ katena tapasā ettakāni tāni byantikatāni, idāni ettakāni kātabbānī’’tiādinā ayaṃ vidhi purisena viya attanā kātabbakiccaṃ paricchinditabbanti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘tumhehipi tathā ñātabbaṃ siyā’’ti. Suddhantanti suddhakoṭṭhāsaṃ, āyatiṃ anavassavasiddhaṃ kammakkhayaṃ, tato vā dukkhakkhayanti attho. Suddhantaṃ patto atthīti pucchatīti iminā akusalānaṃ pahānaṃ, kusalānaṃ bhāvanā ca sabbena sabbaṃ nigaṇṭhasamaye natthi sabbaso visuddhibhāvanāya abhāvato, tasmā kuto dukkhakkhayassa sambhavoti dasseti.
“像这样处于不知的状态”(Evaṃ ajānanabhāve satīti):当有像“我们过去曾存在”(ahuvamheva maya)这类说法所讲的那种不知时,意思就是那件事被你们所不知。“暴恶”(Luddāti):就是凶恶可怕。然而因为他们以身、语造作卑劣之事,所以称为“行为暴恶的人”(luddācārā)。因为从事那样的行为,就被称为“血手”(lohitapāṇī)。捕鹿人、渔夫、盗贼、刽子手等,就是捕鹿人这一类人。“粗猛业者”(Kakkhaḷakammāti):指行为粗暴的人。他们在尼乾陀中出家。这是在显示:正因为过去造了能招感极大痛苦的业,你们现在才遭受如此大的痛苦。巴利
Evaṃ ajānanabhāve satīti ‘‘ahuvamheva maya’’ntiādinā vuttappakārassa ajānane sati, tasmiṃ tumhehi aññāyamāneti attho. Luddāti ghorā. Te pana yasmā kāyavācāhi nihīnameva karonti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘luddācārā’’ti. Lohitapāṇitveva vuccati tajjākiriyācaraṇato. Māgavikakevaṭṭacoraghātakādayo māgavikādayo. Kakkhaḷakammāti pharusakammā. Te nigaṇṭhesu pabbajantīti pubbe mahādukkhasaṃvattaniyakammassa katattā hi tumhe etarahi īdisaṃ mahādukkhaṃ paccanubhavathāti dasseti.
他说“说”(vādeti),意思就是在见解上立说。以乐得乐:这里的“以乐”是指以安乐的修行方式,也就是安乐的行道。所谓“乐”,是指解脱之乐。在这个世间,人们获得快乐,正是通过农耕、经商等辛苦的修行才得到的,解脱之乐也是如此。这是其内在含义。由于身体肢节圆满,就像频婆果的核心一样,所以称为频婆娑罗。那些尼干陀是这样说的,然而他们并不知道世尊所证悟的,正是那种极寂静、最殊胜的涅槃乐。率尔,就是轻率。不思择,就是不加以审虑、简择。因此他说“作了轻率之举”等等。巴利
Vādeti diṭṭhiyaṃ, samayeti attho. Sukhena sukhanti ettha sukhenāti paṭipattisukhena, sukhāya paṭipattiyāti attho. Sukhanti vimokkhasukhaṃ, idha loke sukhaṃ adhigacchantā kasivaṇijjādidukkhapaṭipattiyāva adhigacchanti, evaṃ mokkhasukhampīti adhippāyo. Sarīrāvayavasampattiyāpi bimbino sāroti bimbisāro. Te nigaṇṭhā…pe… sandhāya vadanti, na pana bhagavato accantasantapaṇītaṃ nibbānasukhapaṭivedanaṃ jānanti. Sahasāti ravā. Appaṭisaṅkhāti na paṭisaṅkhāya avicāretvā. Tenāha ‘‘sāhasaṃ katvā’’tiādi.
不与其它感受混杂、纯粹只有乐、完全只是乐的,就是“独一乐”,他正在感受这个乐。因此说“感受无间断的乐”。所谓“为了安立论说”,就是为了把“感受独一乐”这个已经发起的说法安立起来。在“王问”这一段里,是专门对国王所说的教法。提问变得轻松,比如“如果七昼夜做不到,那六昼夜做得到吗?”这样问起来就轻松了。从“我”等话开始的“净章”,是因为依于纯粹果报的果等至乐而来的。对一个能持续七昼夜入定的人来说,一昼夜又算得了什么呢?这本来就是很平常的事。因为所说的方式浅显易懂,所以很容易理解。巴利
Aññāhi vedanāhi avomissaṃ ekantaṃ sukhaṃ ekantasukhaṃ, tassa paṭisaṃvedī. Tenāha ‘‘nirantarasukhapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti. Kathāpatiṭṭhāpanatthanti ‘‘ekantasukhapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti evaṃ āraddhakathāya patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ. Rājavāreti rājānaṃ uddissa āgatadesanāvāre. Sukhaṃ pucchituṃ hotīti ‘‘yadi satta rattindivāni nappahoti, kiṃ cha rattindivāni pahotī’’tiādinā pucchanasukhaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ahaṃ kho’’tiādinā pavatto suddhavāro suddhanissandassa phalasamāpattisukhassa vasena āgatattā. Anacchariyaṃ hoti, satta rattindivāni pahontassa ekasmiṃ rattindive kiṃ vattabbanti. Uttānatthameva vuttanayattā suviññeyyattā.
5. 《推度经》的注释巴利
5. Anumānasuttavaṇṇanā
181 “按照所说的”是指:在这里,“在俱卢国,在释迦族”等处,按照所说的方式,对于“名为婆伽的地方王子”等,应当以这样的方式理解词义。“在取地等之日”:指为了建造城市,选址师勘察城址的那一天。“之后”:就是后来。当城市毫无障碍地建成之后,他们把苏苏摩罗山当作吉祥的象征,就给它取名为“苏苏摩罗山”。有人说:有一座山因为形状像鳄鱼,所以叫鳄鱼山,这座山就在那座城附近;因此,那座城因为有这座鳄鱼山,就被称为“苏苏摩罗山”。所谓“Bhesakaḷā”,是指一种名为ghammaṇḍa的树丛,有人说是“白树”,由于它们众多的缘故,那片林就被称为Bhesakaḷā林。有人说:有一个名叫Bhesa的夜叉,行为不当,由于他从那里滑落,那片林就成了名为Bhesagaḷā林。在Abhayadinna之处出生、生长、成长,这就是其含义。巴利
181.Vuttānusārenāti ‘‘kurūsu, sakkesū’’ti ca ettha vuttanayānusārena, ‘‘bhaggā nāma jānapadino rājakumārā’’tiādinā nayena vacanattho veditabboti attho. Vatthupariggahadivaseti nagaramāpanatthaṃ vatthuvijjācariyena nagaraṭṭhānassa pariggaṇhanadivase. Athāti pacchā. Nagare nimmiteti tattha anantarāyena nagare māpite. Tameva susumāragiraṇaṃ subhanimittaṃ katvā ‘‘susumāragiri’’tvevassa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Susumārasaṇṭhānattā susumāro nāma eko giri, so tassa nagarassa samīpe, tasmā taṃ susumāragiri etassa atthīti ‘‘susumāragirī’’ti vuccatīti keci. Bhesakaḷāti vuccati ghammaṇḍagacchaṃ, keci ‘‘setarukkha’’nti vadanti, tesaṃ bahulatāya pana taṃ vanaṃ bhesakaḷāvananteva paññāyittha. Bheso nāma eko yakkho ayuttakārī, tassa tato gaḷitaṭṭhānatāya taṃ vanaṃ bhesagaḷāvanaṃ nāma jātanti keci. Abhayadinnaṭṭhāne jātaṃ virūḷhaṃ, saṃvaddhanti attho.
“令生起意愿”的意思是:无论什么事,只要是自己该被指责的,他就让同梵行者生起想要说出来的意愿;为了这个目的,他把自己交出去给他们。这就是它的含义。最初给出的利益教导是“教诫”,之后一再给出的是“教授”。或者,涉及现在和过去的是“教诫”,涉及未来的是“教授”。有具体事由的是“教诫”,另一种是“教授”。“那位”指的就是这样自恣的比丘。“难共语”是指:对于这个心怀抗拒、专门作对、毫不恭敬的人,言语是苦的,所以他是“难说话的人”。因此说“须以困难方式言之”。上面提到的,就是“他是恶欲者”等十六种恶法。以各种方式行右绕之举,就是“右绕”;由此,有从右边接受的习惯,就是“从右受持者”;不是从右受持的,就是“不从右受持者”。从左边,就是从相反的方向,也就是与所说的相反,这是它的意思。巴利
Icchāpetīti yaṃ kiñci attani garahitabbaṃ vattuṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ icchaṃ uppādeti, tadatthāya tesaṃ attānaṃ vissajjetīti attho. Paṭhamaṃ dinno hitūpadeso ovādo, aparāparaṃ dinno anusāsanī. Paccuppannātītavisayo vā ovādo, anāgatavisayo anusāsanī. Otiṇṇavatthuko ovādo, itaro anusāsanī. So cāti evaṃ pavāretā so bhikkhu. Dukkhaṃ vaco etasmiṃ vippaṭikūlaggāhe vipaccanīkasāte anādare puggaleti dubbaco. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhena vattabbo’’ti. Upari āgatehīti ‘‘pāpiccho hotī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.181) āgatehi soḷasahi pāpadhammehi. Pakārehi āvahaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ, tato padakkhiṇato gahaṇasīlo padakkhiṇaggāhī, na padakkhiṇaggāhī appadakkhiṇaggāhī. Vāmatoti apasabyato, vuttavipariyāyatoti adhippāyo.
想要被不真实地尊崇,就是渴望凭那些并不存在、并非真实的功德而得到尊崇。这里“paṭi-”这个前缀是“敌对”的意思;“散播”或“努力”在这里是指“以对立的方式安住”,所以说“他反击”,意思是:他成为敌对者、反对者而安住。“呵斥”就是驱逐、威吓。而处于这种状态的人,实际上就是在触恼、侵扰他人,所以说“他烦扰”。“反扣帽子”是指:别人以某种方式指责他时,他就把与那指责相应的过失,反过来安在指责者头上。巴利
Asantasambhāvanapatthanānanti asantehi avijjamānehi guṇehi sambhāvanassa patthanābhūtānaṃ. Paṭi-saddo paccattikapariyāyo, pharaṇaṃ vāyamanaṃ idha tathāvaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘paṭippharatīti paṭiviruddho paccanīko hutvā tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Apasādetīti khipeti tajjeti. Tathābhūto ca paraṃ ghaṭṭento nāma hotīti āha ‘‘ghaṭṭetī’’ti. Paṭiāropetīti yādisena vutto, tassa paṭibhāgabhūtaṃ dosaṃ codakassa upari āropeti.
“以隐藏的方式行事”(《增支部》复注 2.3.68):就是以掩盖的方式来做、来运作;或者说,因为“carati”这个词根有多种含义,所以“carati”这个词在这里就是“掩盖”的意思,因此说“他掩盖”。“以别的理由、别的话语”:这是为了说明掩盖的方式,所以说“用别的理由”等等。其中,“别的理由或话语”,指的是指责者为了揭示被指责者的过失而提出的理由或说出的言辞,被指责者却用完全不同的理由或话语来掩盖。所谓“用理由”,就是用能说明指责没有根据的论据;所谓“用话语”,就是用能表达那个意思的言辞。不回答“谁犯了错?”等质问,而是转移话题、岔开去,这就显示了“以别的理由、别的话语来掩盖”的做法。至于“把话引到外面去、敷衍搪塞”,则是这两者的具体区别,因此说“某某人”等等。巴利
Paṭicaratīti (a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.68) paṭicchādanavasena carati pavattati, paṭicchādanattho eva vā carati-saddo anekatthattā dhātūnanti āha ‘‘paṭicchādetī’’ti. Aññenaññanti paṭicchādanākāradassananti āha ‘‘aññena kāraṇenā’’tiādi. Tattha aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ vacanaṃ vāti yaṃ codakena cuditakassa dosavibhāvanaṃ kāraṇaṃ, vacanaṃ vā vuttaṃ, tato aññeneva kāraṇena, vacanena vā paṭicchādeti. Kāraṇenāti codanāya amūlikabhāvadīpaniyā yuttiyā. Vacanenāti tadatthabodhanena. Ko āpannotiādinā codanaṃ avissajjetvā vikkhepāpajjanaṃ aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇanti dasseti, bahiddhā kathāapanāmanaṃ vissajjetvāti ayameva tesaṃ viseso. Tenāha ‘‘itthannāma’’ntiādi.
过失由此被挡开、被守护,或被刈割、被切断,所以叫“apadāna”(事迹);(a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.2)众生以正确或错误的方式所实行的加行/努力。因此说“以自己的行为”。巴利
Apadīyanti dosā etena rakkhīyanti, lūyanti, chijjantīti vā apadānaṃ, (a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.2) sattānaṃ sammā, micchā vā pavattapayogo. Tenāha ‘‘attano cariyāyā’’ti.
183 应当反复推度:就是要一次又一次地衡量、认清楚。应当推度自己:这里用的是反身宾格。所以注释说:应当被衡量、被比较、被判断。或者说,应当推度自己,就是在自己身上生起推度智。这里的道理是这样的:在我身上生起的恶欲,因为本身就是恶欲,所以会带来令人不喜欢的后果,就像在别人身上生起的恶欲一样。这个道理也适用于其他诸法。另一种道理是:想要得到同梵行者的喜爱,就必须断除恶欲,因为它是戒清净的根本因,就像必须断除自赞毁他等一样。对其他诸法,也是同样的道理。巴利
183.Anuminitabbanti anu anu minitabbo jānitabbo. Attānaṃ anuminitabbanti ca idaṃ paccatte upayogavacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘anuminitabbo tuletabbo tīretabbo’’ti. Attānaṃ anuminitabbanti vā attani anumānañāṇaṃ pavattetabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ nayo – appiyabhāvāvahā mayi pavattā pāpicchatā pāpicchābhāvato parasmiṃ pavattapāpicchatā viya. Esa nayo sesadhammesupi. Aparo nayo – sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyabhāvaṃ icchantena pāpicchatā pahātabbā sīlavisuddhihetubhāvato attukkaṃsanādippahānaṃ viya. Sesadhammesupi eseva nayo.
184 应当反复观察:要以“我不要成为有恶欲的人,不要被恶欲控制”这样的方式,反复地,或者一天三次,用智慧之眼来观察,意思是应当让智慧运作起来。应当为了断除恶欲等而观察。这个意思要从 tabba 这个词缀表示状态义的层面来理解;不过在注释书里,是从“应当去做”的层面,把“自己”作为宾格来说明的。对于正在修学的人:就是正在修学三学的人。因此注释书说:对于诸善法而言。巴利
184.Paccavekkhitabboti ‘‘na pāpiccho bhavissāmi, na pāpikānaṃ icchānaṃ vasaṃ gato’’tiādinā pati pati divasassa tikkhattuṃ vā ñāṇacakkhunā avekkhitabbaṃ, ñāṇaṃ pavattetabbanti attho. Pāpicchatādīnaṃ pahānaṃ pati avekkhitabbaṃ, ayañca attho tabba-saddassa bhāvatthatāvasena veditabbo, kammatthatāvasena pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘attāna’’nti paccatte upayogavacanaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Sikkhantenāti tissopi sikkhā sikkhantena. Tenāha ‘‘kusalesu dhammesū’’ti.
“斑点”是指黑芝麻、白芝麻之类的斑点。“完全断除”是指断除一切种类。“在果上到来”是指果已经生起。“在涅槃上到来”是指因为已经证得涅槃。“比丘巴帝摩卡”是指对那些被称为“这个人是沙门,这个人是比丘”的比丘们所说的巴帝摩卡,不应理解为只属于受具足戒的人,也不应理解为只属于出家的人。正因为这是比丘巴帝摩卡,所以才说“在一天之中三次……”等等。不可以不省察,因为它是使自己清净的唯一根本原因。巴利
Tilakanti kāḷatilasetatilāditilakaṃ. Sabbappahānanti sabbappakārappahānaṃ. Phale āgateti phale uppanne. Nibbāne āgateti nibbānassa adhigatattā. Bhikkhupātimokkhanti ‘‘so samaṇo, sa bhikkhū’’ti evaṃ vuttabhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkhaṃ, na upasampannānaṃ eva na pabbajitānaṃ evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā cidaṃ bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ divasassa tikkhattu’’ntiādi. Apaccavekkhituṃ na vaṭṭati attavisuddhiyā ekantahetubhāvato.
第6篇 心荒芜经的注释巴利
6. Cetokhilasuttavaṇṇanā
185 心因为这些而荒芜、变得僵硬,所以叫“心荒芜”。因此说“由于心的僵硬状态”。因为当这些生起时,心就变得像不净之处一样令人不悦,像布满树桩的田地一样难以收获丰硕果实。所以说“犹如垃圾,犹如树桩”。这里应把“心的”一词带过来连接。所谓“束缚了心”,是因为渴爱运作的状态,遮断了善行的机会,就像把心抓住、禁锢起来一样。所以说“好像攥紧拳头一样地抓住”。从词义上说,心被它们以颠倒的方式系缚、抑制,所以它们叫“心的系缚”。如果有人具足四种极清净的戒,戒不穿缺等,达到清净,因为具足殊胜素质,能轻易引生道果,就像玛哈桑卡拉奇达长老那样,他就能凭这样的戒,在这个正法、律中获得增长,所以说“以戒而得增长”。如果有人在圣道生起时,像一棵根基深厚、安稳扎根的树,他就在教法中获得了增长,所以说“以道而得增广”。如果有人已经完全证入一切烦恼的般涅槃,成为应供者,由于戒等诸法蕴的圆满而获得广大的正念,所以说“由涅槃而得圆满究竟”。对于第二种解释方式,应当根据上文来了知。巴利
185. Ceto tehi khilayati thaddhabhāvaṃ āpajjatīti cetokhilā. Tenāha ‘‘cittassa thaddhabhāvā’’ti. Yasmā tehi uppannehi cittaṃ uklāpījātaṃ ṭhānaṃ viya amanuññaṃ khettaṃ viya ca khāṇukanicitaṃ amahapphalaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kacavarabhāvā khāṇukabhāvā’’ti. ‘‘Cittassā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Cittaṃ bandhitvāti taṇhāpavattibhāvato kusalacārassa avasaracajanavasena cittaṃ baddhaṃ viya samorodhetvā. Tenāha ‘‘muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā viya gaṇhantī’’ti. Saddatthato pana ceto virūpaṃ nibandhīyati saṃyamīyati etehīti cetaso vinibandhā yassa catubbidhaṃ sīlaṃ akhaṇḍādibhāvappattiyā suparisuddhaṃ visesabhāgiyattā appakasireneva maggaphalāvahaṃ mahāsaṅgharakkhitattherassa viya, so tādisena sīlena imasmiṃ dhammavinaye vuddhiṃ āpajjissatīti āha ‘‘sīlena vuddhi’’nti. Yassa pana ariyamaggo uppajjanto virūḷhamūlo viya pādapo suppatiṭṭhito, so sāsane virūḷhiṃ āpannoti āha ‘‘maggena virūḷhi’’nti. Yo sabbaso kilesanibbānappatto, so arahā sīlādidhammakkhandhapāripūriyā sativepullappatto hotīti āha ‘‘nibbānena vepulla’’nti. Dutiyavikappe attho vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
诸佛的色身和法身一样,由于不共通于他人,又是无上功德的所依,对于还不能亲自见到的人,确实会成为产生疑惑的根源。所以说“对色身或功德有疑惑”。在这里,就像以大人相必定已经包含了随形好等色身功德,因为二者不相分离,所以只说“以三十二种殊胜大人相庄严”;同样,以无碍智也必定已经包含了无量无边、种种不可限量的法身功德,因此只举出一切知智就已经足够。应当知道,这里并没有遗漏任何差别。“有疑惑”:是以“但愿这(已消除犹豫:疑已除遣)(进入之后:以智慧深入观察之后)巴利
Buddhānaṃ dhammakāyo viya rūpakāyopi anaññasādhāraṇatāya anuttaraguṇādhiṭṭhānatāya ca apaccakkhakārīnaṃ saṃsayavatthu hotiyevāti ‘‘sarīre vā guṇe vā kaṅkhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā mahāpurisalakkhaṇena anubyañjanādayo rūpakāyaguṇā gahitā eva honti avinābhāvatoti ‘‘dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇappaṭimaṇḍita’’micceva vuttaṃ, evaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇena sabbepi anantāparimeyyabhedā dhammakāyaguṇā gahitā eva hontīti sabbaññutaññāṇaggahaṇameva kataṃ nānantariyabhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kaṅkhahīti ‘‘aho vata te guṇā na bhaveyyuṃ, bhaveyyuṃ vā’’ti patthanuppādanavasena kaṅkhati. Purimo hi viparītajjhāsayo, itaro yathābhūtañāṇajjhāsayo. Vicinantoti vicayabhūtāya paññāya te vivecetukāmo tadabhāvato kicchaṃ dukkhaṃ āpajjati, kicchappatti ca tattha nicchetuṃ asamatthatāyevāti āha ‘‘vinicchetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. Vigatā cikicchāti vicikicchā. Adhimokkhaṃ na paṭilabhatīti ‘‘evameta’’nti okappanavasena guṇesu vinicchayaṃ nādhigacchati. Otaritvāti ñāṇena anupavisitvā. Pasīditunti ‘‘pasannarūpadhammakāyaguṇehi bhagavā’’ti pasīdituṃ. Anāvilo akālusso hotuṃ na sakkoti. ‘‘Kaṅkhatī’’ti iminā dubbalā vimati vuttā, ‘‘vicikicchatī’’ti iminā majjhimā, ‘‘nādhimuccatī’’ti iminā balavatī, ‘‘na sampasīdatī’’ti iminā tividhāyapi vimatiyā vasena uppannacittakālussiyaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
从“热勤”等词开始说起:所谓“热勤”,是指从最初就燃烧、灼烧烦恼,也就是发勤界,为了这个目的。“为了修习”:为了让杂染法没有机会生起,这样一次又一次地持续致力于灭除它们,就是“修习”,也就是出离界,为了这个目的。因此说“再三致力于善法”。“为了持续”:为了能一步一步证得更高的殊胜境界,让持续不断、毫无间断的修行保持下去,这种状态就是“持续”,也就是胜勤界,为了这个目的。“为了精勤”:平正地由这三种界所增强、有能力摧毁一切烦恼的精进,就叫“精勤”,为了这个目的。在这里,为了表明:因为心里有前面说的那种疑惑,心连热勤都不会倾向,更何况修习等更深的意思,所以经中才取了这四个词;或者说是为了毫无遗漏地显示所有殊胜差别。不过也有些注释师说:“修习等词其实就是热勤的同义词。”到这里为止,世尊开示了:由于对导师的疑惑,心变得僵硬,像垃圾、像树桩一样,从而引生不善等状态,这就是“心荒芜”。其余几种心荒芜,道理也是这样。巴利
Ātappāyātiādito tapati santapati kileseti ātappaṃ, ārambhadhātu, tadatthāya. Anuyogāyāti yathā saṃkilesadhammānaṃ avasaro na hoti, evaṃ anu anu yuñjanaṃ anuyogo, nikkamadhātu, tadatthāya. Tenāha ‘‘punappunaṃ yogāyā’’ti. Sātaccāyāti yathā uparūpari visesādhigamo hoti, tathā satatassa nirantarapavattassa anuyogassa bhāvo sātaccaṃ, parakkamadhātu, tadatthāya. Padhānāyāti santamevaṃ tividhadhātusaṃvaḍḍhitānubhāvaṃ sabbakilesaviddhaṃsanasamatthaṃ padhānasaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ, tadatthāya. Ettha ca ātappāya cittaṃ na namati yathāvuttakaṅkhāvasena, pageva anuyogādiatthanti dassetuṃ cattāripi padāni gahitāni, anavasesavisesadassanatthaṃ vā. Keci pana ‘‘ātappavevacanāneva anuyogādipadānī’’ti vadanti. Ettāvatā bhagavā satthari kaṅkhāya cittassa thaddhakacavarakhāṇukabhāvena akusalabhāvādiāpādanato cetokhilabhāvaṃ dasseti. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
因为“学”这个说法已经涵盖了行道正法,所以说“教法以及证法”。为了说明在教法上哪里可能生起疑惑,才说了“八万四千法蕴”等等。应当知道,这只是一个举例,因为有些人也会因为教法能辗转引生证悟等理由,而对教法产生疑惑。正如对证法说了疑惑,应当知道在证得法上疑惑也同样会发生。确实,有些人说“修习遍禅等,禅那就能成就”,又说“遍禅的果报是无色界,慈等的果报是第四梵住”,他们就是以这种方式在疑惑。在这里应当知道,疑惑只在九种出世间法的施设概念上生起,因为出世间法不是杂染法。巴利
Sikkhāggahaṇena paṭipattisaddhammassa gahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyattidhamme ca paṭivedhadhamme cā’’ti. Pariyattidhamme yattha kaṅkhāya sambhavo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tayidaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ paramparāya paṭivedhāvahabhāvādivasenapi ekaccānaṃ tattha saṃsayuppattito. Yathā ca paṭivedhe kaṅkhā vuttā, evaṃ adhigamadhammepi pavattatīti veditabbā. Tathā hi ekacce ‘‘kasiṇādibhāvanāya jhānāni ijjhantī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Kasiṇanissando āruppāti, mettādinissando catutthabrahmavihāro’’ti evamādinā kaṅkhatiyevāti. Ettha ca navalokuttaresu paññattiyaṃyeva kaṅkhāpavatti veditabbā asaṃkilesikattā lokuttaradhammānaṃ.
所谓“这种”,就是指这样的正道,也就是被称为善行道、正直行道、如理行道、适当行道的正行道。应当知道,增上戒学等法是出世间法的随顺法。这样一来,它们与道果之学之间的区别就成立了。正如所说:“因为以‘学’一词摄取了行道正法。”在这里,疑由于对三种事以及学的功德不能信解、不能清净信,所以不修行,心因此变得僵硬;又由于四处寻求、徘徊,心变得像垃圾和树桩一样。同样应当知道,对同梵行者怀着怨恨、暴恶等,心会变得僵硬;由于伤害、对抗等,心会变得像垃圾和树桩一样。涉及圣僧团的疑,并不存在针对某个个人的疑,所以只取涉及僧团的疑。而且,这个心荒芜的教导是就教法而说的,因此只取针对同梵行者的愤怒。巴利
Evarūpanti edisaṃ suppaṭipatti-ujuppaṭipatti-ñāyappaṭipatti-sāmīcippaṭipatti-saṅkhātaṃ sammāpaṭipadaṃ. Adhisīlasikkhādayo lokuttaradhammassa anudhammabhūtā veditabbā. Evañhi maggaphalasikkhāhi imāsaṃ viseso siddho hoti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sikkhāggahaṇena paṭipattisaddhammassa gahitattā’’ti. Ettha ca yathā vicikicchā vatthuttayassa sikkhāya ca guṇesu anadhimuccanaasampasīdanavasena appaṭipattibhāvato cittassa thaddhabhāvo āsappanaparisappanavasena pavattiyā kacavarakhāṇukabhāvo ca, evaṃ sabrahmacārīsu āghātacaṇḍikkādivasena cittassa thaddhabhāvo ca upahananavirujjhanādivasena kacavarakhāṇukabhāvo ca veditabbo. Ariyasaṅghavisayā vicikicchā, puggalavisayā kāci natthīti saṅghavisayāva gahitā, sāsanikavasena cāyaṃ cetokhiladesanāti sabrahmacārīvisayova kopo gahito.
186 就像有对象的欲,烦恼欲也是可享受、可爱的,所以说“于烦恼欲亦然”。因此世尊说:“色渴爱在世间,是可爱之色、可喜之色,这渴爱在这里生起时就生起,在这里执著时就执著”等等。在对欲的解说中,一切三界诸法都因可欲求之义而称为“欲”,但这里“欲”一词所取的,只是作为强力欲贪基础的那些事物。由于这些事物具有系缚所缘的性质,就像单独执取自己的身体一样,对外在他人那样的色法,也以聚集之义而执取,所以说“于色,是指外部的色法”。因为,正如对五种欲乐的贪染会导致系缚,障碍禅那等殊胜证得;对自己身体的贪恋,以及对外在资具、亲眷、朋友等的贪恋,也是如此。然而,有些注释师在这里用“于色,是指在色界禅那中”等说法加以铺演。这是不合理的,因为经文是以心的系缚状态,来执取那些系缚禅那证得以及令戒染污的事物。巴利
186. Yathā vatthukāmo, evaṃ kilesakāmopi assādanīyo evāti ‘‘kilesakāmepī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘rūpataṇhā loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisatī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.400; ma. ni. 1.133; vibha. 203). Kāmaniddese (mahāni. 1) sabbepi tebhūmakā dhammā kāmanīyaṭṭhena ‘‘kāmā’’ti vuttā, balavakāmarāgavatthubhūtāyevettha kāmaggahaṇena gahitāti. Vinibaddhavatthubhāvena yathā visuṃ attano kāyo gahito, tathā paresaṃ tathārūpā rūpadhammā samūhaṭṭhenāti āha ‘‘rūpeti bahiddhārūpe’’ti. Yathā hi pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo jhānādivisesādhigamassa vinibaddhāya saṃvattati, evaṃ attano kāye apekkhā bahiddhā ca sakaparikkhārañātimittādīsu apekkhāti. Keci panettha ‘‘rūpeti rūpajjhāne’’tiādinā papañcenti. Tadayuttaṃ jhānādhigamavinibaddhānaṃ sīlassa ca saṃkilesabhūtānaṃ cetovinibaddhabhāvena gahitattā.
想要多少就吃多少,意思是渴望多少就取用多少。所以说想要多少,就取用那么多。吃饱肚子为止的进食,是因为不会反吐出来,也是因为填满了腹部。床座乐,是指依靠床座而产生的快乐。躺卧乐,是指通过翻身侧卧而产生的快乐。睡眠乐,是指由睡眠而产生的快乐。巴利
Yāvadatthanti yāva attheti abhikaṅkhati, tāva. Tenāha ‘‘yattakaṃ icchati, tattaka’’nti. Nti yāvadatthaṃ udarapūraṃ bhuttaṃ. Avadehanato pūraṇato. Seyyasukhanti seyyaṃ paṭicca uppajjanakasukhaṃ. Passasukhanti passānaṃ samparivattanena uppajjanakasukhaṃ. Niddāsukhanti niddāyanena uppajjanakasukhaṃ.
“以戒……”等语句,是在说明内心希求的方式。“受持誓愿”是指实践头陀支等誓愿。“苦行”是指发起精进。因为这种精进能折磨烦恼、压制烦恼,所以称为苦行。巴利
Sīlenātiādi patthanākāradassanaṃ. Vatasamādānanti dhutaṅgādivatānuṭṭhānaṃ. Tapoti vīriyārambho. So hi kilesānaṃ tapanaṭṭhena niggaṇhanaṭṭhena tapacaraṇanti vuttaṃ.
189 依靠欲求:就是把欲求当作担纲的重任、当作最上首、当作先导,然后依着这种运作方式去依靠欲求。所以称为“主要部分”,是因为它具有最上首之义而成为主要,或者说已经达到了主要的地位。所谓“那些法”,指依靠欲求而生起的定,以及被称为精勤行的精进;“具足”就是与这些法相应。“成就”是就成就之义而说,“获得”是就完成、获得之义而说,这就是它的意思。这个成就的基础便是“足”,是它的根基,是作为立足处。也可这样说:借着它,这些法得以成就、增长、达到殊胜,所以叫成就;而这成就本身又是更高殊胜法的依止处,所以叫足。因此说:“成就所成之足”,或者“成就本身就是足”,所以叫成就足。其余的神足等也应这样理解。这里所说的“它”,是指神足。所谓“意义被阐明”,是为显示其含义而作的解释,因此在《清净道论大复注》中,应当采纳对该含义的审察。由于神足以定和精勤为主导,所以说:这里讲的是镇伏断。对于那些尚未生起的善法,为了促使它们生起;对于那些已经生起的善法,为了让它们增长广大:因此努力奋发,这就是勤勇,是达到力量的精进之因。而这个勤勇又是四种神足的特别助缘,依着它们,所以被称为第五。又因为无论是在止与观的修习中,还是在它们的初、中、后各个阶段,都应当成就这种精进,所以说:勤勇显示了在一切处都应做的精进。把属于前行阶段的止观修习,按照所应断除之法的分别加以分析之后,说:五种心荒芜的断除、五种心束缚的断除。有能力:是指适合、值得成就。以智:是指以道智。为了断除烦恼:是为了彻底斩断烦恼。安稳:是指没有灾患。巴利
189.Chandaṃ nissāyāti chandaṃ dhuraṃ, chandaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ, chandaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā pavattivasena chandaṃ nissāya. Jeṭṭhakaṭṭhena padhānabhūtā, padhānabhāvaṃ vā pattāti padhānabhūtā. Tehi dhammehīti chandanissayena pavattasamādhinā ceva ‘‘padhānasaṅkhāro’’ti vuttavīriyena ca. Upetanti sampayuttaṃ. Ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi, nipphattiatthena paṭilābhaṭṭhena cāti attho, tassā iddhiyā pādaṃ pādakaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Atha vā ijjhanti tāya iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, sāva uparivisesānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato pādo. Tenāha ‘‘iddhibhūtaṃ vā pādanti iddhipāda’’nti. Sesesupīti vīriyiddhipādādīsupi. Assāti iddhipādassa. Attho dīpitoti dīpanatthaṃ kataṃ, tasmā visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.369) tassa atthavicāro gahetabbo. Iddhipādānaṃ samādhipadhānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vikkhambhanappahānaṃ kathita’’nti. Tesaṃ tesaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ anuppannānaṃ uppādanakiriyāya uppannānaṃ paribrūhanakiriyāya ussahanato ussoḷhī, thāmappattā parakkamadhātu. Sā pana catunnaṃ iddhipādānaṃ visesapaccayabhūtā te upādāya ‘‘pañcamī’’ti vuttā, sā ca yasmā samathavipassanābhāvanāsu tattha caādimajjhapariyosānesu sādhetabbaṃ vīriyaṃ, tasmā āha ‘‘ussoḷhīti sabbattha kattabbavīriyaṃ dassetī’’ti. Pubbabhāgiyasamathavipassanāsādhanaṃ pahātabbadhammavibhāgena bhinditvā āha ‘‘pañca cetokhilappahānāni pañca vinibandhappahānānī’’ti. Bhabboti yutto arahati nipphattiyā. Ñāṇenāti maggañāṇena. Kilesabhedāyāti kilesānaṃ samucchindanāya. Khemassāti anupaddavassa.
“推测之义”是指:像“会不会是这样呢?”这种表示设想、可能性的意思。“如此地”是说:不单只说“如此”这一个数目,而是把它和另一个数目合在一起说,这在世间是顺口的说法,比如“两滴或三滴水”。“妥善地孵卧”是指:母鸡不用脚等部位对蛋造成任何伤害,为了避开外面风等危险,好好地卧在蛋上面。“令其得热”是指:为了把蛋里的湿气蒸发掉,借着自己身体的温度使蛋变暖。因此说“使它们变温热了”。“妥善地培育”是指:完全以母鸡的气味熏染。因此说“使它们带上母鸡的气味”。而这母鸡气味的熏染,应当理解为由妥善孵卧和妥善遍熟所成就的“随成就”。然而,因为是与它们一起成就的,所以说“通过三种动作的实行”。虽然不会像“但愿如此”等那样生起欲求,但由于原因已具备,所以说它们确实能够破壳而出。为什么能够呢?回答说“因为它们依彼……”等。在此,应当理解:正如蛋壳的薄是光在里面显现的原因,同样,蛋壳的薄、指甲尖和嘴喙的锐利,以及湿气的蒸发,都是原因的说法;因此,由于光在里面显现,且自身已到达成熟状态。巴利
Sambhāvanattheti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.11; a. ni. ṭī. 3.7.71) ‘‘api nāmevaṃ siyā’’ti vikappanattho sambhāvanattho. Evaṃ hīti evaṃ ekameva saṅkhyaṃ avatvā aparāya saṅkhyāya saddhiṃ vacanaṃ loke siliṭṭhavacanaṃ hoti yathā ‘‘dve vā tīṇi vā udakaphusitānī’’ti. Sammā adhisayitānīti pādādīhi attanā nesaṃ kiñci upaghātaṃ akarontiyā bahivātādiparissayapariharaṇatthaṃ sammadeva upari sayitāni. Utuṃ gāhāpentiyāti tesaṃ allasinehapariyādānatthaṃ attano kāyusmāvasena utuṃ gaṇhāpentiyā. Tenāha ‘‘usmīkatānī’’ti. Sammā paribhāvitānīti sammadeva sabbaso kukkuṭavāsanāya vāsitāni. Tenāha ‘‘kukkuṭagandhaṃ gāhāpitānī’’ti. Ayañca kukkuṭagandhaparibhāvanā sammāadhisayanasammāparisedananipphattiyā ‘‘anunipphādī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.11) daṭṭhabbā. Tehi pana saddhiṃyeva ijjhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘tividhakiriyākaraṇenā’’ti. Kiñcāpi na evaṃ ‘‘aho vatime’’tiādinā icchā uppajjeyya, kāraṇassa pana sampāditattā atha kho bhabbāva abhinibbhijjitunti yojanā . Kasmā bhabbāti āha ‘‘te hi yasmā tāyā’’tiādi. Ettha yathā kapālassa tanutā ālokassa anto paññāyamānassa kāraṇaṃ, tathā kapālassa tanutāya nakhasikhāmukhatuṇḍakānaṃ kharatāya ca allasinehassa pariyādānaṃ kāraṇavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tasmāti ālokassa anto paññāyamānato, sayañca paripākagatattā.
“譬喻的成就”是指用所譬喻的事物,把譬喻的意义完完整整地说明清楚。“以义”是指依照所譬喻之事的含义。就像母鸡对鸡蛋做出三种动作,是小鸡能从蛋壳里出来的根本原因;同样,比丘具足奋发和十五支,也是他能从无明蛋壳里出来的根本原因,所以说“那只母鸡……具足的状态”。因为无明和蛋壳在覆盖、遮蔽这一点上相似,所以依靠强有力的观,无明的蛋壳就变薄了;当观智成熟转变的时候,就达到了趣向出起的状态,那时这观智就像怀上了道智的胎儿一样,所以说“入胎之时”。“属于神通的部分”是指属于世间神通的部分。因为出世间神通才能彻底击破无明的蛋壳。在偈颂中,“击破无明的蛋壳”这句话,是通过教法表达的善巧,去冲击应受教化者相续中的无明蛋壳,使它无法再停留在原来的地方。巴利
Opammasampaṭipādananti opammatthassa upameyyena sammadeva paṭipādanaṃ. Atthenāti upameyyatthena. Yathā kukkuṭiyā aṇḍesu tividhakiriyāya karaṇaṃ kukkuṭacchāpakānaṃ aṇḍakosato nikkhamanassa mūlakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ bhikkhuno ussoḷhīpannarasāni aṅgāni avijjaṇḍakosato nikkhamanassa mūlakāraṇanti āha ‘‘tassā kukkuṭiyā…pe… samannāgatabhāvo’’ti. Paṭicchādanasāmaññena avijjāya aṇḍakosasadisatāya balavavipassanāvasena avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvo, vipassanāñāṇassa pariṇāmakālo vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvāpatti, tadā ca sā maggañāṇagabbhaṃ dhārentī viya hotīti āha ‘‘gabbhaggahaṇakālo’’ti. Abhiññāpakkheti lokiyābhiññāpakkhe. Lokuttarābhiññā hi avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padālikāti. Gāthāya avijjaṇḍakosaṃ paharatīti desanāvilāsena vineyyasantānagataṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ ghaṭṭeti, yathāṭhāne ṭhātuṃ na deti.
“审察断”是指以“彼分断”为前提的“镇伏断”。因为经文中已经提到了属于前行阶段的那些神足,所以才说“以神足说明镇伏断”。不过,从经文里“具足奋发和十五支的比丘,有能力趋向厌离……”这类说法来看,出世间神足其实已经通过“正觉”这个词被包含进去了。“于道中已至”是说:对于那位具足奋发和十五支的比丘,当他策励自己修观时,道就在他心中生起;或者也可以说,在经文中通过“破壳”“正觉”等词来说明“于道中已至”。“于果中已至”的意思,也应当按照前面同样的方式来理解。至于涅槃,因为经文中没有直接提到,所以没有取用“出离断”。剩下的内容就很容易理解了。巴利
Paṭisaṅkhānappahānanti tadaṅgappahānapubbakaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ. Pubbabhāgiyā iddhipādā pāḷiyaṃ gahitāti ‘‘iddhipādehi vikkhambhanappahāna’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ussoḷhipannarasaṅgasamannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo abhinibbidāyā’’tiādivacanato (ma. ni. 1.189) lokuttariddhipādā pana sambodhaggahaṇeneva gahitā. Magge āgateti ussoḷhīpannarasaṅgasamannāgatassa bhikkhuno vipassanaṃ ussukkāpayato magge āgate uppanne, pāḷiyaṃ vā abhinibbhidāsambodhaggahaṇehi magge āgate. Phale āgateti etthāpi vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Nibbānassa pana pāḷiyaṃ anāgatattā nissaraṇappahānaṃ na gahitaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
7. 林野经巴利
7. Vanapatthapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
190 190. “林”(vana)之所以称为林,是因为追求远离的人向往它、亲近它;或者说,它像是在向这些人乞求,请他们为了自身的成就而住在这里。“处”(pattha)是说:追求远离的人,依着所期望的殊胜证得而安住在那里。在林中、在密林处的坐卧具,就是“林薮”(vanapattha)。“pariyāya”是说:它执取自果而运转,因此指原因。所以论中说“林薮教说”,即“林薮之因”。因为依止那林薮而住的人,林薮就是他依止的原因,所以说“依林薮而住”。此外,“pariyāya”也可以指安立所应说的义理,因此也指开示。以林薮为所缘而生起的开示,就是林薮开示。这两处都提到林薮,只是为了标示它的特征,因为村落等在这里同样可以成为原因,也可以成为开示的对象。巴利
190. Vanīyati vivekakāmehi bhajīyati, vanute vā te attasampattiyā vasanatthāya yācanto viya hotīti vanaṃ, patiṭṭhanti ettha vivekakāmā yathādhippetavisesādhigamenāti patthaṃ, vanesu patthaṃ gahanaṭṭhāne senāsanaṃ vanapatthaṃ. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ pariggahetvā vattatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇanti āha ‘‘vanapatthapariyāyanti vanapatthakāraṇa’’nti. Vanapatthañhi taṃ upanissāya viharato upanissayakāraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vanapatthaṃ upanissāya viharatī’’ti. Pariyāyati desetabbamatthaṃ patiṭṭhapetīti pariyāyo, desanā. Vanapatthaṃ ārabbha pavattā desanā vanapatthadesanā, taṃ, ubhayatthāpi vanapatthaggahaṇaṃ lakkhaṇamattaṃ gāmādīnampettha kāraṇabhāvassa, desanāya visayabhāvassa ca labbhamānattā.
191 “依止”就是依靠、以……为依托,意思是以远离尘嚣的住处作为依靠。“不现前”等语,是在说明那片林野中坐卧处的不适宜,或者也在说明气候、人群、闻法等方面的不适宜。“活命的资具”,就是维持生命运转的资具、助缘。“应当积集”,就是应当以如法、无可指责的拾取等方式,一点一点地获取、得到。而这些这样积集起来、聚集起来时,就叫做“已聚集”,所以说“应当聚集”。“以苦而生起”,就是不容易获得。以此说明饮食等适宜条件的缺乏。“夜间时分或白天时分”,原文是宾格,这里用作处格义,所以说“夜间时段或白天时段”。只应在夜间离开,因为在那里沙门法无法成就。巴利
191.Nissāyāti apassāya, vivekavāsassa apassayaṃ katvāti attho. Na upaṭṭhātītiādīhi tasmiṃ vanapatthe senāsanasappāyābhāvaṃ, utupuggaladhammassavanasappāyābhāvampi vā dasseti. Jīvitasambhārāti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.9.6) jīvitappavattiyā sambhārā paccayā. Samudānetabbāti sammā ñāyena anavajjauñchācariyādinā uddhaṃ uddhaṃ ānetabbā pāpuṇitabbā. Te pana tathā samudānitā samāhaṭā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘samāharitabbā’’ti. Dukkhena uppajjantīti sulabhuppādā na honti. Etena bhojanasappāyādiabhāvaṃ dasseti. Rattibhāgaṃ vā divasabhāgaṃ vāti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘rattikoṭṭhāse vā divasakoṭṭhāse vā’’ti. Rattiṃyeva pakkamitabbaṃ samaṇadhammassa tattha anipphajjanato.
192-3 即使已经这样反复思量:“我出家是为了什么目的?这个目的在这里无法达成,而衣钵等受用却源源不断地得到。我不是为了这些而出家的,那我住在这里还有什么意义?”
在紧接着的那一段里,“saṅkhāpi”的意思是:即使这样思量:“我出家是为了什么目的?这个目的我在这里能够达成,而衣钵等受用却得不到。我不是为了这些而出家的。”
因此说“了知沙门法的成就不成就之后”。巴利
192-3.Saṅkhāpīti ‘‘yadatthamahaṃ pabbajito, na metaṃ idha nipphajjati, cīvarādi pana samudāgacchati, nāhaṃ tadatthaṃ pabbajito, kiṃ me idha vāsenā’’ti paṭisaṅkhāyapi. Anantaravāre saṅkhāpīti ‘‘yadatthamahaṃ pabbajito, taṃ me idha nipphajjati, cīvarādi pana na samudāgacchati, nāhaṃ tadatthaṃ pabbajito’’ti paṭisaṅkhāyapīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘samaṇadhammassa nipphajjanabhāvaṃ jānitvā’’ti.
195-7 “那个人”这个词,和“不应跟随”是关联的。意思是:不告诉他就应离开,也不应跟着他走。因为即使隔得很远,关联也仍然成立。把“那个人”从主格转成业格,意思就是:对那个人,不告诉他就离开。这是按照意义来改变格的形式。“告诉之后才应离开”这里也是同样的道理。而教导“告诉之后才应离开”,是为了让人知道感恩、懂得报恩。巴利
195-7.Sopuggalo anāpucchā pakkamitabbaṃ, nānubandhitabboti ‘‘so puggalo’’ti padassa ‘‘nānubandhitabbo’’ti iminā sambandho. Yassa yena hi sambandho, dūraṭṭhenapi so bhavati . Taṃ puggalanti ‘‘so puggalo’’ti paccattavacanaṃ upayogavasena pariṇāmetvā taṃ puggalaṃ anāpucchā pakkamitabbanti attho. Atthavasena hi vibhattivipariṇāmoti. Taṃ āpucchā pakkamitabbanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Āpucchā pakkamitabbanti ca kataññutakataveditāya niyojanaṃ.
198 像这样的:依靠它,比丘只期待功德增长,而不会因为资具而劳累;像这样的,即使以杖罚等方式惩治,也不该舍弃。用“即使……”等话,就是在说明这一点。巴利
198.Evarūpoti yaṃ nissāya bhikkhuno guṇehi vuddhiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā, paccayehi ca na parissamo, evarūpo daṇḍakammādīhi niggaṇhāti cepi, na pariccajitabboti dasseti ‘‘sacepī’’tiādinā.
8. 蜜丸经的注释巴利
8. Madhupiṇḍikasuttavaṇṇanā
199 “原生林”是指自然生长的树林,所以经文说“非种植的”。“为了隐居”是指为了达到心的独一状态;或者是指从种种散乱的所缘中把心收回来,以果定而安住于最极寂静的涅槃。“手中有杖”就是手中拿着杖。为了说明他为什么被称为“执杖者”,所以说了“这个人……”等话。“以杖维生”是指对杖有特别的嗜好。因为他沉迷于杖,又精通杖术,在这方面有名声、为人所知,所以总是拿着杖行走。“为了消除腿脚疲劳”是为了消除在王殿久坐而生的腿脚疲劳。“偶然外出”是随意外出,不是经常外出。“靠着”是紧紧靠着站立。为了说明他为什么被称为“靠着”,所以说了“就像牧牛童……”等话。巴利
199.Jātivananti sayaṃjātaṃ vanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aropima’’nti. Paṭisallānatthāyāti ekībhāvatthāya, puthuttārammaṇato vā cittaṃ paṭinivattetvā accantasante nibbāne phalasamāpattivasena allīyāpanatthaṃ. Daṇḍo pāṇimhi assāti daṇḍapāṇi. Yathā so ‘‘daṇḍapāṇī’’ti vuccati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Daṇḍavittatāyāti daṇḍe soṇḍatāya. So hi daṇḍapasuto daṇḍasippe ca sukusalo tattha pākaṭo paññāto, tasmā daṇḍaṃ gahetvāva vicarati. Jaṅghākilamathavinodanatthanti rājasabhāya ciranisajjāya uppannajaṅghāparissamassa apanayanatthaṃ. Adhiccanikkhamanoti yādicchakanikkhamano, na abhiṇhanikkhamano. Olubbhāti sannirumbhitvā ṭhito. Yathā so ‘‘olubbhā’’ti vutto, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘gopālakadārako viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
200 200. 因为人们用这个来说,所以叫“言论”;对于“见”,他说:“是持什么言论的人?是持什么见的人?” “宣说什么”就是“是什么样的宣说者?是讲哪种法的人?” “以不恭敬的心”就是带着轻视。为了说明为什么要这样问,他说了“为什么”等话。“愿此毁灭”意思是“愿那个家庭毁灭”。巴利
200. Vadanti etenāti vādo, diṭṭhīti āha ‘‘kiṃ vādīti, kiṃ diṭṭhiko’’ti? Kimakkhāyīti kimācikkhako, kīdisadhammakatho? Acittīkārenāti anādarena. Tathāpucchane kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘kasmā’’tiādimāha. Nassatetanti nassatu etaṃ kulaṃ.
不知道意义:如果他对意义只了解一部分,就可能错误地执取它,并固执对抗。这会让他长久受损、受苦,所以世尊希望他不知意义。争论性的谈话,就是引发争执的谈话,意思是带着敌意的谈话。有人会质问:世间不是有很多沙门婆罗门与世尊并存,持有各种不同主张吗?针对这种责难,才说了“如来确实……”等话。如来不争论,因为导致争论的贪欲和见执已经被道彻底断除;但世人因为没有断除这些,所以会和如来争论。说法者、如实说者不会和说法者争论,因为他们根本没有想争论的意愿;非法说者却不同,他们连一根草都不把别人放在眼里,总要和对方争论。因此说:“比丘们,说法者在世间不和任何人争论。”而非法说者因为争论的根源还没有断除,就一定会争论。所以也说:“比丘们,正是非法说者才会争论。”巴利
Atthaṃna jānātīti atthaṃ ce ekadesena jāneyya, taṃ micchā gahetvā paṭippharitvāpi tiṭṭheyya. Tassa dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāyāti tadassa atthājānanaṃ bhagavatā icchitaṃ. Viggāhikakathanti viggahakathaṃ, sārambhakathanti attho. Nanu bhagavatā saddhiṃ loke puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇā nānāvādā santīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tathāgato hī’’tiādi. Na vivadati vivādahetukānaṃ kāmadiṭṭhijjhosānānaṃ maggeneva samugghātitattā, tadabhāvato pana loko tathāgatena vivadati. Dhammavādī yathābhūtavādī dhammavādīhi na vivadati tesaṃ vivaditukāmatāya eva abhāvato, adhammavādī pana tiṇāyapi namaññamāno tehi kiñci vivadati. Tenāha ‘‘na, bhikkhave, dhammavādī kenaci lokasmiṃ vivadatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.94). Adhammavādī pana asamucchinnavivādahetukattā vivadateva. Tathā cāha ‘‘adhammavādīva kho, bhikkhave, vivadatī’’ti.
这里“如同”这个词,就像在“他了知未生起的爱欲如何生起”等经文里那样,是表示原因,所以说“以什么原因”。或者,这里用“如同”这个词说的是原因的样态,而从意义上说,那其实就是原因本身,所以说“以什么原因”。“这样吗?这样吗?”不断生起,所以叫“疑惑”,也就是疑。没有这种疑惑的人,就是“无疑惑者”,指那个没有疑惑的人。世尊已经用不来道断除了追悔和对恶作的追悔,用最高道断除了手脚行为方面的追悔,因为他证得了不共之法。“一处又一处生起的有”在这里指的是“一次又一次的有”,所以说“在再三的有之中”。或者,就像“防护与非防护”“果与非果”那样,小与大的“有”被称为“有与非有”,所以说“在低劣或殊胜的有之中”。有增长到极点,就称为“非有”,就像“无学之法”那样。“烦恼想”指的是欲想等;或者烦恼本身就用“想”这个名字来说,像“断除想,只证得甘露”这类说法里那样。“他显示自己是诸漏尽者”这句话,也显示他为他人说法,让他们也能成为那样,这个意思也应当知道。“取出后让游戏”就是取出来并且让他游戏,或者通过取出的方式让他游戏。“三枝的”指的是额头上像三道弯曲那样的额纹。巴利
Yathā ca panāti ettha yathā-saddo ‘‘yathā ca anuppannassa kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti, tañca pajānātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.122) viya kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘yena kāraṇenā’’ti. Kāraṇākāro vā idha yathā-saddena vutto, so pana atthato kāraṇamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yena kāraṇenā’’ti. ‘‘Idaṃ kathaṃ idaṃ kathaṃ’’ti pavattanato kathaṃkathā, vicikicchā. Sā yassa natthi, so akathaṃkathī, taṃ akathaṃkathiṃ. Vippaṭisārakukkuccaṃ bhagavatā anāgāmimaggeneva chinnaṃ, hatthapādakukkuccaṃ aggamaggena āveṇikadhammādhigamato. Aparāparaṃ uppajjanakabhavo ‘‘bhavābhavo’’ti idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘punappunabbhave’’ti. Saṃvarāsaṃvaro phalāphalaṃ viya khuddakamahanto bhavo ‘‘bhavābhavo’’ti vuttoti āha ‘‘hīnapaṇīte vā bhave’’ti. Bhavo vuḍḍhippatto ‘‘abhavo’’ti vuccati yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 11.tikamātikā). Kilesasaññāti kāmasaññādike vadati. Kilesā eva vā saññānāmena vuttā ‘‘saññā pahāya amataṃ eva pāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu viya. Attano khīṇāsavabhāvaṃ dīpetīti imināva paresañca tathattāya dhammaṃ desetīti ayampi attho vibhāvitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nīharitvā kīḷāpetvāti nīharitvā ceva kīḷāpetvā ca, nīharaṇavasena vā kīḷāpetvā. Tivisākhanti tibhaṅgabhākuṭi viya nalāṭe jātattā nalāṭikaṃ.
201 “为何呢”是问“出于什么原因”,也就是问原因。“把握了连接”是指提出提问的关联。“从何因而起”是说“以什么为因、以什么为原因”。因为前一句没有省略格位词尾就直接加以说明,所以这里的意思就是“以内在六处、外在六处等为因”。“想”是说它们以想的狀態被了知,所以称为“想”,因此说“想就是类别”。在这里,慢确实也属于戏论,但因为是就欢喜这一自性来说的,所以解释为“与渴爱、慢、见之戏论相应的想”。下文也将说到“应欢喜的”等等。“转起”是指完全向上、向上遍取之后而现起。因为这里的“行相”一词含有范围的意思,依此关系,“人”用对格,就像“比丘们,如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者有两种寻现起”那样。渴爱等不超越各自现起的形态,以反复串习的方式一再向上现起,因此它们被称为“戏论之想”。巴利
201.Kintinu khoti kiṃ kāraṇenāti attho. Anusandhiṃ gahetvāti pucchānusandhiṃ uṭṭhapetvā. Yatonidānanti yaṃnidānaṃ, yaṃkāraṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Purimapade hi vibhatti alopaṃ katvā niddeso, chaajjhattikabāhirāyatanādinidānanti ayameva attho. Saṅkhāyanti saṅkhābhāvena ñāyantīti saṅkhāti āha ‘‘saṅkhāti koṭṭhāsā’’ti. Kāmañcettha mānopi papañco, abhinandanasabhāve eva pana gaṇhanto ‘‘taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipapañcasampayuttā’’ti āha. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘abhinanditabba’’ntiādi. Samudācarantīti sabbaso uddhaṃ uddhaṃ pariyādāya pavattanti. Mariyādattho hi ayamākāro, tena ca yogena purisanti upayogavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘tathāgataṃ, bhikkhave, arahantaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ dve vitakkā samudācarantī’’ti (itivu. 38). Taṇhādayo ca yathāsakaṃ pavattiākāraṃ avilaṅghantiyo āsevanavasena uparūpari pavattanti. Tathā hi tā ‘‘papañcasaṅkhā’’ti vuttā.
所谓原因,就是生起的条件。即使只有一个处……乃至……如果眼处等任何一个处都没有值得欢喜、值得称叹、值得执取的东西,那就是“没有”;这不就是确实没有吗?为什么还说“如果没有”呢?确实是没有,但对于那些还没有断除欢喜、称叹、执取的凡夫来说,诸处仍会以值得欢喜等方式呈现出来,所以对他们不能说“没有”;而对于已经断除欢喜等的人来说,则完全不存在,因此才说“如果没有”。所谓“我、我所”,是指对值得欢喜的对象,以见的欢喜执为“我”,以渴爱的欢喜执为“我所”——也就是应当喜好之物。所谓“应当称叹”,是指以执取、安立的方式来说,因此说“应当说为我、我所”。所谓“执取之后”,是指见和渴爱渗入所依之后,把两种执取当作不与他人共有的专属物一般,因此说“吞下之后、彻底确定之后”。所谓“凭此”,就是凭“如果在这里没有”等语句。所谓“在这里”,就是在诸处之中。通过指出渴爱等没有所依,说明渴爱等本身不转起,就是烦恼的寂灭。因此世尊说“这就是终尽”等;这正是使欢喜等不存在的道,其寂止就是果;或者,彼出离就是涅槃,也就是贪随眠等的终尽、终结、不转起——这就是其含义。因此说“此……终尽”。所谓“一切处”,就是在“这就是嗔随眠的终尽”等一切处中。巴利
Kāraṇeti pavattipaccaye. Ekāyatanampi …pe… natthīti cakkhāyatanādi ekampi āyatanaṃ abhinanditabbaṃ abhivaditabbaṃ ajjhositabbañca natthi ce, nanu natthi eva, kasmā ‘‘natthi ce’’ti vuttanti? Saccaṃ natthi, appahīnābhinandanābhivadanaajjhosānānaṃ pana puthujjanānaṃ abhinanditabbādippakārāni āyatanāni hontīti tesaṃ na sakkā natthīti vattu, pahīnābhinandanādīnaṃ pana sabbathā natthīti ‘‘natthi ce’’ti vuttaṃ. Ahaṃ mamanti abhinanditabbanti diṭṭhābhinandanāya ‘‘aha’’nti taṇhābhinandanāya ‘‘mama’’nti rocetabbaṃ. Abhivaditabbanti abhinivisanasamuṭṭhāpanavasena vattabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ahaṃ mamanti vattabba’’nti. Ajjhositvāti diṭṭhi taṇhā vatthuṃ anupavisitvā gāhadvayaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ viya katvā. Tenāha ‘‘gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā’’ti. Etenāti ‘‘ettha ce natthī’’tiādivacanena. Etthāti āyatanesu. Taṇhādīnaṃ avatthubhāvadassanamukhena taṇhādīnaṃyeva appavattiṃ kilesaparinibbānaṃ kathitanti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘esevanto’’tiādi, ayameva abhinandanādīnaṃ natthibhāvakaro maggo, tappaṭippassaddhibhūtaṃ phalaṃ, taṃnissaraṇaṃ vā nibbānaṃ rāgānusayādīnaṃ anto avasānaṃ appavattīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ …pe… anto’’ti. Sabbatthāti ‘‘esevanto paṭighānusayānaṃ’’tiādīsu sabbapadesu.
“被取”是指以施加打击等方式而被抓住。“达到顶点的争吵”是指不只停留在一般的口角,而是以口舌如矛般刺伤等方式达到顶点的争吵。“以什么而做”表示关联,其余各句也是同样的道理。以相违的执取,就只是种种执取而已;同样,以相违的言论,就只是种种言论而已。如此生起的,是对本应恭敬的人也不恭敬,只是“你、你”这样生起的粗暴言语;以何种思而做,那思就是“你、你”。“依止”就是缘,意思是把它作为依止等条件。诸处成为烦恼生起的因相——有它们时烦恼才生起——这还可以,但怎么又能成为灭的因相呢?因为这里不包含出世间法,只指世间法。针对这种责难,所以说“即使是在它们灭时”等。为了说明只是在名称上称为因相,先说了“在哪里生起,就在那里灭去”,然后引经文来证明这个意思,说了“这个意义”等。巴利
Ādiyatīti pahāradānādivasena gayhati. Matthakappattaṃ kalahanti bhaṇḍanādimatte aṭṭhatvā mukhasattīhi vitudanādivasena matthakappattaṃ kalahaṃ. Yāya karotīti sambandho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Viruddhaggāhavasena nānāgāhamattaṃ, tathā viruddhavādavasena nānāvādamattaṃ. Evaṃ pavattanti garukātabbesupi gāravaṃ akatvā ‘‘tuvaṃ tuva’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ sārambhakathaṃ, yāya cetanāya yaṃ karoti, sā tuvaṃ tuvaṃ. Nissāyāti paṭicca, nissayādipaccaye katvāti attho. Kilesānaṃ uppattinimittatā tāva āyatanānaṃ hotu tabbhāve bhāvato, nirodhanimittatā pana kathaṃ. Na hettha lokuttaradhammānaṃ saṅgaho lokiyānaṃyeva adhippetattāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘nirujjhamānāpī’’tiādi. Nāmamattena nimittataṃ sandhāya vuttoti dassento ‘‘yatthuppannā, tattheva niruddhā hontī’’ti vatvā tamatthaṃ suttantarena sādhento ‘‘svāyamattho’’tiādimāha.
这里,“以集谛的提问”指的是《大念处经》中对集谛的解说。因为它是通过“在哪里生起”等提问方式展开的,所以被称为“提问”。有人可能会质疑:那里只说了渴爱的生起与灭尽,并没有说一切烦恼的灭尽。为了显示这种责难根本没有立足之地,所以说了“正如……”。通过“得称”这个词,指出:因为涅槃是贪等不转起的原因,所以涅槃才被共称为“边际”。由此也应当看到,这解释了“没有欢喜等”。那么,在超越一切有为法的涅槃中,不善法怎么可能有灭呢?回答说:“凡在某处不存在,就在那里被称为‘灭’。”这种在不转起的状态下称为“灭”的说法,其含义应当通过“灭的提问”来说明。因为在涅槃中,并不是说“寻与伺生起后又灭去、止息了”,而是说它们根本不转起。巴利
Tattha samudayasaccapañhenāti mahāsatipaṭṭhāne samudayasaccaniddesena. So hi ‘‘kattha uppajjamānā’’tiādinā pucchāvasena pavattattā pañhoti vutto. Nanu tattha taṇhāya uppattinirodhā vuttā, na sabbakilesānanti īdisī codanā anavakāsāti dassento ‘‘yatheva cā’’tiādimāha. Laddhavohāreti iminā rāgādīnaṃ appavattinimittatāya antoti samaññā nibbānassāti dasseti. Eteneva abhinandanādīnaṃ abhāvoti ca idaṃ saṃvaṇṇitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kathaṃ pana sabbasaṅkhatavinissaṭe nibbāne akusaladhammānaṃ nirodhasambhavoti āha ‘‘yañhi yattha natthi, taṃ tattha niruddhaṃ nāma hotī’’ti. Yvāyaṃ appavattiyaṃ nirodhavohāro vutto, svāyamattho nirodhapañhena dīpetabbo. Na hi tattha uppajjitvā niruddhā vitakkavicārā paṭippassaddhāti vuttā, atha kho appavattā evāti.
203 “如此具足”的意思是:具备这样完全的了知,应当这样看待,这就是我的请求。因此说“就是这样的”。“知所知者”:以一切知智了知一切应知。因为通过最高级的说明和不作简别的方式,“知”这个词无余地涵盖了一切应知的范围;因此,对于以这一切为对象的认知活动来说,一切知智正适合作为它的工具。或者,根据上下文,由于“世尊”一词紧接出现,这个意思也可以显明。“见应见者”:以天眼、慧眼、法眼、佛眼、普眼这些智眼,确实见到应当见到的。另一种解释:“知所知者”——其他那些有颠倒、主张遍知欲与色的人虽然也在认知,却是以颠倒的方式认知,世尊则不是这样。世尊因为断除了颠倒,所以知就是如实而知;因为不存在错见,所以见就是如实而见。“以引导看见之义而成为眼”:就像肉眼引导众生去看那样,由于世尊成就了让世间如实看见,所以在履行观看功能的引导意义上,他成为“眼”;或者说,他拥有慧眼,或者透过自生智圆满了慧眼,所以称为“眼”。“成为智体者”也应同样理解。或者,菩提分法使他成为法的体,因为这些法从他生起,世间也因他而生起这些法;或者他证得了不与他人共的法,所以是“法体者”。“梵”指的是道,因为他生起了道,也令世间生起此道,并且以自生智证得此道,所以他成为“梵体者”。他宣说四圣谛法,所以是“说者”。他长久地令证谛之法持续运转而宣说,所以是“运转者”。“取出义”:拔出苦等之义,在苦等中又拔出逼迫等义。或者,他令人达到究竟义、涅槃,令众生生起对不死的证得,所以把不死给予人,成为“不死的施予者”。因为菩提分法等完全依赖他,所以他成为“法主”。巴利
203.Evaṃsampadanti evaṃsampajjanakaṃ evaṃ passitabbaṃ idaṃ mama ajjhesanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘īdisanti attho’’ti. Jānaṃ jānātīti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.10.113-116) sabbaññutaññāṇena jānitabbaṃ sabbaṃ jānāti. Ukkaṭṭhaniddesena hi avisesaggahaṇena ca ‘‘jāna’’nti iminā niravasesaṃ ñeyyajātaṃ pariggaṇhātīti tabbisayāya jānanakiriyāya sabbaññutaññāṇameva karaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttaṃ. Atha vā pakaraṇavasena ‘‘bhagavā’’ti saddantarasannidhānena cāyamattho vibhāvetabbo. Passitabbameva passatīti dibbacakkhu-paññācakkhu-dhammacakkhu-buddhacakkhu-samantacakkhu-saṅkhātehi ñāṇacakkhūhi passitabbaṃ passati eva. Atha vā jānaṃ jānātīti yathā aññe savipallāsā kāmarūpapariññāvādino jānantāpi vipallāsavasena jānanti, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana pahīnavipallāsattā jānanto jānāti eva, diṭṭhidassanassa ca abhāvā passanto passatiyevāti attho. Dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhenāti yathā cakkhu sattānaṃ dassanatthaṃ pariṇeti, evaṃ lokassa yāthāvadassanasādhanato dassanakiccapariṇāyakaṭṭhena cakkhubhūto, paññācakkhumayattā vā sayambhuñāṇena paññācakkhuṃ bhūto pattoti vā cakkhubhūto. Ñāṇabhūtoti etassa ca evameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Dhammā vā bodhipakkhiyā tehi uppannattā lokassa ca taduppādanato, anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vā dhammaṃ pattoti dhammabhūto. Brahmā vuccati maggo tena uppannattā lokassa ca taduppādanattā, tañca sayambhuñāṇena pattoti brahmabhūto. Catusaccadhammaṃ vadatīti vattā. Ciraṃ saccapaṭivedhaṃ pavattento vadatīti pavattā. Atthaṃ nīharitvāti dukkhādiatthaṃ tatthāpi pīḷanādiatthaṃ uddharitvā. Paramatthaṃ vā nibbānaṃ pāpayitā, amatasacchikiriyaṃ sattesu uppādento amataṃ dadātīti amatassa dātā. Bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ tadāyattabhāvato dhammassāmī.
204 204. 如果这段略说也适用于他本人,长老就说“我们确实……”。因为佛陀的教导是遍及一切世间的。现在,为了先显示那些使“虚妄分别之想”在一个人身上生起的门与所缘,为了说明“虚妄分别之想”,经文以“眼与……”等开始,来阐明依六处分别所作的解释。其中,“以依止的方式”是指以依止缘的方式。而依止缘只属于净色眼,不是指十四种所生色或四十四种所生色所构成的复合眼,所以说“缘眼净色而”。“以所缘的方式”是指以所缘缘的方式。而所缘缘可以是四因所生色中的任何一种,所以说“缘四因生色而”。巴利
204. So vā uddeso attanopi hotīti thero ‘‘yaṃ kho no’’ti āha. Sabbalokasādhāraṇā hi buddhānaṃ desanāti. Idāni yehi dvārārammaṇehi purisaṃ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti, tāni tāva dassento papañcasaññāsaṅkhā dassetuṃ yena saḷāyatanavibhaṅgena niddeso kato, tassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhuñcā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha nissayabhāvenāti nissayapaccayabhāvena. Nissayapaccayo ca pasādacakkhuyeva hoti, na cuddasasambhāraṃ, catucattālīsasambhāraṃ vā sasambhāracakkhunti āha ‘‘cakkhupasādañca paṭiccā’’ti. Ārammaṇabhāvenāti ārammaṇapaccayabhāvena. Ārammaṇapaccayo ca catusamuṭṭhānikarūpesu yaṃ kiñci hotīti āha ‘‘catusamuṭṭhānikarūpe ca paṭiccā’’ti.
在这里,眼对于眼识来说,即使只是单独一个法,也能成为它的缘;而色处却是许多个法聚合在一起。为了说明这个差别,就按“依止”的角度说“缘眼净色”,按“所缘”的角度说“缘四因所生色”,这样在说法上作了区分。那么,为什么眼对于识可以只是单独一个缘,而色却必须是许多个法聚合呢?这是因为它们作为缘的方式不同。眼作为眼识的缘,是依止缘、前生缘、根缘、不相应缘;它只是靠自身的存在来作缘——有眼才有这个识,没有眼就没有这个识。所以说,眼是以有缘和不离去缘来作它的缘。再者,识依止于眼,不能理解成识有一部分附着在眼上那样,因为识是无色的。而应当像弟子依赖老师、臣属依赖国王那样,识是随着眼而转起的。至于其他的缘,则要按各自不同的特点来理解。巴利
Ettha cakkhu ekampi viññāṇassa paccayo hoti, rūpāyatanaṃ pana anekameva saṃhatanti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ nissayabhāvena ‘‘cakkhupasādañca ārammaṇabhāvena catusamuṭṭhānikarūpe cā’’ti vacanabhedo kato. Kiṃ pana kāraṇaṃ cakkhu ekampi viññāṇassa paccayo hoti, rūpaṃ pana anekamevāti? Paccayabhāvavisesato. Cakkhu hi cakkhuviññāṇassa nissayapurejātaindriyavippayuttapaccayehi paccayo hontaṃ atthibhāveneva hoti tasmiṃ sati tassa bhāvato, asati abhāvato, yato taṃ atthiavigatapaccayehissa paccayo hotīti vuccati, tannissitatā cassa na ekadesena allīyanavasena icchitabbā arūpabhāvato. Atha kho garurājādīsu sissarājapurisādīnaṃ viya tappaṭibaddhavuttitāya, itare pana paccayā tena tena visesena veditabbā.
如果这种缘的作用不能在单一法上成立,那么为了说明即使单独一个眼也能成为眼识的缘,经文就以单数形式说:“贤友,缘于眼。”而色虽然也和眼一样,通过前生缘、有缘、不离去缘而成为缘——也就是先已生起,在存在的刹那提供助益——但它因为是所缘,所以必须由多个色法聚合起来才能成为缘。凡是识所显现的、作为缘的法,无论是具有自性的真实法,还是仅仅被构想的影像,当识生起时,它就在呈现那个法。虽然其他法也能作为缘,但对于这种具有取所缘性质的识来说,没有所缘就不能生起,所以那个作为它生起所依托、可被执取的对象,就叫做所缘。由于识是以这种方式获得所缘缘的自性,所以眼识依色而生起时,所显现的正是那个色的自性。而依赖眼根而转起的识,在把握所缘的自性时,并不是以缺一两个色聚或几个色聚的色相为所缘,而是以与作意相应、现在面前的色相为所缘。因此,为了说明色必须由多个法聚合,并以聚合的力量成为识的缘,经文才用复数说:“缘于诸色,眼识生起。”巴利
Sacāyaṃ paccayabhāvo na ekasmiṃ na sambhavatīti ekampi cakkhu cakkhuviññāṇassa paccayo hotīti dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘cakkhuñcāvuso, paṭiccā’’ti ekavacanavasena vuttaṃ. Rūpaṃ pana yadipi cakkhu viya purejātaatthi-avigatapaccayehi paccayo hoti puretaraṃ uppannaṃ hutvā vijjamānakkhaṇe eva upakārakattā tathāpi anekameva saṃhataṃ hutvā paccayo hoti ārammaṇabhāvato. Yañhi paccayadhammaṃ sabhāvabhūtaṃ, parikappitākāramattaṃ vā viññāṇaṃ vibhāventaṃ pavattati, tadaññesañca satipi paccayabhāve so tassa sārammaṇasabhāvatāya yaṃ kiñci anālambhitvā pavattituṃ asamatthassa olubbhapavattikāraṇabhāvena ālambanīyato ārammaṇaṃ nāma, tassa yasmā yathā tathā sabhāvūpaladdhi viññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayalābho, tasmā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ rūpaṃ ārabbha pavattamānaṃ tassa sabhāvaṃ vibhāventameva pavattati. Sā cassa indriyādhīnavuttikassa ārammaṇasabhāvūpaladdhi na ekadvikalāpagatavaṇṇavasena hoti, nāpi katipayakalāpagatavaṇṇavasena, atha kho ābhogānurūpaṃ āpāthagatavaṇṇavasenāti anekameva rūpaṃ saṃhaccakāritāya viññāṇassa paccayo hotīti dassento ‘‘rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’nti bahuvacanavasenāha.
《发趣论》(1.1.2 缘分别)中说:“色处对眼识界以及与它相应的诸法,以所缘缘为缘。”这句话是针对什么样的色处能成为眼识的所缘缘而说的。那是什么样的色处呢?就是“聚合起来的”——这个意思很明白。这样理解之后,有些人主张“眼识等是以对处的观照作用为观照对象,而不是以具有自性的观照作用为对象”,他们这话也就说得通了。在这里不应该怀疑所缘是聚合体,因为并没有对聚合体的作意;不过,聚合在一起的种种色法确实能成为所缘缘。有人问:单个色法没有能力成为所缘缘,聚合起来怎么就能成为所缘缘呢?难道盲人不能单个看见,聚合起来就能看见吗?这种质疑并不成立,因为有些人各自力量不够,但一起抬轿子时就能显出力量,这是看得见的。又比如毛发等物,放在某个位置时,单根毛发的颜色无法被辨认,而在同一位置聚集起来时就能辨认,这更加说明它们聚合起来才能起作用。由此可知,“眼识的所缘是极微色,还是极微色的聚合体”这类责难已经被驳斥了。“贤友,缘于耳”等经文,也应该按这个道理来理解。眼识是这样的:以依止眼根而了知色法为特征的眼识生起。巴利
Yaṃ pana paṭṭhāne (paṭṭhā. 1.1.2 paccayaniddesa) ‘‘rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātuyā taṃsampayuttakānañca dhammānaṃ ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ yādisaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayo, tādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kīdisaṃ pana tanti ? Samuditanti pākaṭoyamattho. Evañca katvā yadeke vadanti ‘‘āyatanasallakkhaṇavasena cakkhuviññāṇādayo sallakkhaṇavisayā, na drabyasallakkhaṇavasenā’’ti, tampi suvuttameva hoti. Na cettha samudāyārammaṇatā āsaṅkitabbā samudāyābhogasseva abhāvato, samuditā pana vaṇṇadhammā ārammaṇapaccayā honti. Kathaṃ pana paccekaṃ asamatthā samuditā ārammaṇapaccayā honti. Na hi paccekaṃ daṭṭhuṃ asakkontā andhā samuditā passantīti? Nayidamekantikaṃ visuṃ visuṃ asamatthānampi sivikāvahanādīsu samatthatāya dassanato. Kesādīnañca yasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitānaṃ paccekaṃ vaṇṇaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkā, tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne samuditānaṃ taṃ gahetuṃ sakkāti bhiyyopi tesaṃ saṃhaccakāritā paribyattā. Etena kiṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa paramāṇurūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ, udāhu taṃsamudāyotiādikā codanā paṭikkhittāti veditabbā. ‘‘Sotañca, āvuso, paṭiccā’’tiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nāmāti cakkhunissitarūpavijānanalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nāma uppajjati.
“三者的和合”,就是眼、色、眼识这三者的和合与聚集。称为“触”——它虽然也是非色法,但因为是以接触所缘的方式生起,所以具有“接触”的特征,这样的法就名为“触”而生起。依俱生等方式,就是:与眼识相应的触,依俱生、相互等缘而为缘;前一个触依无间等缘而为缘;其余的触依亲依止缘而为缘——由于触作为缘、作为触之因,受便生起。就在领纳的同一时刻,对所缘的识别也发生了,所以说“那受所领纳的所缘,想就识别它”。这里指的是眼门诸法。不过,当随着这些法而次第生起的受等被执取时,“由于……”是表示原因的用法:因为领纳了所缘,所以识别它。若没有感受,任何时候都不可能有想的生起。其余几句也是同样的道理。因为想,按照它所识别的方式,把存在或不存在的所缘通过寻去构画;又按照所构画的那样,以见、渴爱、慢、妄执去加以计度,从而进行戏论。因此经中说“他由地想而识知地”“由地想而识知地之后而计度地”等等,又说“在诸见中构画思择,他们说这是真、那是假”。这段释义是就能力圆满的戏论方式而作的;但在义注中,则是就力量微弱的方式来说的。巴利
Tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyāti cakkhu, rūpaṃ, cakkhuviññāṇanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyā samodhānena. Phasso nāmāti arūpadhammopi samāno ārammaṇe phusanākāreneva pavattanato phusanalakkhaṇo phasso nāma dhammo uppajjati. Sahajātādivasenāti cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttāya sahajātaaññamaññādivasena, anantarāya anantarādivasena, itarāya upanissayavasena paccayabhāvato phassapaccayā phassakāraṇā vedanā uppajjati. Anubhavanasamakālameva ārammaṇassa sañjānanaṃ hotīti ‘‘tāya vedanāya yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vedeti, tadeva saññā sañjānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Cakkhudvārikā dhammā idhādhippetāti tadanusārena pana aparāparuppannānaṃ vedanādīnaṃ gahaṇe sati, yanti vā kāraṇavacanaṃ, yasmā ārammaṇaṃ vedeti, tasmā taṃ sañjānātīti attho. Na hi asati vedayite kadāci saññuppatti atthi. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Saññāya hi yathāsaññātaṃ vijjamānaṃ, avijjamānaṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ vitakkavasena parikappeti, yathāparikappitañca taṃ diṭṭhitaṇhāmānamaññanāhi maññamāno papañcetīti vutto. Tenevāha ‘‘pathaviṃ pathavito sañjānā’’ti, ‘‘pathaviṃ pathavito saññatvā pathaviṃ maññatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.2), ‘‘takkañca diṭṭhīsu pakappayitvā, saccaṃ musāti dvayadhammamāhū’’ti (su. ni. 892; mahāni. 121) ca. Balappattapapañcavasenevāyamatthavaṇṇanā katā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana paridubbalavasena.
以眼、色等为因,就是以眼识、触、受、想、寻这些作为因。虽然它们也可以不是因,但因为它们存在,所以这里还是把它们称为因。因为一旦已经被遍知,它们就不再是因了。所以说“未遍知之因”。也就是以三种遍知都还未遍知的事物为所依。“覆蔽”就是遮蔽、压倒。“俱生”在这里的意思是:也应该把非俱生的受、想包含进来,因为经中有“以眼触为缘,有受蕴,是善”这样的说法。如果这样的话,在讲“戏论”时,如果指的是与五门速行俱生的戏论,因为那些戏论以现在为所缘,为何还提到过去和未来?这是质问。另一方则以“因如是而生故”等来回答。这里说“因如是而生故”,意思是:就像现在出现时眼门中的戏论是这样生起的,在过去、未来时,它也是这样生起的,因此才执取过去和未来,而并不是由过去或未来的眼与色,令眼门中的那些戏论生起。巴利
Cakkhurūpādīhi kāraṇehīti cakkhuviññāṇaphassavedanāsaññāvitakkehi kāraṇabhūtehi. Akāraṇabhūtānampi tesaṃ atthitāya kāraṇaggahaṇaṃ. Pariññātā hi te akāraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘apariññātakāraṇa’’nti. Tīhipi pariññāhi apariññātavatthukaṃ. Abhibhavantīti ajjhottharanti. Sahajātā hontīti ettha ‘‘cakkhusamphassapaccayā vedanākkhandho atthi kusalo’tiādivacanato vedanāsaññā asahajātāpi gahetabbā. Yadi evanti ‘‘papañcetī’’ti ettha yadi pañcadvārajavanasahajātā papañcasaṅkhā adhippetā tāsaṃ paccuppannavisayattā, kasmā atītānāgataggahaṇaṃkatanti codeti. Itaro ‘‘tathā uppajjanato’’tiādinā pariharati. Tattha tathā uppajjanatoti yathā vattamānakāle, evaṃ atītakāle anāgatakāle ca cakkhudvāre papañcasaṅkhānaṃ uppajjanato atītānāgataggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, na atītesu, anāgatesu vā cakkhurūpesu cakkhudvārikānaṃ tāsaṃ uppajjanato.
贤友,在“缘于意”这句话里,意有两种:纯粹的有分,或者伴随转向的有分。因为说法有两种。在讲生起之门的时候,有分心动摇两次,就叫作意门,就像眼等被色等撞击时那样,因为它在那边成为更高一层识生起的门。在讲缘的时候,指的是伴随转向的有分,因为在“以意触为缘而有善”等说法里,想要说的是伴随转向的意触,而不是有分的意触,因为有分的意触根本不可能发生。这里依据第一种说法,所以说“意就是有分心”。关于“诸法”,是指三地法所缘,这是为了显示只有在自性法中才有烦恼生起。有些人这样说,那是不对的,因为对于那(烦恼)的所依——即使是概念——也有法所缘性,所以这样说。这里则是为了显示三地法也可得,所以说“三地法所缘”,并不是因为概念无所缘。应当这样接受,否则不善心生起就成了无所缘了。在讲生起之门的时候,像眼识等那样,转向也只是属于门的一类,所以说“意识或转向”。在讲缘的时候,则取转向,所以说“或速行”。为了在两种说法中显示诸法的俱生分别,说了“转向被取时”等。这才是真正恰当的,从究竟义上才是真正恰当的。巴利
Manañjāvuso, paṭiccāti ettha duvidhaṃ manaṃ kevalaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ, sāvajjanaṃ vā. Duvidhā hi kathā. Uppattidvārakathāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ calitaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ manodvāraṃ nāma, cakkhādi viya rūpādinā yena taṃ ghaṭṭitaṃ tattha upari viññāṇuppattiyā dvārabhāvato. Paccayakathāyaṃ sāvajjanabhavaṅgaṃ, ‘‘manosamphassapaccayā atthi kusalo’’tiādīsu hi sāvajjanamanosamphasso icchito, na bhavaṅgamanosamphasso asambhavato. Tattha paṭhamanayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘mananti bhavaṅgacitta’’nti. Dhammeti tebhūmakadhammārammaṇanti iminā sabhāvadhammesu eva kilesuppattīti keci, tadayuttaṃ tadupādānāyapi paññattiyā dhammārammaṇatāya vuttattā. Idha pana tebhūmakāpi dhammā labbhantīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘tebhūmakadhammārammaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, na paññattiyā anārammaṇattā. Evañcetaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, aññathā akusalacittuppādā anārammaṇā nāma siyuṃ. Uppattidvārakathāyaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādi viya āvajjanampi dvārapakkhikamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘manoviññāṇanti āvajjanaṃ vā’’ti. Paccayakathāyaṃ pana āvajjanaṃ gahitanti ‘‘javanaṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nayadvaye dhammānaṃ sahajātavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘āvajjanegahite’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yuttamevāti nippariyāyato yuttameva.
只要对缘的透彻通达还没有生起,诸法就只是通过概念施设的方式被知道有,并没有各各被分别施设,所以说“名为触的一个法生起”。他将这样施设触的概念之后,就会生起观照该对象的智。“此有故彼有”,是说在眼等这些缘存在时,这触等缘所生法就存在。依十二处门,就是依十二处的理趣,也就是缘起的理趣。依遮遣十二处门,就是“此无故彼无”,在以遮遣十二处的方式显示缘不存在、缘所生法也不存在的次第中。巴利
So yāva na paccayapaṭivedho sambhavati, tāva paññattimukheneva sabhāvadhammā paññāyanti paccekaṃ apaññāpaneti āha ‘‘phasso nāma eko dhammo uppajjatī’’ti. Evaṃ phassapaññattiṃ paññapessatīti paññapetvā tabbisayadassanaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppādessati. Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti imasmiṃ cakkhuādike paccaye sati idaṃ phassādikaṃ paccayuppannaṃ hoti. Dvādasāyatanavasenāti dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ vasena āgatena paṭiccasamuppādanayavasena. Dvādasāyatanapaṭikkhepavasenāti ‘‘imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hotī’’ti paccayābhāvapaccayuppannābhāvadassanakkame dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ paṭikkhepavasena.
这个问题是由声闻弟子解说的,因此你们不要有疑惑。或者,对于简要宣说的义理,由那位被尊为第一的大声闻弟子详细分别解说,因此对于这个问题你们不要有疑惑。不要像明明有黄金匠在场却自己去称量钱币那样,而要在世尊面前成为无疑惑者。巴利
Sāvakena pañho kathitoti ayaṃ pañho sāvakena kathito, iti iminā kāraṇena mā nikkaṅkhā ahuvattha. Atha vā saṃkhittena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārena vibhajantena etadagge ṭhapitena mahāsāvakena pañho kathitoti iminā kāraṇena etasmiṃ pañhe mā nikkaṅkhā ahuvattha, heraññike sati kahāpaṇaṃ sayaṃ nicchinantā viya ahutvā bhagavato eva santike nikkaṅkhā hotha.
205 205. “行相”:它们依各自的界限令果报生起,所以叫“行相”,也就是各种原因。“由各别的原因”这句话,是因为依六门而分别说明了戏论之因,所以才这样说。或者,虽然果报是由多少法共同生起,那些法要集合起来才成为原因,因为只有因缘和合才能产生果报,但每一法各自也都是它的原因,因此说“由各别的原因”。“以诸句”:指名等句,以及由它们集合而成的语句。因此说“以字母的聚合”。因为字母正是依言说相应,以句和语的形式,才对各种意义加以区分。“以诸音节”:因为能令意义显现,所以称为音节,也就是各种音声。而这些音节由于宣示文句之故,所以称为“字母”,因此说“以诸字母”。在这里应当这样贯通理解:依这些行相、这些句和音节,为了开示戏论的现行、轮回与还灭之义,而作了详细分别。“以智慧”:即依于智慧。为了显示智者的特相,如“尊者,怎样才算智者?比丘,于此有比丘是界善巧者……”等经句所说,因此说“以四种原因”等。此前已依谛现观显示了智者智慧;为了依无碍解显示大慧,所以说“于大义”等。巴利
205. Ākaronti phalaṃ tāya tāya mariyādāya nibbattentīti ākārā, kāraṇāni. Pāṭiyekkakāraṇehīti channaṃ dvārānaṃ vasena visuṃ visuṃ papañcakāraṇassa niddiṭṭhattā vuttaṃ. Atha vā yadipi yattakehi dhammehi yaṃ phalaṃ nibbattati, tesaṃ samuditānaṃyeva kāraṇabhāvo sāmaggiyāva phaluppattito, tathāpi paccekaṃ tassa kāraṇamevāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pāṭiyekkakāraṇehī’’ti. Padehīti nāmādipadehi ceva taṃsamudāyabhūtehi vākyehi ca. Tenāha ‘‘akkharasampiṇḍanehī’’ti. Akkharāniyeva hi atthesu yathāvaccaṃ padavākyabhāvena paricchijjanti. Byañjanehīti atthassa abhibyañjanato byañjanasaññitehi vaṇṇehi. Tāni pana yasmā pariyāyassa akkharaṇato ‘‘akkharānī’’ti vuccanti, tasmā āha ‘‘akkharehī’’ti. Ettha ca imehi ākārehi imehi padabyañjanehi papañcasamudācārassa vaṭṭassa ca vivaṭṭassa ca dassanaattho vibhattoti yojanā. Paṇḍiccenāti paññāya. ‘‘Kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, paṇḍito hoti ? Yato kho bhikkhu dhātukusalo ca hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.124) ādisuttapadavasena paṇḍitalakkhaṇaṃ dassento ‘‘catūhi vā kāraṇehī’’tiādimāha. Saccapaṭivedhavasena paṇḍiccaṃ dassitanti paṭisambhidāvasena mahāpaññataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mahante atthe’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“Guḷapūva”者,即掺合了糖蜜而制成的饼。“Baddhasattuguḷaka”者,即以蜜和糖粘结成团的炒麦粉团。“Asecitabbaka”者,因应先以蜜等与之混合,故不须再浇淋。“Cintakajātiko”者,即具有法思索之本性者。我将唯以一切知智:我就是要以一切知智让他了知这部经的功德之后,再为他取名。巴利
Guḷapūvanti guḷe missitvā katapūvaṃ. Baddhasattuguḷakanti madhusakkharāhi piṇḍīkataṃ sattupiṇḍaṃ. Asecitabbakaṃ madhuādinā pageva tehi samayojitabbattā. Cintakajātikoti dhammacintāya cintakasabhāvo. Sabbaññutaññāṇenevassāti sabbaññutaññāṇeneva assa suttassa guṇaṃ paricchindāpetvā nāmaṃ gaṇhāpessāmi.
《双寻经》注释巴利
9. Dvedhāvitakkasuttavaṇṇanā
206 分成一对一对:就是把它们分成两两一组。这里虽然按照“我把这一部分算作一类,把这一部分算作第二类”的说法,一切寻都只是按杂染和清净的区分分成两类,但因为它们不断反复生起、经常现行,所以经文里用重叠的说法“分为二类”来表达,因此就以重叠的方式说成“分成一对一对”。或者也可以说,因为这两类各自都具有直接相对性,世尊为了把每一对直接对立的两者分别清楚地把握,就说“应当把寻分为二类而住”。这样思惟之后,为了显示其中邪寻和正寻都无余地被把握而不混杂,世尊说“我把这一部分算作一类,把这一部分算作第二类”。“与欲相应的”:与名为欲贪的欲相应,或者与欲连结。其余诸项也与此相同。不过这里有差别:“心由此而恼害”故为瞋害,即瞋。以之伤害众生,或对众生的伤害,故为害,这是以损害他人的方式而转起的、与悲相对立的恶法的同义词。“内的”:是说以内法为所缘。“外的”:是说以外法为所缘。“粗的”:是与粗重的欲贪等相应。与此相反则是细的。“寻是不善一方的”:以此寻性共相及不善性共相,说明在那里也是摄为一类,并不是以同一心刹那生起等而摄为一类。巴利
206.Dvedve bhāgeti dve dve koṭṭhāse katvā. Kāmañcettha ‘‘imaṃ ekaṃ bhāgamakāsiṃ, imaṃ dutiyabhāgamakāsi’’nti vacanato sabbepi vitakkā saṃkilesavodānavibhāgena dveva bhāgā katā, aparāparuppattiyā panetesaṃ abhiṇhācāraṃ upādāya pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dvidhā katvā’’ti āmeḍitavacananti ‘‘dve dve bhāge katvā’’ti āmeḍitavacanavaseneva vutto. Atha vā bhāgadvayassa sappaṭibhāgatāya tattha yaṃ yaṃ dvayampi kho ujuvipaccanīkaṃ, taṃ taṃ visuṃ visuṃ gahetukāmo bhagavā āha ‘‘dvidhā katvā vitakke vihareyya’’nti. Evaṃ pana cintetvā tattha micchāvitakkānaṃ sammāvitakkānañca anavasesaṃ asaṅkarato ca gahitabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘imaṃ ekaṃ bhāgamakāsiṃ, imaṃ dutiyabhāgamakāsi’’nti avoca. Kāmapaṭisaṃyuttoti kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena sampayutto, kāmena paṭibaddho vā. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – byāpajjati cittaṃ etenāti byāpādo, doso. Vihiṃsati etāya satte, vihiṃsanaṃ vā tesaṃ etanti vihiṃsā, paresaṃ viheṭhanākārena pavattassa karuṇāpaṭipakkhassa pāpadhammassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ajjhattanti ajjhattadhammārammaṇamāha. Bahiddhāti bāhiradhammārammaṇaṃ. Oḷārikoti bahalakāmarāgādipaṭisaṃyutto. Tabbipariyāyena sukhumo. Vitakkoakusalapakkhikoyevāti iminā vitakkabhāvasāmaññena tatthāpi akusalabhāvasāmaññena ekabhāgakaraṇaṃ, na ekacittuppādapariyāpannatādivasenāti dasseti.
出离被称为初禅,因为它超越了贪欲;也被称为一切善法,因为它脱离了一切不善法。不过在这里,因为要表达的是欲寻的对立面,所以经文说“从诸欲中出离、与出离相应的寻”。这就是出离寻。从最初的作意开始,一直到初禅生起,在这期间生起的寻都属于出离寻。这里说到“初禅”为止,是因为在那之后寻就不存在了。心不会因此而被恼害,或者它是嗔的对立面,所以叫无嗔,它是慈心的前行阶段、修习慈心的起点。不会以此伤害众生,或者它是伤害的对立面,所以叫无害,它是悲悯的前行阶段、修习悲悯的起点。巴利
Nekkhammaṃ vuccati lobhātikkantattā paṭhamajjhānaṃ, sabbākusalehi nikkhantattā sabbaṃ kusalaṃ. Idha pana kāmavitakkapaṭipakkhassa adhippetattā āha ‘‘kāmehi nissaṭo nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko’’ti. Soti nekkhammavitakko. Yāva paṭhamajjhānāti paṭhamasamannāhārato paṭṭhāya yāva paṭhamajjhānaṃ etthuppanno vitakko nekkhammavitakkoyeva. Paṭhamajjhānanti ca idaṃ tato paraṃ vitakkābhāvato vuttaṃ. Na byāpajjati cittaṃ etena, byāpādassa vā paṭipakkhoti abyāpādo, mettāpubbabhāgo mettābhāvanārambho. Na vihiṃsanti etāya, vihiṃsāya vā paṭipakkhoti avihiṃsā, karuṇāpubbabhāgo karuṇābhāvanārambho.
大菩萨们从大出离的那一刻起,正思惟就得到了机会,一层比一层更殊胜、更明显地生起,所以经文说“六年……生起”。因为智慧还没有成熟,由于过去习气的力量,有时会因为失念而出现邪寻的杂染,为了说明这一点,经文说“因失念……住立”。就像一间长期关闭的房子,偶尔窗户一打开,风就趁机吹进里面;同样,即使菩萨守护着根门,由于失念而得到机会,不善寻也会生起,生起之后还截断了善法的相续而停在那里。于是大士立刻驱除那刚刚生起的寻,为了让它们将来不再生起,如实分辨“这些是邪寻,这些是正寻”,不给邪寻机会,而让正寻增长。因此说“这些是我的……”等等。巴利
Mahābodhisattānaṃ mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhantakālato paṭṭhāya laddhāvasarā sammāsaṅkappā uparūpari savisesaṃ pavattantīti āha ‘‘chabbassāni…pe… pavattiṃsū’’ti. Ñāṇassa aparipakkattā pubbavāsanāvasena satisammosato kadāci micchāvitakkalesopi hotiyevāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘satisammosena…pe… tiṭṭhantī’’ti āha. Yathā niccapihitepi gehe kadāci vātapāne vivaṭamatte laddhāvasaro vāto anto paviseyya, evaṃ guttindriyepi bodhisattasantāne satisammosavasena laddhāvasaro akusalavitakko uppajji, uppanno ca kusalavāraṃ pacchinditvā aṭṭhāsi, atha mahāsatto taṃmuhuttuppannameva paṭivinodetvā tesaṃ āyatiṃ anuppādāya ‘‘ime micchāvitakkā, ime sammāvitakkā’’ti yāthāvato te paricchinditvā micchāvitakkānaṃ avasaraṃ adento sammāvitakke parivaḍḍhesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mayhaṃ ime’’tiādi.
207 207. 所谓“放逸”,就是正念的背离,因此说“不放逸者”是指安住于正念不背离的人。“具足精勤”是指具有调伏烦恼之精进的人。“心已发出”是指为了从存在中解脱而将心放开,对身体和生命都不再顾恋的人。“如此成为本性”:他依着自己的身心生起了喜悦的状态,把它归入与世俗相连的喜悦那一类。这是因为他智慧广大,能见到微细之处。巴利
207. Pamādo nāma sativippavāsoti āha ‘‘appamattassāti satiyā avippavāse ṭhitassā’’ti. Ātāpavīriyavantassāti kilesānaṃ niggaṇhanavīriyavato. Pesitacittassāti bhavavimokkhāya vissaṭṭhacittassa kāye ca jīvite ca nirapekkhassa. ‘‘Evaṃ paṭipākatiko jāto’’ti attano attabhāvaṃ nissāya pavattaṃ somanassākāraṃ gehassitasomanassapakkhikaṃ akāsi, paññāmahantatāya sukhumadassitā.
未遍知而住是指没有安住在遍知之中,也就是未掌握遍知的意思。寻……等语,是说寻获得这三种名称:对于这样的人,生起的邪寻不能按各自情况说成是自害的、害他的或二者俱害的,而应说它不是自害的、害他的或二者俱害的,因为它没有超出自性——这就是这里的意旨。令慧灭去:由于它具有使未生的慧不生起、已生的慧衰退的征相,所以是令慧灭去。因此说未生的……等语。归于无有:是指以反思的力量将它镇伏断除。消灭等词说的也是同一个意思。而已离散等词,是说它像被连根拔起一样,在那个时候不再生起。巴利
Apariññāyaṃṭhitassāti na pariññāyaṃ ṭhitassa, apariggahitapariññassāti attho. Vitakko…pe… etāni tīṇi nāmāni labhatīti tādisassa uppanno micchāvitakko yathārahaṃ attabyābādhako ubhayabyābādhako ca na hotīti na vattabbo taṃ sabhāvānativattanatoti adhippāyo. Anuppannānuppādauppannaparihāninimittatāya paññaṃ nirodhetīti paññānirodhiko. Tenāha ‘‘anuppannāyā’’tiādi. Natthibhāvaṃ gacchatīti paṭisaṅkhānabalena vikkhambhanappahānamāha. Nirujjhatītiādīhipi tadeva vadati. Vigatantantiādīhi pana samūlaṃ uddhaṭaṃ viya tadā appavattanakaṃ akāsinti vadati.
208 心的变异状态,就是心的变样,也就是原本的心消失了。多种所缘的纷乱状态,就是散乱。在这里,心好像被寻思逼恼一样,所以说“执取它而作了害寻”。“悲悯”,说的是缘于他人的苦而心被触动。因此说:“当他人有苦时,善人的心被震撼,这就是悲。”这是就悲悯运作时心被撼动而言,才说“害寻生起”,并不是说对众生实际造成了伤害。这就是它的意思。巴利
208.Cittavipariṇāmabhāvo cittassa aññathattaṃ pakaticittavigamo. Anekaggatākāro vikkhepo. Tattha vitakkena cittaṃ vihaññamānaṃ viya hotīti āha ‘‘taṃ gahetvā vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ akāsī’’ti. Kāruññanti paradukkhanimittaṃ cittakhedaṃ vadati. Tenevāha – ‘‘paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ manaṃ kampetīti karuṇā’’ti (ma. ni. ṭī. 1.1; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1). Nti karuṇāyanavasena pavattacittapakampanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘uppajjati vihiṃsāvitakko’’ti āha, na sattesu vihiṃsā pavattatīti adhippāyo.
因为以这样那样的方式,比丘反复寻思、反复伺察,心就跟着朝向那个方式。所以经文说“在欲寻等当中”等等。“已舍断”是就时态错乱而说的,因此注释说“正在舍断”。不过,为了表明他的舍断因为对治已经成就而实际上已经成立,所以说“舍断了”,就像说“村民们享用了无主之物”一样。在“多所作”这里也是同样的道理。“就这样地倾向”:就是成为与欲寻相应的那个方式本身,或者以与欲寻相应的方式而转变。“耕作”就是耕田,意思是犁地;但因为谷物是由它产生的,所以用因来代指果,把谷物说成“田”,因此注释说“在谷物拥挤时”。“四种怖畏”是指杀害、捆绑、损失和斥责。“危难”是指产生不利的状况。“低劣”是指下劣的状态。“在自己的诸蕴上”,就是在自己的五蕴上。“堕入”,意思是烦恼的侵入。从杂染中净化就是清净,这清净本身就是洁净,所以说“洁净分,这就是它的同义词”。巴利
Tena tena cassākārenāti yena yena ākārena bhikkhunā anuvitakkitaṃ anuvicāritaṃ, tena tena ākārenassa cetaso nati hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘kāmavitakkādīsū’’tiādi. Pahāsīti kālavipallāsena vuttanti āha ‘‘pajahatī’’ti. Pahānaṃ panassa siddhameva paṭipakkhassa siddhattāti dassetuṃ ‘‘pahāsī’’ti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘asāmibhoge gāmikāādīyiṃsū’’ti. Bahulamakāsīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Evamevaṃ namatīti kāmavitakkasampayogākārameva hoti, kāmavitakkasampayuttākārena vā pariṇamati. Kasanaṃ kiṭṭhaṃ, kasīti attho, tannibbattattā pana kāraṇūpacārena sassaṃ ‘‘kiṭṭha’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘sassasambādhe’’ti. Cattāri bhayānīti vadhabandhajānigarahāni. Upaddavanti anatthuppādabhāvaṃ. Lāmakanti nihīnabhāvaṃ. Dhandhesūti attano khandhesu. Otāranti anuppavesaṃ kilesānaṃ. Saṃkilesato visujjhanaṃ visuddhi, sā eva vodānanti āha ‘‘vodānapakkhanti idaṃ tasseva vevacana’’nti.
209 一切善法就是出离,因为它与一切不善法对立,并且从那些不善法中脱离出来。只有涅槃才是出离,因为它从一切烦恼和一切有为法中脱离出来。就像谷物拥挤的地方,色等所缘在放逸时就成了产生祸患的处所。就像犄角牛,诡诈的心难以调伏。就像善巧的牧牛人,菩萨具备方便善巧。就像四种怖畏,邪寻有令人恐惧的性质。慧的增长是它的目的,所以是慧增长者。心被此恼害,就是恼害,就是心的痛苦;属于恼害一边的,就是恼害分;不属于恼害一边的,就是非恼害分。能导向涅槃的,就是能带来涅槃的。应被动摇,意思是应是掉举的、应是散乱的。我令其安立,就是我令其完全正确地安住。为了显示已安住的状态才叫善安立,所以说我令其平静等等。我令其平静,就是令与定对立的烦恼平息下来,把心安顿在行处上,令其平静。由成就无散乱而令心一境性,就是像善巧地把心安置在所缘上那样,我正确地、完全正确地令心专注,使之等持。因为这样等持的心已善巧地安住在所缘上,不会从那里跌落,所以说善安立的意思。勿令动摇,意思是勿被逼恼、勿被扰乱。巴利
209.Sabbakusalaṃnekkhammaṃ sabbākusalapaṭipakkhatāya tato nissaṭattā. Nibbānameva nekkhammaṃ sabbakilesato sabbasaṅkhatato ca nissaṭattā. Kiṭṭhasambādhaṃ viya rūpādiārammaṇaṃ pamāde sati anatthuppattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Kūṭagāvo viya kūṭacittaṃ duddamabhāvato. Paṇḍitagopālako viya bodhisatto upāyakosallayogato. Catubbidhabhayaṃ viya micchāvitakkā sappaṭibhayabhāvato. Paññāya vuddhi etassa atthīti paññāvuddhiko. Vihaññati cittaṃ etenāti vighāto, cetodukkhaṃ, tappakkhiko vighātapakkhiko, na vighātapakkhikoti avighātapakkhiko. Nibbānasaṃvattaniko nibbānavaho. Ugghātīyeyyāti uddhataṃ siyā vikkhittañca bhaveyyāti attho. Saṇṭhapemīti sammadeva paṭṭhapemi. Yathā pana ṭhapitaṃ saṇṭhapitaṃ nāma hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sannisīdāpemī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sannisīdāpemīti samādhipaṭipakkhe kilese sannisīdāpento cittaṃ gocarajjhatte sannisīdāpemi. Abyaggabhāvāpādakena ekaggaṃ karomi, yathā ārammaṇe suṭṭhu appitaṃ hoti, evaṃ sammā sammadeva ādahāmi samāhitaṃ karomi, yasmā tathāsamāhitaṃ cittaṃ suṭṭhu ārammaṇe āropitaṃ nāma hoti, na tato paripatati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘suṭṭhu āropemīti attho’’ti. Mā ugghātīyittāti mā haññittha, mā ūhataṃ atthāti attho.
210 “就是那寻……如前所说”:虽然这样看来,好像在道的那一刹那,因为具有三种形态,就把一个善寻说成了三种名称,但不应该这样理解。这是依据相续流转,以同一性的方式说“就是那寻,以与嗔恨相违的意义……”等等。因为在同类相续的善心中生起的寻,行相相同,就可以称为“就是那个”,就像说“就是那只鹧鸪,就是那些药草”一样。然而,大人当时的那些寻,并不是以不净、慈、悲为依托才这样说的。巴利
210.Soyeva…pe… vuttoti iminā kiñcāpi ekaṃyeva kusalavitakkaṃ maggakkhaṇe viya tividhattasambhavato tividhanāmikaṃ katvā dassitaṃ viya hoti, na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pabandhapavattañhi upādāya ekattanayena ‘‘soyeva byāpādapaccanīkaṭṭhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekajātiyesu hi kusalacittesu uppanno vitakko samānākāratāya so evāti vattabbataṃ labhati yathā ‘‘sā eva tittirī, tāni eva osadhānī’’ti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.19). Na hi tadā mahāpurisassa asubhamettākaruṇāsannissayā te vitakkā evaṃ vuttāti.
依靠等至,是指进入等至之后再从其中出来。观也还很稚嫩,这是把两者连起来说。身体会疲倦,是因为止和观都还稚嫩,在修习过程中前后都没能获得更殊胜的进展。因此说“心受到打击、受到恼害”。等至对观有很大的帮助,正如经中所说:“诸比丘,应当修习定,入定的人能如实知见。”巴利
Samāpattiṃnissāyāti samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā, tato vuṭṭhahitvāti attho. Vipassanāpi taruṇāti yojanā. Kāyo kilamati samathavipassanānaṃ taruṇatāya bhāvanāya pubbenāparaṃ visesassa alabbhamānattā. Tenāha ‘‘cittaṃ haññati vihaññatī’’ti. Vipassanāyabahūpakārāsamāpatti, tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘samādhiṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvetha, samāhito yathābhūtaṃ jānāti passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 4.99; 5.1071).
就像休息的地方能消除战士的疲劳,为了消除疲劳而用木板搭成的休息处,就叫作木板棚。然而,观对等至来说帮助更大,因为它能摧毁定的障碍,或者能摧破一切烦恼,使它们变得软弱无力。因此说:“当观产生了力量,也能保护等至,让它产生力量。”难道这样不会犯下互相依赖的过失吗?这并不是绝对的过失。为了说明在世间中通过互相依赖也能成就事情,所以说了“正如……”等话。巴利
Yathā vissamaṭṭhānaṃ yodhānaṃ parissamaṃ vinodeti, tathā parissamavinodanatthaṃ phalakehi kātabbaṃ vissamaṭṭhānaṃ phalakakoṭṭhako, samāpattiyā pana vipassanā bahukāratarā samādhiparipanthakānaṃ, sabbesampi vā kilesānaṃ vimathanena dubbalabhāvāpajjanato. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanā thāmajātā samāpattimpi rakkhati,thāmajātaṃ karotī’’ti. Nanu cevaṃ itarītarasannissayadoso āpajjatīti? Nayidamekantikaṃ, itarītarasannissayāpi kiccasiddhi loke labbhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“带到村边”是指被带到靠近村庄的地方。“这些牛”是说只需生起正念,就像应当守护牛一样,因为无需其他努力。“那时”是指止与观生起力量的阶段。针对随观迅速生起,才说“仅一次就登上了”;但实际上,随观是依次第逐渐登上的。巴利
Gāmantaṃ āhaṭesūti gāmasamīpaṃ upanītesu. Etāgāvoti sati uppādanamattameva kātabbaṃ yathā gāvo rakkhitabbā, tadabhāvato. Tadāti samathavipassanānaṃ thāmajātakāle. Anupassanānaṃ lahuṃ lahuṃ uppattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekappahāreneva āruḷhova hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, kameneva pana anupassanāpaṭipāṭiṃ ārohati.
215 215. 世尊这样开示了自己不放逸的修行道路,以及依此而得的、不共他人的殊胜功德;他先把因的圆满连同果的圆满一并开示出来,如今为了开示利益众生的圆满,才说了“犹如……”等话。在此应当这样理解前后的文义脉络。仅仅因为符合林的特征,就称为“林”。因为是大林,所以叫“pavana”。树木茂盛的林,就是“pavana”。所谓“四种轭”,就是饥饿、口渴、恐惧和邪行这四种轭。“安稳”就是没有灾厄。“带来吉祥、没有灾厄”,所以叫“sovatthiko”。能把喜乐引进墙内,所以叫“pītigamanīyo”。能去往饮喜乐的饮水处,所以叫“pītagamanīyo”。因为长着枝条等——也就是长满刺枝和刺藤的丛林。凡是不通向栖息处的,即使有水,也说不是路;其余的也因为不能前往饮喜乐,同样说不是路。用“等”字把稠密丛林也包括进来。在猎人的猎区里活动的鹿,叫“okacaro”,也就是岛鹿。因为在林间一见到鹿,就会和它们一起逃跑,所以有系着长绳的束缚。巴利
215. Evaṃ bhagavā attano appamādapaṭipadaṃ, tāya ca laddhaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ visesaṃ dassento hetusampattiyā saddhiṃ phalasampattiṃ dassetvā idāni sattūpakārasampattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādimāhāti evaṃ ettha anusandhi veditabbā. Araññalakkhaṇayoggamattena araññaṃ. Mahāvanatāya pavanaṃ. Pavaddhañhi vanaṃ pavanaṃ. Catūhi yogehīti jighacchāpipāsābhayapaṭipattisaṅkhātayogehi. Khemaṃ anupaddavataṃ. Suvatthiṃ anupaddavaṃ āvahatīti sovatthiko. Pītiṃ kuṭṭhiṃ gameti upanetīti pītigamanīyo. Pītaṃ pānatitthaṃ gacchatīti pītagamanīyo. Sākhādīhīti kaṇṭakasākhākaṇṭakalatāvanehi. Anāsayagāmitāya udakasanniruddhopi amaggo vutto, itarāni apītigamanīyatāyapi. Ādi-saddena gahanaṃ pariggaṇhāti. Okemigaluddakassa gocare caratīti okacaro, dīpakamigo. Araññe mige disvā tehi saddhiṃ palāyeyyāti dīgharajjubandhanaṃ.
“住在这里”是指鹿的栖息处,它们从那个栖息处沿着这条路出来。“在这里活动”是指在这个地方觅食。“在这里喝水”是指在这个饮水处喝水。“沿着这条路进入”是指沿着这条路进入那个饮水处。“堵住道路”是指堵住它们平常走的道路。当想要把林中的鹿一只不剩地全部杀掉时,暂时什么都不做。巴利
Idha vasantīti migānaṃ āsayaṃ vadati, tato āsayato iminā maggena nikkhamanti. Etthacarantīti etasmiṃ ṭhāne gocaraṃ gaṇhanti. Etthapivantīti etasmiṃ nipānatitthe udakaṃ pivanti. Iminā maggena pavisantīti iminā maggena nipānatitthaṃ pavisanti. Maggaṃ pidhāyāti pakatimaggaṃ pidahitvā. Na tāva kiñci karoti anavasese vanamige ghātetukāmo.
因为被无明挡住,所以失去了智慧,成了“因无明而不知”;被喜贪牵着走,就紧紧粘在色等所缘上。喜贪能引诱人,所以叫“okacara”;无明能让人迷惑,所以叫“okacārika”,这样用比喻来说明。“它们”指的就是这两个。所谓“用那段折下的树枝”,就是用那种气味更粗糙的折断树枝,把人的气味去掉,用那段树枝的气味来代替。所谓“已扫除”,就是已经打扫干净、擦拭干净了。巴利
Avijjāya aññāṇā hutvāti avijjāya nivutattā ñāṇarahitā hutvā, nandīrāgena upanītā rūpārammaṇādīni ābandhitvā. Palobhanato okacaraṃ nandīrāgoti. Byāmohanato okacārikaṃ avijjāti katvā dasseti. Tesanti okacarokacārikānaṃ. Sākhābhaṅgenāti tādisena lūkhataragandhena sākhābhaṅgena. Manussagandhaṃ apanetvā tassa sākhābhaṅgassa gandhena. Sammattoti sammajjito byāmuñcho.
佛陀们行走在安稳之道上、阻断邪道,这虽然对一切世间都普遍适用,但从实际含义来说,只是着眼于那些堪受调伏的众生。为了说明这一点,就说“像孔丹尼亚等堪能之人”。“拔出”,就是连根拔除、去掉,所以说“断成两截后丢弃”。“消灭”,就是令其不再显现,所以说“以一切方式彻底拔除”。“利益行处”,就是利益众生之事。巴利
Buddhānaṃ khemamaggavicaraṇaṃ kummaggapidhānañca sabbalokasādhāraṇampi atthato veneyyapuggalāpekkhamevāti dassento ‘‘aññātakoṇḍaññādīnaṃ bhabbapuggalāna’’nti āha. Ūhatoti samūhato nīhatoti āha ‘‘dvedhā chetvā pātito’’ti. Nāsitāti adassanaṃ gamitāti āha ‘‘sabbena sabbaṃ samugghāṭitā’’ti. Hitūpacāranti sattānaṃ hitacariyaṃ.
《寻行经》注释巴利
10. Vitakkasaṇṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
216 “以十善业道”这一说法,应当理解为只是举例说明。因为在这里,以轮回为基础的那类等至心并不被当作增上心,所以接着说“以观为基础的八等至心”。另一种解释是:为了说明只有被归入超人法范畴的心才能单独称为“本然心”,先说了“以十善业道生起的心,就只是心”,然后指出这里所说的增上心正是那种心,所以说“以观为基础的八等至心”。不过应当知道,这里并没有否定其他的说法。有些人认为:与观相应的心就是增上心。“以专精”是指以令未生者生起、令已生者增长的方式,持续不断地专精。“根本业处”是指常习业处。“执持而住”是指致力于修习。即使尚未达到修习的安止,也仍然是专精于增上心,因为在那里也依该词的使用而如此称呼。巴利
216.Dasakusalakammapathavasenāti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ vaṭṭapādakasamāpatticittassapi idha adhicittabhāvena anicchitattā. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanāpādakaaṭṭhasamāpatticitta’’nti. Atha vā anuttarimanussadhammasaṅgahitameva kevalaṃ ‘‘pakaticitta’’nti vattabbanti dassento ‘‘dasakusalakammapathavasena uppannaṃ cittaṃ cittamevā’’ti vatvā yadettha adhicittanti adhippetaṃ, taṃ tadeva dassento ‘‘vipassanāpādakaaṭṭhasamāpatticitta’’nti āha. Itarassa panettha vidhi na paṭisedhetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vipassanāya sampayuttaṃ adhicittanti keci. Anuyuttenāti anuppannassa uppādanavasena, uppannassa paribrūhanavasena anu anu yuttena. Mūlakammaṭṭhānanti pārihāriyakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Gahetvā viharantoti bhāvanaṃ anuyuñjanto. Bhāvanāya appanaṃ appattopi adhicittamanuyuttoyeva tadatthepi taṃsaddavohārato.
那些使所谓的果在生起之处犹如被预先构想的,那些就是相。因此说“是缘由”。在“时时”这一句中,“时”是具格词表达处格的意义,所以解释说“在每一个时候”。难道不是……乃至……应当不间断地作意吗?那为什么这样说呢?难道不是因为修习已经进入行道,世尊在开示去除灾患的方法时,以“五种相应当时时作意”这一教导作为开端吗?由于说了“致力于增上心者”,所以意思是:以不间断的方式投入并致力于修习的人,才叫作致力于增上心者——这是提问者的意图。另一方则这样说明:对于正在修习的初学者,有时会生起修习的随烦恼,为了净化心,应当按适当的时候作意这些相,所以导师说“时时”。为了说明这一点,才说了“在圣典中”等话。其中,“这些”就是指圣典中提到的五种相。“灾患”就是祸患。巴利
Yehi phalaṃ nāma yathā uppajjanaṭṭhāne pakappiyamānaṃ viya hoti, tāni nimittāni. Tenāha ‘‘kāraṇānī’’ti. Kālena kālanti ettha kālenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacananti āha ‘‘samaye samaye’’ti. Nanu ca…pe… nirantaraṃ manasi kātabbanti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu ca bhāvanāya vīthipaṭipannattā abbudanīharaṇavidhiṃ dassentena bhagavatā ‘‘pañca nimittāni kālena kālaṃ manasi kātabbānī’’ti ayaṃ desanā āraddhāti? ‘‘Adhicittamanuyuttenā’’ti vuttattā avicchedavasena bhāvanāya yuttappayutto adhicittamanuyutto nāmāti codakassa adhippāyo. Itaro bhāvanaṃ anuyuñjantassaādikammikassa kadāci bhāvanupakkilesā uppajjeyyuṃ, tato cittassa visodhanatthāya yathākālaṃ imāni nimittāni manasi kātabbānīti ‘‘kālena kāla’’nti satthā avocāti dassento ‘‘pāḷiyañhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha imānīti imāni pāḷiyaṃ āgatāni pañca nimittāni. Abbudanti upaddavaṃ.
与欲俱行、与贪相应,是指与渴爱之欲俱行、与欲贪相应。在可爱与不可爱、不加观察的对象中,是指在可爱的、可意的对象中,在不可爱的、不可意的对象中,以不平等、不正确的方式观察。所谓不加观察,是指依靠执著世俗生活的无明舍,对所缘作不恰当的把取。针对这一点经中说:“愚痴凡夫以眼见色之后生起舍……”等等。那些就是遍寻。从那个相之外的另一者,是指从那些欲俱行等不善寻生起的因之外,另一个新的相。因为经中说“作意者”,所以所缘,或如是先前生起的心之生起行相,就是相。依止于善的相,是指应作意、应于心安立、应依修习而思惟、或应于心相续中转移的善心生起之因。因为不净即是不净相。在诸行中,当欲俱行的寻生起时,应引来连接。如是,在“与瞋俱行”等中,应随宜引来那那词句而连接。无论何处,是指“在众生中、在诸行中”无论何处。五种法之近依,是指与五种法相关的近依。巴利
Chandasahagatā rāgasampayuttāti taṇhāchandasahagatā kāmarāgasampayuttā. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhaasamapekkhitesūti iṭṭhesu piyesu, aniṭṭhesu appiyesu, asamaṃ asammā pekkhitesu. Asamapekkhananti gehassitaaññāṇupekkhāvasena ārammaṇassa ayoniso gahaṇaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa puthujjanassā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.308). Te parivitakkā. Tato nimittato aññanti tato chandūpasaṃhitādiakusalavitakkuppattikāraṇato aññaṃ navaṃ nimittaṃ. ‘‘Manasikaroto’’ti hi vuttaṃ, tasmā ārammaṇaṃ, tādiso purimuppanno cittappavattiākāro vā nimittaṃ. Kusalanissitaṃ nimittanti kusalacittappavattikāraṇaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ citte ṭhapetabbaṃ, bhāvanāvasena cintetabbaṃ, cittasantāne vā saṅkamitabbaṃ. Asubhañhi asubhanimittanti. Saṅkhāresu uppanne chandūpasaṃhite vitakketi ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘dosūpasañhite’’tiādīsu yathārahaṃ taṃ taṃ padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Yattha katthacīti ‘‘sattesu saṅkhāresū’’ti yattha katthaci. Pañcadhammūpanissayoti pañcavidho dhammūpasaṃhito upanissayo.
像这样,为了把“与欲俱行”等句所简略说到的义理详细展示出来,就开始说“这个人的双手美丽”等等。其中,先说了“应当以不净来观照”,为了展示观照的方式,就说“你在什么地方染着?”由肤色贪,是指因为对肤色的贪着,而呈现黑、褐等颜色。充满腐尸果,是指装满了成熟的尸体果实。也有写成“充满黑果”的读法。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘chandūpasañhite’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa hatthā vā sobhanā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘asubhatoupasaṃharitabba’’nti vatvā upasaṃharaṇākārassa dassanaṃ ‘‘kimhi sārattosī’’ti. Chavirāgenāti chavirāgatāya kāḷasāmādivaṇṇanibhāya. Kuphaḷapūritoti pakkehi kuṇapaphalehi puṇṇo. ‘‘Kaliphalapūrito’’ti vā pāṭho.
因为无主和只是暂时存在的缘故,这样作意:这个钵会逐渐变色、变旧,成为满是破洞或破裂,最后变成碎片。这件袈裟也会逐渐变色、变旧,变成擦脚的布,最后可用杖端丢弃。如果它们有主人,就不会让它们这样毁坏。就像这样,因为无主的缘故,以及因为“这是不持久的、只是暂时存在的”这样暂时存在的缘故,而作意。巴利
Assāmikatāvakālikabhāvavasenāti idaṃ pattaṃ anukkamena vaṇṇavikārañceva jiṇṇabhāvañca patvā chiddāvachiddaṃ bhinnaṃ vā hutvā kapālaniṭṭhaṃ bhavissati. Idaṃ cīvaraṃ anupubbena vaṇṇavikāraṃ jiṇṇatañca upagantvā pādapuñchanacoḷakaṃ hutvā yaṭṭhikoṭiyā chaḍḍanīyaṃ bhavissati. Sace pana nesaṃ sāmiko bhaveyya, na nesaṃ evaṃ vinassituṃ dadeyyāti evaṃ assāmikabhāvavasena, ‘‘anaddhaniyaṃ idaṃ tāvakālika’’nti evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvavasena ca manasikaroto.
应当通过《折伏愤恨经》等所述的方法来消除愤恨,然后修习慈心。具体来说,就像《折伏愤恨经》(《增支部》5.161)里说的:“比丘们,有五种折伏愤恨的方法。比丘在哪里生起了愤恨,就应当在那里彻底把它折伏。”还要按照《锯喻教诫》(《中部》1.222-233)和《尸炭喻经》(《如是语》91)等经典所说的方式,先消除愤恨,再修习慈心。巴利
Āghātavinaya…pe… bhāvetabbāti – ‘‘pañcime, bhikkhave, āghātapaṭivinayā. Yattha hi bhikkhuno uppanno āghāto sabbaso paṭivinetabbo’’tiādinā nayena āgatassa āghātavinayasuttassa (a. ni. 5.161) ceva kakacūpamovāda(ma. ni. 1.222-233) chavālātūpamādīnañca (itivu. 91) vasena āghātaṃ paṭivinodetvā mettā bhāvetabbā.
依止师长而住,就是依靠师长而居住。诵授,就是让人诵持教法,也自己诵持。对所诵持的进行提问,就是对已经受持的法询问其含义。依五种法而近依,就是依靠依止师长等五种法。痴界,就是痴。巴利
Garusaṃvāsoti garuṃ upanissāya vāso. Uddesoti pariyattidhammassa uddisāpanañceva uddisanañca. Uddiṭṭhaparipucchananti yathāuggahitassa dhammassa atthaparipucchā. Pañca dhammūpanissāyāti garusaṃvāsādike pañca dhamme paṭicca. Mohadhātūti moho.
“应依止”就是应当亲近依靠,或者也可以写作“应依止”这个读法。“凡已准备好者”,意思是对于进村、告假请示等事务已经努力投入、已经准备妥当。“那时他的痴便被断除”,是说这位比丘这样在那里相应努力之后,后来那个痴就消失了。“如是”也是如此,意思是也通过在诵习中不放逸。“又如是”,意思是再通过追问法义来消除疑惑也是如此。在那些地方,义理变得清楚,意思是听闻正法时,在那些段落中——“这里讲的是戒,这里讲的是定,这里讲的是慧”——相应的义理就变得分明。这个是眼、色、光明等,是眼识的原因;那个是稻种、土地、水等,是稻芽的原因。“这不是原因”,意思是眼、色、光明等对耳识来说不是原因,稻种等对稗子芽来说也不是原因。这样,就成为善于判定“是处与非处”的人。巴利
Upanissitabbāti upanissayitabbā, ayameva vā pāṭho. Yattappaṭiyattoti yatto ca gāmappavesanāpucchākaraṇesu ussukkaṃ āpanno sajjito ca hotīti attho. Athassa moho pahīyatīti assa bhikkhuno evaṃ tattha yuttappayuttassa pacchā so moho vigacchati. Evampīti evaṃ uddese appamajjanenapi. Puna evampīti atthaparipucchāya kaṅkhāvinodanepi. Tesu tesu ṭhānesu attho pākaṭo hotīti suyyamānassa dhammassa tesu tesu padesu ‘‘idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā’’ti so so attho vibhūto hoti. Idaṃ cakkhurūpālokādi imassa cakkhuviññāṇassa kāraṇaṃ, idaṃ sālibījabhūmisalilādi imassa sāliaṅkurassa kāraṇaṃ. Idaṃ na kāraṇanti tadeva cakkhurūpālokādi sotaviññāṇassa, tadeva sālibījādi kudrusakaṅkurassa na kāraṇanti ṭhānāṭṭhānavinicchaye cheko hoti.
于诸所缘就是指诸业处。这些寻是指欲寻等。若认为一切善法都对治一切不善法,而应说它们被断除,但并非一切善法都是一切不善法的直接对立面,所以便带着疑虑说被断除故。因此才说这些等话。巴利
Ārammaṇesūti kammaṭṭhānesu. Ime vitakkāti kāmavitakkādayo. Sabbe kusalā dhammā sabbākusalapaṭipakkhāti katvā ‘‘pahīyantī’’ti vattabbe na sabbe sabbesaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhūtāti ‘‘pahīyanti evā’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ vadati. Tenāha ‘‘imānī’’tiādi.
“依于善”:就是依靠善、应当依止善。“是善的缘”:这是同一个意思的另一种说法,说的是善生起的原因,也就是前面讲的不净相等。“心材板”:指栴檀木做的心材板。“不平的楔子”:指以不平整的方式安在那里的楔子。“应击打”:就是应当敲打它,把它拔出来。巴利
Kusalanissitanti kusalena nissitaṃ nissayitabbaṃ. Kusalassa paccayabhūtanti tasseva vevacanaṃ, kusaluppattikāraṇaṃ yathāvuttaasubhanimittādimeva vadati. Sāraphalaketi candanamaye sāraphalake. Visamāṇinti visamākārena tattha ṭhitaṃ āṇiṃ. Haneyyāti pahareyya nikkhāmeyya.
217 病:就是生病,被恶臭逼迫所困扰。苦:就是已经生起了痛苦。也由于这个原因:这些不善法是依不善巧而生,是善的对立面,是与居家之病相应的病态,因此被智者呵责、令人厌恶、有过失;又因会带来不可意的果报,因必然导致毫无滋味,所以是苦的异熟。就这样,以种种理由审察不善等的状态。巴利
217.Aṭṭoti āturo, duggandhabādhatāya pīḷito. Dukkhitoti sañjātadukkho. Imināpi kāraṇenāti akosallasambhūtatāya kusalapaṭipakkhatāya gehassitarogena sarogatāya ca ete akusalā viññugarahitabbatāya jigucchanīyatāya ca sāvajjā aniṭṭhaphalatāya nirassādasaṃvattaniyatāya ca dukkhavipākāti evaṃ tena tena kāraṇena akusalādibhāvaṃ upaparikkhato.
“ 难陀,你看这身体,病痛不断、污秽不净、腐烂发臭;
这具身体上下都在流脓淌水,愚痴的人却对它满心欢喜。”巴利
‘‘Āturaṃ asuciṃ pūtiṃ, passa nande samussayaṃ; Uggharantaṃ paggharantaṃ, bālānaṃ abhinandita’’nti. (apa. therī 2.4.157) –
诸如此类,或通过谈论厌离身体等;“等”这个字还包括:巴利
Evamādi kāyavicchandanīyakathādīhi vā. Ādi-saddena –
“ 对愤怒者再发怒,那个人反而更糟;
面对愤怒却不以愤怒回击,他就能赢得那场难以取胜的战斗。”巴利
‘‘Tasseva tena pāpiyo, yo kuddhaṃ paṭikujjhati; Kuddhaṃ appaṭikujjhanto, saṅgāmaṃ jeti dujjaya’’nti. (theragā. 442) –
像这样,平息嗔怒的谈论等也都包括在内。巴利
Evamādi paṭighavūpasamanakathādikāpi saṅgaṇhāti.
218 218. “没有忆念”是指不存在、不随念。“不作意”就是不作意。“取了业处之后应当坐下”,意思是只以对业处的作意而坐。“已领受的法谈连缀”是指对业处有帮助的法谈汇编。“手量书”就是手掌大小、可以随身携带的小册子。“以完全作意者”就是全然作意的人。“没有机会”,是说对已经着手修行的人,因为必须把修行完成,所以没有空闲。“已着手的是走到终点,还是不开始”,这是上座部的说法。“他的”指亲教师的。清扫山洞是身业;为了压制寻而开始诵读《相应部》,是语业;为了完成应做之事而先做火遍的准备——他这样积累三种业。长老了解他的习性和遍处的殊胜之后,就说“在这个精舍里……”等等。因此,他所想要的一切都得以成办。名为“无念品”,是因为通过无念来说明寻的压制。巴利
218. Na saraṇaṃ asati, ananussaraṇaṃ. Amanasikaraṇaṃ amanasikāro. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisīditabbanti kammaṭṭhānamanasikāreneva nisīditabbaṃ. Uggahito dhammakathāpabandhoti kammaṭṭhānassa upakāro dhammakathāpabandho. Muṭṭhipotthakoti muṭṭhippamāṇo pārihāriyapotthako. Samannānentenāti samannāharantena. Okāso na hoti āraddhassa pariyosāpetabbato. Āraddhassa antagamanaṃ anārambhovāti theravādo. Tassāti upajjhāyassa. Pabbhārasodhanaṃ kāyakammaṃ, ārabhanto eva vitakkaniggaṇhanatthaṃ saṃyuttanikāyasajjhāyanaṃ vacīkammaṃ, dassanakiccapubbakammakaraṇatthaṃ tejokasiṇaparikammanti tīṇi kammāni ācinoti. Thero tassa āsayaṃ kasiṇañca savisesaṃ jānitvā ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre’’tiādimavoca. Tenassa yathādhippāyaṃ sabbaṃ sampāditaṃ. Asatipabbaṃ nāma asatiyā vitakkaniggahaṇavibhāvanato.
219 寻根分别品:辨明寻的根本以及这根本的根本,这就是寻根分别品。造作寻,就是寻的造作,也就是寻的缘——对于净相等对象,以净等的方式生起不如理作意。这个寻的造作安住在这里,所以叫寻行安住,也就是在不净中起净想这类想颠倒。因此说,应当作意诸寻的根本和根本的根本。“趣向诸寻根本之根本”,是指以审察的方式,用智慧趣向,去探究诸邪寻生起的根本原因。当他如实了知之后,诸寻就像先前那样不再频频生起,所以说寻的现行变得松缓。寻的现行松缓之后,便逐渐达到坚固,终于到达顶点——正如前面所说,也就是在它趋向诸寻根本的过程中,渐渐坚固而到达顶点。诸寻完全灭尽,是指一切邪寻都消失,不再现行;或者因为修习圆满,被无余地断除。巴利
219.Vitakkamūlabhedaṃ pabbanti vitakkamūlassa tammūlassa ca bhedavibhāvanaṃ vitakkamūlabhedaṃ pabbaṃ. Vitakkaṃ saṅkharotīti vitakkasaṅkhāro, vitakkapaccayo subhanimittādīsupi subhādinā ayonisomanasikāro. So pana vitakkasaṅkhāro saṃtiṭṭhati etthāti vitakkasaṅkhārasaṇṭhānaṃ, asubhe subhantiādi saññāvipallāso. Tenāha ‘‘vitakkānaṃ mūlañca mūlamūlañca manasi kātabba’’nti. Vitakkānaṃ mūlamūlaṃ gacchantassāti upaparikkhanavasena micchāvitakkānaṃ mūlaṃ uppattikāraṇaṃ ñāṇagatiyā gacchantassa. Yāthāvato jānantassa pubbe viya vitakkā abhiṇhaṃ nappavattantīti āha ‘‘vitakkacāro sithilo hotī’’ti. Tasmiṃ sithilībhūte matthakaṃ gacchanteti vuttanayena vitakkacāro sithilabhūto, tasmiṃ vitakkānaṃ mūlagamane anukkamena thirabhāvappattiyā matthakaṃ gacchante. Vitakkā sabbaso nirujjhantīti micchāvitakkā sabbepi gacchanti na samudācaranti, bhāvanāpāripūriyā vā anavasesā pahīyanti.
“落在耳根处”,意思是像撞到耳鼓一样,突然落到兔子的耳朵旁边。据说那只兔子下面有一个大老鼠挖出的大洞,形状像条地道,所以它一掉下去就发出了很大的响声。它们一边逃一边喊:“大地裂开了!”所谓“去到根之根再追究”,意思是:既然这只兔子是因为“大地裂开”才惊起的,那就该到那个地方去,好好查清楚它真正的起因。到了那个所谓大地裂开的地方,兔子却说:“谁知道呢?会变成什么样?大人,我说不上来。”因为有所求的时候,说话自然就变得柔软。“发出咚咚声”,就是发出“咚咚”的响声,这不过是对声音的描述。“尊者”,是对兽王的亲昵称呼,意思是“兽王啊,愿您吉祥”。“这是怎么回事”,就是问“这是什么?它的根本原因是什么?”
“咚咚”,这也只是对声音的描述。“如此”,意思是:就像兔子那“大地崩裂”的认知,是由对响声的错误执取产生的,根本没有根据一样,寻的现行也是由想颠倒产生的,同样没有根据。所以他说了“寻……”等话。巴利
Kaṇṇamūle patitanti sasakassa kaṇṇasamīpe kaṇṇasakkhaliṃ paharantaṃ viya upapatitaṃ. Tassa kira sasakassa heṭṭhā mahāmūsikāhi khatamahāvāṭaṃ umaṅgasadisaṃ ahosi, tenassa pātena mahāsaddo ahosi. Palāyiṃsu ‘‘pathavī udrīyatī’’ti. Mūlamūlaṃ gantvā anuvijjeyyanti ‘‘pathavī bhijjatī’’ti yatthāyaṃ saso uṭṭhito, tattha gantvā tassa mūlakāraṇaṃ yaṃnūna vīmaṃseyyaṃ. Pathaviyā bhijjanaṭṭhānaṃ gate ‘‘ko jānāti, kiṃ bhavissatī’’ti saso ‘‘na sakkomi sāmī’’ti āha. Ādhipaccavato hi yācanaṃ saṇhamudukaṃ. Duddubhāyatīti duddubhāti saddaṃ karoti. Anuravadassanañhetaṃ. Bhaddanteti migarājassa piyasamudācāro, migarāja, bhaddaṃ te atthūti attho. Kimetanti kiṃ etaṃ, kiṃ tassa mūlakāraṇaṃ? Duddubhanti idampi tassa anuravadassanameva. Evanti yathā sasakassa mahāpathavībhedanaṃ ravanāya micchāgāhasamuṭṭhānaṃ amūlaṃ, evaṃ vitakkacāropi saññāvipallāsasamuṭṭhāno amūlo. Tenāha ‘‘vitakkāna’’ntiādi.
220 “上齿”是指能压伏的齿,也就是上齿的意思。因此说“上齿”。因为上齿在咀嚼时,就像杵压过臼一样,对某物有特别的压伏作用。“以善心”,是指与强有力的正思惟相应的心。“不善心”,是指夹杂着欲寻等的不善心。“应当加以镇伏”,意思是应当这样压伏它、制伏它,使它在将来不再生起,达到不再现起的境地。“你们是谁?你们即使长久修习,尚且如此不软弱;我又是谁?我在依靠中仿佛刚站稳,如今却要让它失去依靠”——就这样压伏之后。接着,为了说明那种压伏的方式,他以“就算皮肤、肉……”等语,开示了具备四支的精进努力。“阐明义理”,是指纯粹说明镇伏寻思的意义。“譬喻”,就是“诸比丘,譬如大力士……”等譬喻。巴利
220.Abhidantanti abhibhavanadantaṃ, uparidantanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘uparidanta’’nti. So hi itaraṃ musalaṃ viya udukkhalaṃ visesato kassaci khādanakāle abhibhuyya vattati. Kusalacittenāti balavasammāsaṅkappasampayuttena. Akusalacittanti kāmavitakkādisahitaṃ akusalacittaṃ. Abhiniggaṇhitabbanti yathā tassa āyatiṃ samudācāro na hoti, evaṃ abhibhavitvā niggahetabbaṃ, anuppattidhammatā āpādetabbāti attho. Ke ca tumhe satipi cirakālabhāvanāya evaṃ adubbalā ko cāhaṃ mama santike laddhappatiṭṭhe viya ṭhitepi idāneva appatiṭṭhe karonto iti evaṃ abhibhavitvā. Taṃ pana abhibhavanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘kāmaṃ taco cā’’tiādinā caturaṅgasamannāgatavīriyapaggaṇhanamāha. Atthadīpikanti ekantato vitakkaniggaṇhanatthajotakaṃ. Upamanti ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, balavā puriso’’tiādikaṃ upamaṃ.
221 “取尽分别”指的是:对于从一开始就开示的“致力于增上心的比丘,应当适时地作意五种相”当中所说的内容,就那相在作意时令其完全取尽的方面来进行分别。或者,这是一个总结,也就是“诸比丘,因此……”等话。因为把先前所说的义理再说一遍,就叫做总结。又或者,为了显示依照这样修行的人已经达到自在与清净,才说了“诸比丘,因此……”等话。“武艺之师”,指的是教射箭的老师。就像即使不是武艺,也可以凭“武艺”一词而包括在内;同样地,弓术这项技艺也包含在射艺之中。巴利
221.Pariyādānabhājanīyanti yaṃ taṃ ādito ‘‘adhicittamanuyuttena bhikkhunā pañca nimittāni kālena kālaṃ manasi kātabbānī’’ti niddiṭṭhaṃ, tattha tassa nimittassa manasikaraṇakālapariyādānassa vasena vibhajanaṃ. Nigamanaṃ vā etaṃ, yadidaṃ ‘‘yato kho, bhikkhave’’tiādi. Yathāvuttassa hi atthassa puna vacanaṃ nigamananti. Tathāpaṭipannassa vā vasībhāvavisuddhidassanatthaṃ ‘‘yato kho, bhikkhave’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Satthācariyoti dhanubbedācariyo. Yathā hi sasanato asatthampi satthaggahaṇeneva saṅgayhati, evaṃ dhanusippampi dhanubbedapariyāpannamevāti.
“遍行”就是周遍地思惟。说到“轮”,是指“在寻的轮转之道中”,也就是寻以轮转的方式运行于各种道路。“修习自在”是反复修习而得的自在。“娴熟自在”是善加修习而得的自在。只有正思惟才能随自己的意愿而思惟,至于另一种思惟,则完全只是为了摧毁障碍。巴利
Pariyāyati parivitakketīti pariyāyo. Vāroti āha ‘‘vitakkavārapathesū’’ti, vitakkānaṃ vārena pavattanamaggesu. Ciṇṇavasīti āsevitavasī. Paguṇavasīti subhāvitavasī. Sammāvitakkaṃyeva yathicchitaṃ tathāvitakkanato, itarassa panassa setughātoyevāti.